Handleiding Fiat Freemont - 2014 (pagina 18 van 412) (Engels)

637841

Verklein

Vergroot

Pagina terug

1/412

Pagina verder

OWNER HANDBOOK

FIATFREEMONT

ENGLISH

The data contained in this publication is intended merely as a guide. FIAT reserves the right to modify the models and

versions described in this booklet at any time for technical and commercial reasons.

If you have any further questions please consult your FIAT dealer.

Printed in recycled paper without chlorine.

1742586_EE_FIAT_Freemont_OM_cover.indd 1 8/27/14 3:52 PM

We really know your car because we invented, designed

and built it: we know every single detail. At

Fiat Service authorised workshops you can ﬁnd

technicians who are trained by us, offering quality and

professionalism for all your service requirements.

Fiat workshops are always close to you for your

servicing operations, repairs and seasonal checks and

our experts will offer practical recommendations for

keeping your car in the best possible condition.

When you use Genuine Parts you keep the reliability,

comfort and performance features of your new car

over time.

Always ask for Genuine Parts and insist on them

being ﬁtted to your car. We recommend them because

we know they are derived from our continued

commitment to research and development and our use

of highly innovative technologies.

For these reasons, you can rely on Genuine Parts

because they are the only ones designed speciﬁcally

for your car.

WHY CHOOSE

GENUINE PARTS

1742586_EE_FIAT_Freemont_OM_cover.indd 2 8/27/14 3:52 PM

All our Genuine Parts undergo rigorous testing, both in design and build stages, by specialists who check the use of

cutting-edge materials and test their reliability.

This guarantees performance and safety in the long term for both you and the passengers in your automobile.

Always insist on a Genuine Part and check that it has been used.

Dear Customer,

Thank you for choosing Fiat and congratulations on your choice of a Fiat Freemont.

We have written this handbook to help you get to know all your car and use it in the best possible way.

You should read it right through before taking to the road for the first time.

You will find information, tips and important warnings regarding the driving of your car to help you get the most from the

technological features of your Fiat.

Carefully read the warnings and indications marked with the following symbols:

personal safety;

car safety;

environmental protection.

The enclosed Warranty Booklet lists the services that Fiat offers to its customers:

• the Warranty Certificate with terms and conditions for maintaining its validity

• the range of additional services available to Fiat customers.

Enjoy the read. Happy motoring!

This Owner Handbook describes all versions of the Fiat Freemont; please consider only the information relevant

to your version, engine and configuration.

KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE

INTRODUCTION

Congratulations on selecting your new FIAT vehicle. Be

assured that it represents precision workmanship, dis-

tinctive styling, and high quality - all essentials that are

traditional to our vehicles.

Before you start to drive this vehicle, read this Owner's

Manual and all the supplements. Be sure you are familiar

with all vehicle controls, particularly those used for

braking, steering, and transmission shifting. Learn how

your vehicle handles on different road surfaces. Your

driving skills will improve with experience, but as in

driving any vehicle , take it easy as you begin. Always

observe local laws wherever you drive.

NOTE: After reviewing the owner information,

it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient

referencing and remain with the vehicle when

sold.

Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in

loss of control or a collision.

Operating this vehicle at excessive speeds or while

intoxicated may result in loss of control, collision with

other vehicles or objects, going off the road, or over-

turning; any of which may lead to serious injury or

death. Also, failure to use seat belts subjects the driver

and passengers to a greater risk of injury or death.

To keep your vehicle running at its best, have your

vehicle serviced at recommended intervals by an au-

thorized dealer who has the qualified personnel, special

tools, and equipment to perform all service.

The manufacturer and its distributors are vitally inter-

ested in your complete satisfaction with this vehicle. If

you encounter a service or warranty problem, which is

not resolved to your satisfaction, discuss the matter

with your dealer's management.

Your authorized dealer will be happy to assist you with

any questions about your vehicle.

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

IMPORTANT NOTICE

ALL MATERIAL CONTAINED IN THIS PUBLICA-

TION IS BASED ON THE LATEST INFORMATION

AVAILABLE AT TIME OF PUBLICATION APPROVAL.

THE RIGHT IS RESERVED TO PUBLISH REVISIONS

AT ANY TIME.

This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the

assistance of service and engineering specialists to

acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of

your new vehicle. It is supplemented by a Warranty

Information Booklet and various customer-oriented

documents. You are urged to read these publications

carefully. Following the instructions and recommenda-

tions in this Owner's Manual will help assure safe and

enjoyable operation of your vehicle.

The manufacturer reserves the right to make changes

in design and specifications, and/or to make additions

to or improvements in its products without imposing

any obligations upon itself to install them on products

previously manufactured.

The Owner's Manual illustrates and describes the fea-

tures that are standard or available as extra cost op-

tions. Therefore, some of the equipment and accesso-

ries in this publication may not appear on your vehicle.

NOTE: Be sure to read the Owner's Manual first

before driving your vehicle and before attaching or

installing parts/accessories or making other modifica-

tions to the vehicle.

In view of the many replacement parts and accessories

from various manufacturers available on the market,

the manufacturer cannot be certain that the driving

safety of your vehicle will not be impaired by the

attachment or installation of such parts. Even if such

parts are officially-approved (for example, by a general

operating permit for the part or by constructing the

part in an officially approved design), or if an individual

operating permit was issued for the vehicle after the

attachment or installation of such parts, it cannot be

implicitly assumed that the driving safety of your ve-

hicle is unimpaired. Therefore, neither experts nor

official agencies are liable . The manufacturer only as-

sumes responsibility when parts, which are expressly

authorized or recommended by the manufacturer, are

attached or installed at an authorized dealer. The same

applies when modifications to the original condition

are subsequently made on the manufacturer's vehicles.

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Your warranties do not cover any part that the manu-

facturer did not supply. Nor do they cover the cost of

any repairs or adjustments that might be caused or

needed because of the installation or use of non-

manufacturer parts, components, equipment, materi-

als, or additives. Nor do your warranties cover the

costs of repairing damage or conditions caused by any

changes to your vehicle that do not comply with the

manufacturers specifications.

Original parts and accessories and other products

approved by the manufacturer, including qualified ad-

vice, are available at your authorized dealer.

When it comes to service, remember that your autho-

rized dealer knows your vehicle best, has the factory-

trained technicians and genuine parts, and is interested

in your satisfaction.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

Consult the Table of Contents to determine which

section contains the information you desire.

Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the

items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and

illustrations may differ from your vehicle's equipment.

The detailed index at the back of this Owner's Manual

contains a complete listing of all subjects.

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Consult the following table for a description of the

symbols that may be used on your vehicle or through-

out this Owner's Manual:

(fig. 1)

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/

ALTERATIONS

WARNING!

Any modifications or alterations to this

vehicle

could seriously affect its road-

wort hiness and safety and may lead to a collision

resulting in serious injury or death.

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES

(fig. 2)

1 — Side Window Demist Outlet 6 — Switch Bank 11 — Engine Start/Stop Button

2 — Air Outlet 7 — Uconnect® Hard Controls 12 — Hood Release Lever

3 — Instrument Cluster 8 — SD Memory Card Slot 13 — Dimmer Controls

4 — Uconnect® System 9 — Power Outlet 14 — Headlight Switch

5 — Glove Compartment 10 — CD/DVD Slot

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

INSTRUMENTS

(fig. 3)

1. Tachometer

This gauge measures engine revolutions per minute

(RPM x 1000). Before the pointer reaches the red area,

ease up on the accelerator to prevent engine damage.

2. Speedometer

Shows the vehicle speed.

3. Fuel Gauge

The fuel gauge shows the level of fuel in the tank when

ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.

(fig. 3)

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

4. CoolantTemperature Gauge

The temperature gauge indicates engine coolant tem-

perature. Any reading within the normal range indi-

cates that the cooling system is operating satisfactorily.

The gauge pointer will likely indicate a high tempera-

ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,

in heavy traffic, or when towing a trailer. If the pointer

rises to the “H” mark, safely pull over and stop the

vehicle. If the Air Conditioning A/C system is on, turn

it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and

idle the vehicle. If the needle remains on the “H” mark,

turn the engine OFF immediately and call for service.

Do not leave your vehicle unattended

with t he engine running,as you would not

be able to react to the temperature indi-

cator light if the engine overheats.

A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS

Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system

consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

transmitter and a Keyless Ignition Node (KIN).

Keyless Enter-N-Go Feature™

This vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-

Go™ feature, refer to “Starting Procedures” in “Start-

ing And Driving” for further information.

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

KEYLESS IGNITION NODE (KIN)

This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition

switch with the push of a button, as long as the Remote

Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is in the passenger

compartment.

The Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) has four operating

positions, three of which are labeled and will illuminate

when in position. The three positions are LOCK/OFF,

ACC, and ON/RUN. The fourth position is START.

During start RUN will illuminate.

NOTE: In case the ignition switch does not change

with the push of a button, the RKE transmitter (Key

Fob) may have a low or dead battery. In this situation a

back up method can be used to operate the ignition

switch. Put the nose side (side opposite of the emer-

gency key) of the Key Fob against the ENGINE START/

STOP button and push to operate the ignition switch.

(fig. 4)

Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)

1 — LOCK/OFF

2 — ACC (ACCESSORY )

3 — ON/RUN

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

KEY FOB

The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry

(RKE) transmitter and an emergency key, which stores

in the rear of the Key Fob.

The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle

should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go

dead. The emergency key is also for locking the glove

box. You can keep the emergency key with you when

valet parking.

To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical

latch on the side of the Key Fob sideways with your

thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand.

(fig. 5)

NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency

key into the lock cylinders with either side up.

IGNITION OR ACCESSORY ON MESSAGE

Opening the driver's door when the ignition is in ACC

or ON (engine not running), a chime will sound to

remind you to cycle the ignition to OFF. In addition to

the chime, the ignition or accessory on message will

display in the cluster.

NOTE: With the Uconnect® system, the power win-

dow switches, radio, power sunroof (for versions/

markets, where provided), and power outlets will re-

main active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is

cycled to the OFF position. Opening either front door

will cancel this feature. The time for this feature is

programmable. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in

“Knowing Your Vehicle” for further information.

WARNING!

• Before exiting a vehicle, always apply

e parking brake, shift the transmission

into PARK, and push ignition button to place

ignition in OFF position. When leaving the ve-

hicle, always lock your vehicle.

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with

access to an unlocked vehicle.

(Continued)

(fig. 5)

Emergency Key Removal

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

WARNING! (Continued)

• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended

is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or

others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-

dren should be warned not to touch the parking

brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear se-

lector.

• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle

or in a location accessible to children, and do not

leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with

Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN

mode. A child could operate power windows,

other controls, or move t he vehicle.

• Do not leave children or animals inside parked

vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up

may cause serious injury or death.

An unlocked car is an invitation to

thieves.Always remove the Key Fob from

vehicle, cycle the ignit ion OFF and lock

all door s when leaving the vehicle unattended.

SENTRY KEY®

The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system prevents unau-

thorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The

system does not need to be armed or activated. Op-

eration is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle

is locked or unlocked.

The system uses a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry

(RKE) transmitter, a Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) and a

RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.

Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to the

vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle.

After cycling the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the

Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for

a bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb

check, it indicates that there is a problem with the

electronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after

the bulb check, it indicates that someone used an

invalid Key Fob to start the engine. Either of these

conditions will result in the engine being shut off after

two seconds.

If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal

vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10

seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the elec-

tronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as

soon as possible by an authorized dealer.

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle

have been programmed to the vehicle electronics.

REPLACEMENT KEYS

NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the

vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the

vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it

cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.

• Always remove the Key Fobs from the

vehicle and lock all doors when leaving

the vehicle unattended.

• With Keyless Enter-N-Go™, always remember

to place the ignition in the OFF position.

Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an

authorized dealer, this procedure consists of program-

ming a blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank

Key Fob is one that has never been programmed.

NOTE: When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizer

system serviced, bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to

the authorized dealer.

CUSTOMER KEY PROGRAMMING

Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be

performed at an authorized dealer.

General Information

The Sentry Key® operates on a carrier frequency of

433.92 MHz. The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system will

be used in the following European countries, which

apply Directive 1999/5/EC: Austria, Belgium, Czech

Republic, Denmark, Finland, France, Germany, Greece,

Hungary, Ireland, Italy, Luxembourg, Netherlands, Nor-

way, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Russian Federation,

Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Croatia, and

United Kingdom.

Operation is subject to the following conditions:

• This device may not cause harmful interference.

• This device must accept any interference that may be

received, including interference that may cause un-

desired operation.

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)

The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the

doors and liftgate from distances up to approximately

20 m using a hand-held Key Fob with RKE transmitter.

The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at

the vehicle to activate the system.

NOTE: Driving at speeds 8 km/h and above disables

the system from responding to all RKE transmitter

buttons for all RKE transmitters.

(fig. 6)

To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate

Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE

transmitter once to unlock the driver's door or twice

within five seconds to unlock all doors and liftgate. The

turn signal lights will f lash to acknowledge the unlock

signal. The illuminated entry system will also turn on.

If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to

“Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Knowing Your Ve-

hicle” for further information.

Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors

1st Press

This feature lets you program the system to unlock

either the driver's door or all doors on the first press of

the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To

change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Set-

tings” in “Knowing Your Vehicle” for further informa-

tion.

Flash Lights With Lock

This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash

when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE

transmitter. This feature can be turned on or turned

off. To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect®

Settings” in “Knowing Your Vehicle” for further infor-

mation.

(fig. 6)

Key Fob With RKE Transmitter

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Turn Headlights On With Remote Key Unlock

This feature activates the headlights for up to 90

seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE

transmitter. The time for this feature is programmable

on vehicles equipped through Uconnect®. To change

the current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in

“Knowing Your Vehicle” for further information.

To Lock The Doors And Liftgate

Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE trans-

mitter to lock all doors and liftgate. The turn signal

lights will flash to acknowledge the signal.

If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to

“Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Knowing Your Ve-

hicle” for further information.

Programming Additional Transmitters

Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be

performed at an authorized dealer.

Transmitter Battery Replacement

The recommended replacement battery is one

CR2032 battery.

NOTE:

• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.

Batteries could contain dangerous materials. Please

dispose of them according to respect for environ-

ment and local laws.

• Used batteries are harmful to the environment. You

can dispose of them either in the correct containers

as specified by law or by taking them to a Dealership,

which will deal with their disposal.

• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the

back housing or the printed circuit board.

1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechani-

cal latch on the back of the RKE transmitter side-

ways with your thumb and then pull the key out with

your other hand.

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade

screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two

halves of the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not

to damage the seal during removal. (fig. 7)

3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over

(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a

solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace

the battery. When replacing the battery, match the

+ sign on the battery to the + sign on the inside of

the battery clip, located on the back cover. Avoid

touching the new battery with your fingers. Skin oils

may cause battery deterioration. If you touch a

battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.

4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two

halves together.

General Information

The transmitter and receivers operate on a carrier

frequency of 433.92 MHz as required by EEC regula-

tions. These devices must be certified to conform to

specific regulations in each individual country. Two sets

of regulations are involved: ETS (European Telecom-

munication Standard) 300–220, which most countries

use, and German BZT federal regulation 225Z125,

which is based on ETC 300–220 but has additional

unique requirements. Other defined requirements are

noted in ANNEX VI of COMMISSION DIRECTIVE

95/56/EC. Operation is subject to the following two

conditions:

• This device may not cause harmful interference.

• This device must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause undesired op-

eration.

If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal

distance, check for these two conditions:

1. Weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life

of the battery is a minimum of three years.

2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio

station tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile

or CB radios.

(fig. 7)

Separating RKE Transmitter Case

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM

The Vehicle Security Alarm (VSA) system monitors the

vehicle doors, hood, and liftgate for unauthorized en-

try and the ignition switch for unauthorized operation.

If something triggers the alarm, the system will sound

the horn intermittently, flash the headlights and tail-

lights, and flash the Vehicle Security Light in the instru-

ment cluster.

REARMING OF THE SYSTEM

If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken

to disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the

horn after 29 seconds, turn off all of the visual signals

after one minute, and then the Vehicle Security Alarm

will rearm itself.

TO ARM THE SYSTEM

Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:

1. Make sure the vehicle ignition system is "OFF".

(refer to "Starting Procedures" in "Starting And

Driving" for further information).

2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the

vehicle:

• Press LOCK on the interior power door lock

switch with the driver and/or passenger door open.

• Press the LOCK button on the exterior Passive

Entry Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in

the same exterior zone (refer to "Keyless Enter-N-

Go™" in "Knowing Your Vehicle" for further infor-

mation).

• Press the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless

Entry (RKE) transmitter.

3. If any doors are open, close them.

TO DISARM THE SYSTEM

The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any

of the following methods:

• Press the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless

Entry (RKE) transmitter.

• Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle with a

valid key fob available in the same exterior zone

(refer to "Keyless Enter-N-Go™" in "Knowing Your

Vehicle" for further information).

• Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF

position by pressing the Keyless Enter-N-Go™

Start/Stop button (requires at least one valid Key Fob

in the vehicle).

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

NOTE:

• The driver's door key cylinder and the liftgate button

on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the

Vehicle Security Alarm.

• The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during

power lif tgate entry. Pressing the liftgate button will

not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone

enters the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any

door the alarm will sound.

• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the

interior power door lock switches will not unlock

the doors.

The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your

vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the

system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ-

ously described arming sequences has occurred, the

Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether

you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the

vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this

occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.

If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery

becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will

remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the

exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound. If this

occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.

SECURITY SYSTEM MANUAL OVERRIDE

The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the

doors using the manual door lock plunger.

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

PREMIUM SECURITY SYSTEM (for

versions/markets, where

provided)

The Premium Security system monitors the doors,

hood latch, and trunk for unauthorized entry and the

ignition switch for unauthorized operation. The system

also includes a dual function intrusion sensor and

vehicle tilt sensor. The intrusion sensor monitors the

vehicle interior for motion. The vehicle tilt sensor

monitors the vehicle for any tilting actions (tow away,

tire removal, ferry transport, etc).

In the event that something triggers the security sys-

tem, the headlights will turn on, the alarm will sound

and the turn signal and side repeater lights will flash for

29 seconds, and then the lights will continue to flash for

an additional 5 seconds. The system will repeat this

sequence for up to 8 security violations in any mode

(door ajar, motion, hood ajar, etc.) before having to

rearm the system. At the end of any particular trigger

event, the lights will continue to flash for 26 seconds.

TO ARM THE SYSTEM

Follow these steps to arm the theft alarm:

1. Make sure the vehicle ignition system is "OFF".

(refer to "Starting Procedures" in "Starting And

Driving" for further information).

2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the

vehicle:

• Push LOCK on the interior power door lock

switch with the driver and/or passenger door open.

• Push the LOCK button on the exterior Passive

Entry Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in

the same exterior zone (refer to "Keyless Enter-N-

Go™" in "Knowing Your Vehicle" for further infor-

mation).

• Push the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless

Entry (RKE) transmitter.

3. If any doors are open, close them.

NOTE:

• Once the security system is armed, it remains in that

state until you disarm it by following either of the

disarming procedures described. If a power loss oc-

curs after arming the system, you must disarm the

system af ter restoring power to prevent alarm acti-

vation.

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

• The ultrasonic intrusion sensor (motion detector)

actively monitors your vehicle every time you arm

the security system. If you prefer, you can turn OFF

the ultrasonic intrusion sensor and vehicle tilt sensor

when arming the security system. To do so, push the

LOCK button on the RKE transmitter three times

within 5 seconds of arming the system (while the

Vehicle Security Light is flashing rapidly).

TO DISARM THE SYSTEM

The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any

of the following methods:

• Push the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless

Entry (RKE) transmitter.

• Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle with a

valid key fob available in the same exterior zone

(refer to "Keyless Enter-N-Go™" in "Knowing Your

Vehicle" for further information).

• Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF

position by pushing the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Start/

Stop button (requires at least one valid Key Fob in

the vehicle).

NOTE:

• The driver's door key cylinder and the trunk button

on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the

Vehicle Security Alarm.

• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the

interior power door lock switches will not unlock

the doors.

The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your

vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the

system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ-

ously described arming sequences has occurred, the

Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether

you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the

vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this

occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.

If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery

becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will

remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the

exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound. If this

occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.

SECURITY SYSTEM MANUAL OVERRIDE

The system will not arm if you lock the doors using the

manual door lock plunger.

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

STEERING WHEEL LOCK

Your vehicle may be equipped with a passive electronic

steering wheel lock. This lock prevents steering the

vehicle without the ignition key. If the steering wheel is

moved to one of the lock positions with the key in the

off positions, the steering wheel will lock.

TO MANUALLY LOCKTHE STEERING

WHEEL

With the engine running, rotate the steering wheel

one-half revolution in either direction (three o’clock or

nine o’clock position), turn off the engine and remove

the key. Turn the steering wheel slightly in either

direction until the lock engages.

TO RELEASE THE STEERING WHEEL LOCK

Cycle the ignition and start the engine.

NOTE: If you turned the wheel to the right to engage

the lock, you must turn the wheel slightly to the right

to disengage it. If you turned the wheel to the lef t to

engage the lock, turn the wheel slightly to the left to

disengage it.

ELECTRONIC VEHICLE

INFORMATION CENTER (EVIC)

The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-

tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the

instrument cluster.

(fig. 8)

This system allows the driver to select a variety of

useful information by pushing the switches mounted on

the steering wheel. The EVIC consists of the following:

• Radio Info

• Fuel Economy

• Vehicle Speed

• Trip Info

(fig. 8)

ElectronicVehicle Information Center (EVIC)

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

• Tire Pressure

• Vehicle Information

• Warning Message Displays

• Turn Menu OFF

The system allows the driver to select information by

pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering

wheel:

(fig. 9)

• UP Arrow Button

Push and release the UP button to scroll

upward through the main menus and

submenus.

• DOWN Arrow Button

Push and release the DOWN button to scroll

downward through the main menus and

submenus.

• RIGHT Arrow Button

Push and release the RIGHT arrow button

for access to main menus or submenus. Push

and hold the RIGHT arrow button for two

seconds to reset features.

• BACK Button

Push and release the BACK button to scroll

back to a previous menu.

(fig. 9)

EVIC Controls

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

ELECTRONICVEHICLE INFORMATION

CENTER (EVIC) DISPLAYS

The EVIC display consists of three sections:

1. The top line where compass direction, odometer

line and outside temperature are displayed.

2. The main display area where the menus and pop up

messages are displayed.

3. The reconfigurable telltales section below the

odometer line.

The main display area will normally display the main

menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main

menu. The main display area also displays "pop up"

messages that consist of approximately 60 possible

warning or information messages. These pop up mes-

sages fall into several categories:

• Five Second Stored Messages

When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of

message takes control of the main display area for five

seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Most

of the messages of this type are then stored (as long as

the condition that activated it remains active) and can

be reviewed from the "Messages" main menu item. As

long as there is a stored message, an "i" will be displayed

in the EVIC's compass/outside temp line. Examples of

this message type are "Right Front Turn Signal Lamp

Out" and "Low Tire Pressure".

• Unstored Messages

This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the

condition that activated the message is cleared. Ex-

amples of this message type are "Turn Signal On" (if a

turn signal is left on) and "Lights On" (if driver leaves

the vehicle).

• Unstored Messages Until RUN

This message type is displayed until the ignition is in the

RUN state. Example of this message type is "Press

Brake Pedal and Push Button to Start".

• Five Second Unstored Messages

When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of

message takes control of the main display area for five

seconds and then returns to the previous screen.

Examples of this message type are "Memory System

Unavailable - Not in Park" and "Automatic High Beams

On".

The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the

white telltales area on the right, amber telltales in the

middle, and red telltales on the left.

When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC dis-

plays the following messages:

Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime if the

vehicle is driven more than 1.6 km with either turn

signal on)

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Left Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)

Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)

Right Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)

Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)

RKE Battery Low (with a single chime)

Personal Settings Not Available – Vehicle Not in PARK

(for versions/markets, where provided)

Left/Right Front Door Ajar (one or more doors open,

with a single chime if speed is above 1.6 km/h)

Left/Right Rear Door Ajar (one or more doors open,

with a single chime if speed is above 1.6 km/h)

Door(s) Ajar (with a single chime if vehicle is in motion)

Liftgate Ajar (with a single chime)

Low Washer Fluid (with a single chime)

Ignition or Accessory On

Vehicle Not in Park (for versions/markets, where pro-

vided)

Key Left Vehicle

Key Not Detected

Low Tire Pressure (with a single chime). Refer to

information on “Tire Pressure” and “Tire Pressure

Monitor” in “Knowing Your Vehicle”.

Inflate Tire to XXX. Refer to information on "Tire

Pressure" and "Tire Pressure Monitor" in "Knowing

Your Vehicle."

Service TPM System (with a single chime). Refer to

information on “Tire Pressure Monitor” in “Knowing

Your Vehicle”.

Oil Change Required (with a single chime)

Check Gascap (refer to “Adding Fuel” in “Knowing

Your Vehicle”)

Oil Change Due (with a single chime)

Exhaust System — Regeneration Required Now. Un-

der conditions of exclusive short duration and low

speed driving and low speed driving cycles, the engine

and exhaust after-treatment system may never reach

the conditions required to remove the trapped PM. If

this occurs the “Exhaust System Regeneration Re-

quired Now” message will be displayed on the EVIC. By

driving your vehicle at highway speeds for as little as 30

minutes, you can remedy the condition in the particu-

late filter system by allowing the trapped PM to be

removed to restore the system to normal operating

condition.

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Exhaust Service Required — See Dealer Now. The

engine will be de-rated to prevent permanent damage

to the after-treatment system. If this condition occurs,

it is necessary to have your vehicle ser viced by your

local authorized dealer.

EVIC WHITE TELLTALE LIGHTS

This area will show reconfigurable white caution tell-

tales. These telltales include:

• Shift Lever Status — Automatic Transmission

Only

The shift lever status “P,R,N,D,6,5,4,3,2,1” are dis-

played indicating the shift lever position. Telltales “6,

5,4,3,2,1” indicate the Autostick™ feature has been

engaged and the gear selected is displayed. For further

information on Autostick™, refer to “Starting And

Driving.”

• Electronic Speed Control ON

This light will turn on when the electronic

speed control is ON. For further informa-

tion, refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in

“Knowing Your Vehicle.”

• Electronic Speed Control SET

This light will turn on when the electronic

speed control is SET. For further information,

refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in

“Knowing Your Vehicle.”

EVIC AMBER TELLTALE LIGHTS

This area will show reconfigurable amber caution tell-

tales. These telltales include:

• Low Fuel Light

When the fuel level reaches approximately 11.0

L this light will turn on, and remain on until fuel

is added.

• Loose Gascap Indicator (for versions/markets,

where provided)

If the vehicle diagnostic system determines

that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly

installed, or damaged, a loose gascap indica-

tor will display in the tellt ale display area.

Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the SE-

LECT button to turn off the message. If the problem

continues, the message will appear the next time the

vehicle is started.

A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap

may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).

• Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator

This light will turn on to indicate the wind-

shield washer fluid is low.

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

• Electronic Stability Control OFF (ESC OFF) Indi-

cator Light

This light indicates the Electronic Stability

Control system (ESC) has been turned off by

the driver.

EVIC RED TELLTALE LIGHTS

This area will show reconfigurable red tellt ales. These

telltales include:

• Door Ajar

This light will turn on to indicate that one or

more doors may be ajar.

• Oil Pressure Warning Light

This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the

light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and

shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will

sound when this light turns on.

Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.

This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.

The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.

• Charging System Light

This light shows the status of the electrical

charging system. The light should come on when

the ignition is first cycled ON and remain on briefly as

a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on while

driving, turn off some of the vehicle's non-essential

electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If

the charging system light remains on, it means that the

vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging

system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an autho-

rized dealer.

If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting

Procedures” in “In An Emergency”.

• Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) L ight

This light informs you of a problem with the

Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system.

The light will come on when the ignition is

first turned ON and remain on briefly as a

bulb check. If the light does not come on during

starting, have the system checked by an authorized

dealer.

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

If a problem is detected, the light will come on while

the engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the

vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is

placed in the PARK position (for versions/markets,

where provided). The light should turn off.

If the light remains lit with the engine running, your

vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an autho-

rized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light

is flashing when the engine is running, immediate ser-

vice is required. You may experience reduced perfor-

mance, an elevated/rough idle or engine st all and your

vehicle may require towing.

• Engine Temperature Warning Light

This light warns of an overheated engine condi-

tion. As temperatures rise and the gauge ap-

proaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a

single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold.

Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge

to pass H, a continuous chime will occur until the

engine is allowed to cool.

If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and

stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off.

Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the

vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to

normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for

service.

• Transmission Temperature Warning Light (for

versions/markets, where provided)

This light indicates that the transmission f luid

temperature is running hot. This may occur

with severe usage, such as trailer towing. If

this light turns on, safely pull over and stop

the vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into NEU-

TRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the light

turns off.

Continuous driving with t heTransmission

Temperature Warning Light illuminated

will eventually cause severe transmission

damage or transmission failure.

WARNING!

If you continue operating the vehicle

when

the Transmission Temperature

Warning Light is illuminated you could cause the

fluid to boil over,come in contact with hot engine

or exhaust components and cause a fire.

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

GEAR SHIFT INDICATOR (GSI) — (for

versions/markets, where provided)

The Gear Shift Indicator (GSI) system is enabled on

vehicles with a manual transmission, or when a vehicle

with an automatic transmission is in manual shift mode.

The GSI provides the driver with a visual indication

within the EVIC when the recommended gear shift

point has been reached. This indication notifies the

driver that changing gear will allow a reduction in fuel

consumption.

When the shift up indicator (+) is shown on the display,

the GSI is advising the driver to engage a higher gear.

(fig. 10) (fig. 11)

When the shift down indicator (-) is shown on the

display, the GSI is advising the driver to engage a lower

gear.

(fig. 12) (fig. 13)

The GSI indicator in the EVIC remains illuminated until

the driver changes gear, or the driving conditions re-

turn to a situation where changing gear is not required

to improve fuel consumption.

(fig. 10)

GSI Shift Up (+) Indicator — Automatic Transmission

(fig. 11)

GSI Shift Up (+) Indicator — Manual Transmission

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

OIL CHANGE DUE

Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change

indicator system. The “Oil Change Due” message will

be in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds

after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next

scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change

indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the

engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent

upon your personal driving style.

Unless reset, this message will continue to display each

time you cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.

To turn off the message temporarily, press and release

the BACK button. To reset the oil change indicator

system please refer to a Fiat Dealership.

FUEL ECONOMY

Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Fuel

Economy” displays highlighted in the EVIC and press

the SELECT button. The following Fuel Economy func-

tions will display in the EVIC:

• Average Fuel Economy

• Distance To Empty (DTE)

• Instantaneous Fuel Economy

(fig. 12)

GSI Shift Down (-) Indicator — Automatic Transmission

(fig. 13)

GSI Shift Down (-) Indicator — Manual Transmission

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

AVERAGE FUEL ECONOMY

Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.

When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read

“RESET” or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the

history information will be erased, and the averaging

will continue from the last fuel average reading before

the reset.

(fig. 14)

DISTANCE TO EMPTY (DTE)

Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with

the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance

is determined by a weighted average of the inst anta-

neous and average fuel economy, according to the

current fuel tank level. DTE cannot be reset through

the SELECT button.

NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle

loading will greatly affect the actual drivable dist ance of

the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.

When the DTE value is less than 48 km estimated

driving distance, the DTE display will change to a

“LOW FUEL” message. This display will continue until

the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant amount

of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the “LOW FUEL”

message and a new DTE value will display.

L/100KM

This display shows the instantaneous L/100km in bar

graph form while driving. This will monitor the gas

mileage in real-time as you drive and can be used to

modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy.

VEHICLE SPEED

Press and release the UP or DOWN button until

“Vehicle Speed” displays highlighted in the EVIC. Press

the SELECT button to display the current speed

in km/h. Pressing the SELECT button a second time will

toggle the unit of measure between km/h.

NOTE: Changing the unit of measure in the Vehicle

Speed menu will not change the unit of measure in the

EVIC.

(fig. 14)

Fuel Economy Display

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

TRIP INFO

Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Trip

Info” displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the

SELECT button. Pressing the SELECT button with

"Trip Info" highlighted will cause the EVIC display to

show Trip A, Trip B, and Elapsed Time all in one display.

If you want to reset one of the three functions you use

the UP or DOWN buttons to highlight (select) the

feature that you want to reset. Pressing the SELECT

button will cause the selected feature to reset individu-

ally. The three features can only be reset individually.

The following Trip functions display in the EVIC:

• Trip A

• Trip B

• Elapsed Time

The Trip Functions mode displays the following infor-

mation:

TRIP A

Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the

last reset.

TRIP B

Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the

last reset.

ELAPSED TIME

Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last

reset. Elapsed time will increment when the ignition is

in the ON/RUN position.

TO RESET THE DISPLAY

Reset will only occur while a resettable function is

being displayed. Press and release the SELECT button

once to clear the resettable function.

TIRE BAR/PSI

Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Tire

BAR/PSI” displays highlighted in the EVIC. Press the

SELECT button to view a graphic of the vehicle with a

tire pressure value at each corner of the graphic.

VEHICLE INFO (CUSTOMER

INFORMATION FEATURES) (for

versions/markets, where provided)

Press and release the UP or DOWN button until

“Vehicle Info” displays in the EVIC and press the SE-

LECT button. Press the UP and DOWN button to

scroll through the available information displays that

may be equipped.

• CoolantTemp

Displays the actual coolant temperature.

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

• Oil Temperature — for versions/markets , where

provided

Displays the actual oil temperature.

• Oil Pressure — for versions/markets , where pro-

vided

Displays the actual oil pressure .

• Trans Temperature

Displays the actual transmission sump temperature.

• Engine Hours

Displays the number of hours of engine operation.

MESSAGES

In the Main Menu, press and release the UP or DOWN

button until “Messages: XX” displays highlighted in the

EVIC. If there is more than one message, pressing the

SELECT button will display a stored warning message.

Press and release the UP and DOWN buttons if there

is more than one message to step through the remain-

ing stored messages. If there are no message, pressing

the SELECT button will do nothing.

TURN MENU OFF

Select from Main Menu using the DOWN button.

Pushing the SELECT button blanks the menu display.

Pushing any one of the four steering wheel buttons

brings the menu back.

Uconnect® SETTINGS

BUTTONS ON THE FACEPLATE

Buttons on the faceplate are located on the left and

right side of the Uconnect® 4.3 screen. In addition,

there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right

side of the Climate Controls in the center of the

instrument panel. Turn the control knob to scroll

through menus and change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90),

press the center of the control knob one or more

times to select or change a setting (i.e., ON, OFF).

BUTTONS ON THE TOUCHSCREEN

Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the

Uconnect® touchscreen.

CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES

— Uconnect® 4.3 SETTINGS

In this mode the Uconnect® system allows you to

access programmable features that may be equipped

such as Display, Clock , Safety/Assistance, Lights, Doors

& Locks, Heated Seats (for versions/markets, where

provided), Engine Off Operation, Compass Settings,

Audio and Phone/Bluetooth settings through buttons

on the faceplate and buttons on the touchscreen.

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at

a time.

Press the "Settings" button on the faceplate to access

the Settings screen, use the Page Up/Down buttons on

the touchscreen to scroll through the following set-

tings. Press the desired setting button on the touch-

screen to change the setting using the description

shown on the following pages for each setting.

(fig. 15)

(fig. 16)

Display

• Brightness

Press the Brightness button on the touchscreen to

change this display. When in this display you may select

display brightness with the headlights on and the head-

lights of f. Adjust the brightness with the + and – setting

buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point

on the scale in between the + and – buttons on the

touchscreens followed by pressing the arrow back

button on the touchscreen.

(fig. 15)

1 — Uconnect® 4.3 Settings Button On The Faceplate

(fig. 16)

Uconnect® 4.3 Buttons On The Touchscreen

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

• Mode ( for versions/markets, where provided)

Press the Mode button on the touchscreen to change

this display. When in this display you may select one of

the auto display settings. To change Mode status press

and release the Day, Night or Auto button on the

touchscreen followed by pressing the arrow back but-

ton on the touchscreen.

• Language

Press the Language button on the touchscreen to

change this display. When in this display you may select

a different language for all display nomenclature, includ-

ing the trip functions and the navigation system (for

versions/markets, where provided). Press the German,

French, Spanish, Italian, Dutch or English button to

select the language preferred followed by pressing the

arrow back button on the touchscreen. Then, as you

continue, the information will display in the selected

language.

• Units

Press the Units button on the touchscreen to change

this display. When in this display you may select to have

the EVIC, odometer, and navigation system (for

versions/markets, where provided) changed between

US and Metric units of measure. Press US or Metric

followed by pressing the arrow back button on the

touchscreen. Then, as you continue, the information

will display in the selected units of measure.

• Voice Response (for versions/markets, where

provided)

Press the Voice Response button on the touchscreen

to change this display. When in this display you may

change the Voice Response Length settings. To change

the Voice Response Length press and release the Brief

or Long button on the touchscreen followed by press-

ing the arrow back button on the touchscreen.

• Touchscreen Beep

Press the Touchscreen Beep button on the touch-

screen to change this display. When in this display you

may turn on or shut off the sound heard when a

touchscreen button is pressed. To change the Touch-

screen Beep setting press and release the On or Off

button on the touchscreen followed by pressing the

arrow back button on the touchscreen.

Clock

•SetTime

Press the Set Time button on the touchscreen to

change this display. When in this display you may select

the time display settings. To make your selection, press

the Set Time button on the touchscreen, adjust the

hours and minutes using the up and down buttons on

the touchscreen, select AM or PM, select 12 hr or 24

hr followed by pressing the arrow back button on the

touchscreen when all selections are complete.

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

• Show Time Status (for versions/markets, where

provided)

Press the Show Time Status button on the touchscreen

to change this display. When in this display you may

turn on or shut off the digital clock in the status bar. To

change the Show Time Status setting press and release

the On or Off button on the touchscreen followed by

pressing the arrow back button on the touchscreen.

• Sync Time (for versions/markets, where pro-

vided)

Press the Sync Time button on the touchscreen to

change this display. When in this display you may

automatically have the radio set the time. To change

the Sync Time setting press and release the On or Off

button on the touchscreen followed by pressing the

arrow back button on the touchscreen.

Safety / Assistance

• Park Assist (for versions/markets, where pro-

vided)

Press the Park Assist button on the touchscreen to

change this display. The Rear Park Assist system will

scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmis-

sion shift lever is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is

less than 11 km/h. The system can be enabled with

Sound Only, Sound and Display, or turned OFF. To

change the Park Assist status press and release the Off,

Sound Only or Sounds and Display button followed by

pressing the arrow back button on the touchscreen.

• Hill Start Assist (for versions/markets, where

provided)

Press the Hill Start Assist button on the touchscreen

to change this display. When this feature is selected,

the Hill Start Assist (HSA) system is active. Refer to

“Electronic Brake Control System” in “Starting And

Driving” for system function and operating informa-

tion. To make your selection, press the Hill St art Assist

button on the touchscreen, select On or Off followed

by pressing the arrow back button on the touchscreen.

Lights

• Headlight Off Delay

Press the Headlight Off Delay button on the touch-

screen to change this display. When this feature is

selected, the driver can choose to have the headlights

remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when exiting the

vehicle. To change the Headlight Off Delay status press

the 0, 30, 60 or 90 button on the touchscreen followed

by pressing the arrow back button on the touchscreen.

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

• Illuminated Approach (for versions/markets,

where provided)

Press the Illuminated Approach button on the touch-

screen to change this display. When this feature is

selected, the headlights will activate and remain on for

0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked

with the RKE transmitter. To change the Illuminated

Approach status press the 0, 30, 60 or 90 button on the

touchscreen followed by pressing the arrow back but-

ton on the touchscreen.

• Headlights with Wipers (for versions/markets,

where provided)

Press the Headlights with Wipers button on the touch-

screen to change this display. When this feature is

selected, and the headlight switch is in the AUTO

position, the headlights will turn on approximately 10

seconds after the wipers are turned on. The headlights

will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they

were turned on by this feature. To make your selection,

press the Headlights with Wipers button on the touch-

screen, select On or Off followed by pressing the

arrow back button on the touchscreen.

• Auto High Beams “SmartBeam™” (for versions/

markets, where provided)

Press the Auto High Beams button on the touchscreen

to change this display. When this feature is selected,

the high beam headlights will deactivate automatically

under certain conditions. To make your selection,

press the Auto High Beams button on the touchscreen,

select ON or OFF followed by pressing the arrow back

button on the touchscreen. Refer to “Lights/

SmartBeam™ (for versions/markets, where provided)”

in “Knowing Your Vehicle” for further information.

• Flash Headlights with Lock (for versions/

markets, where provided)

Press the Flash Headlights with Lock button on the

touchscreen to change this display. When this feature is

selected, the front and rear turn signals will flash when

the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE trans-

mitter. To make your selection, press the Flash Head-

lights with Lock button on the touchscreen, select On

or Off followed by pressing the arrow back button on

the touchscreen.

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Doors & Locks

• Auto Lock (for versions/markets, where pro-

vided)

When this feature is selected, all doors will lock auto-

matically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 24 km/h.

To make your selection, press the Auto Lock button on

the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to

setting, indicating that the setting has been selected.

Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to

return to the previous menu.

• Auto Unlock on Exit (for versions/markets,

where provided)

Press the Auto Unlock on Exit button on the touch-

screen to change this display. When this feature is

selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is

stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEU-

TRAL position and the driver's door is opened. To

make your selection, press the Auto Unlock on Exit

button on the touchscreen, select On or Off followed

by pressing the arrow back button on the touchscreen.

• Flash L ights with Lock (for versions/markets,

where provided)

Press the Flash Lights with Lock button on the touch-

screen to change this display. When this feature is

selected, the front and rear turn signals will flash when

the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE trans-

mitter. To make your selection, press the Flash Lights

with Lock button on the touchscreen, select On or Off

followed by pressing the arrow back button on the

touchscreen.

• Remote Door Unlock Order (for versions/

markets, where provided)

Press the Remote Door Unlock Order button on the

touchscreen to change this display. When Unlock

Driver Door Only On 1st Press is selected, only the

driver's door will unlock on the first press of the RKE

transmitter UNLOCK button. When Driver Door 1st

Press is selected, you must press the RKE transmitter

UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger's

doors. When Unlock All Doors On 1st Press is

selected, all of the doors will unlock on the first press

of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button.

NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with Keyless Enter-

N-Go™ (Passive Entry) and the EVIC is programmed

to Unlock All Doors 1st Press, all doors will unlock no

matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is

grasped. If Driver Door 1st Press is programmed, only

the driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is

grasped. With Passive Entry, if Driver Door 1st Press is

programmed pressing the handle more than once will

only result in the driver’s door opening. If driver door

first is selected, once the driver door is opened, the

interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock

all doors (or use RKE transmitter).

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

• Passive Entry (Keyless Enter-N-Go™) (for

versions/markets, where provided)

Press the Passive Entry button on the touchscreen to

change this display. This feature allows you to lock and

unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to press the

RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons. To make your

selection, press the Passive Entr y button on the touch-

screen, select ON or OFF followed by pressing the

arrow back button on the touchscreen. Refer to “Key-

less Enter-N-Go™” in “Knowing Your Vehicle”.

Heated Seats (for versions/markets, where

provided)

• Auto Heated Seats (for versions/markets, where

provided)

Press the Auto Heated Seats button on the touch-

screen to change this display. When this feature is

selected the driver's heated seat will automatically turn

on when temperatures are below 4.4° C. To make your

selection, press the Auto Heated Seats button on the

touchscreen, select On or Off followed by pressing the

arrow back button on the touchscreen.

Engine Off Options

• Headlight Off Delay

Press the Headlight Off Delay button on the touch-

screen to change this display. When this feature is

selected, the driver can choose to have the headlights

remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when exiting the

vehicle. To change the Headlight Off Delay status press

the 0, 30, 60 or 90 button on the touchscreen followed

by pressing the arrow back button on the touchscreen.

• Engine Off Power Delay (for versions/markets,

where provided)

Press the Engine Off Power Delay button on the

touchscreen to change this display. When this feature is

selected, the power window switches, radio,

Uconnect® phone system (for versions/markets,

where provided), DVD video system (for versions/

markets, where provided), power sunroof (for

versions/markets, where provided), and power outlets

will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition

is cycled to OFF. Opening either front vehicle door will

cancel this feature. To change the Engine Off Power

Delay status press the 0 seconds, 45 seconds, 5 min-

utes or 10 minutes button on the touchscreen followed

by pressing the arrow back button on the touchscreen.

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Compass Settings

• Variance (for versions/markets, where provided)

Press the Variance button on the touchscreen to

change this display. Compass Variance is the difference

between Magnetic North and Geographic North. To

compensate for the differences the variance should be

set for the zone where the vehicle is driven, per the

zone map. Once properly set, the compass will auto-

matically compensate for the differences, and provide

the most accurate compass heading.

NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of

the instrument panel, such as iPod's, Mobile Phones,

Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is where the com-

pass module is located, and it can cause inter ference

with the compass sensor, and it may give false readings.

(fig. 17)

Compass Variance Map

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

• Calibration (for versions/markets, where pro-

vided)

Press the Calibration button to change this setting.

This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the

need to manually reset the compass. When the vehicle

is new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC

will display CAL until the compass is calibrated. You

may also calibrate the compass by pressing the ON

button on the touchscreen and completing one or

more 360–degree turns (in an area free from large

metal or metallic objects) until the CAL indicator

displayed in the EVIC turns of f. The compass will now

function normally.

NOTE: A good calibration requires a level surface and

an environment free from large metallic objects such as

buildings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks,

etc.

Audio

• Equalizer (for versions/markets, where provided)

Press the Equalizer button on the touchscreen to

change this display. When in this display you may adjust

the Bass, Mid and Treble settings. Adjust the settings

with the + and – setting buttons on the touchscreen or

by selecting any point on the scale in between the + and

– buttons on the touchscreen followed by pressing the

arrow back button on the touchscreen.

NOTE: Bass/mid/treble allow the you to simply slide

your finger up/down to change the setting as well as

press directly on the desired setting.

• Balance / Fade (for versions/markets, where pro-

vided)

Press the Balance / Fade button on the touchscreen to

change this display. When in this display you may adjust

the Balance and Fade settings.

• Speed AdjustedVolume (for versions/market s,

where provided)

Press the Speed Adjusted Volume button on the touch-

screen to change this display. Decreases volume rela-

tive to vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted

Volume press the Off, 1, 2 or 3 button on the touch-

screen followed by pressing the arrow back button on

the touchscreen.

• Surround Sound (for versions/markets, where

provided)

Press the Surround Sound button on the touchscreen

to change this display. Provides simulated surround

sound mode. To make your selection, press the Sur-

round Sound button on the touchscreen, select ON or

OFF followed by pressing the arrow back button on the

touchscreen.

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Phone/Bluetooth®

• Paired Devices

This feature shows which phones are paired to the

Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information,

refer to the Uconnect® Supplement.

CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES

— Uconnect® 8.4 SETTINGS

In this mode the Uconnect® system allows you to

access programmable features that may be equipped

such as Display, Clock , Safety/Assistance, Lights, Doors

& Locks, Auto-On Comfort, Engine Off Operation,

Compass Settings, Audio and Phone/Bluetooth® set-

tings.

NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at

a time.

When making a selection, scroll up or down until the

preferred setting is highlighted, then press and release

the preferred setting until a check-mark appears next

to the setting, showing that setting has been selected.

Display

• Display Mode (for versions/markets , where pro-

vided)

When in this display you may select one of the auto

display settings. To change Mode status press and

release the Day, Night or Auto button on the touch-

screen followed by pressing the arrow back button on

the touchscreen.

NOTE: The usage of the Parade Mode feature will

cause the radio to activate the “Display Brightness

With Headlights OFF” control even though the head-

lights are on.

• Display Brightness with Headlights ON (for

versions/markets, where provided)

When in this display you may select display brightness

with the headlights on and the headlights off. Adjust the

brightness with the + and – setting buttons on the

touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale in

between the + and – buttons on the touchscreen

followed by pressing the arrow back button on the

touchscreen.

• Display Brightness with Headlights OFF (for

versions/markets, where provided)

When in this display you may select display brightness

with the headlights on and the headlights off. Adjust the

brightness with the + and – setting buttons on the

touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale in

between the + and – buttons on the touchscreen

followed by pressing the arrow back button on the

touchscreen.

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

• Set Language (for versions/markets, where pro-

vided)

When in this display you may select a different language

for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions

and the navigation system (for versions/markets, where

provided). Press the German, French, Spanish, Italian,

Dutch or English button to select the language pre-

ferred followed by pressing the arrow back button on

the touchscreen. Then, as you continue, the informa-

tion will display in the selected language.

• Units (for versions/markets, where provided)

When in this display you may select to have the EVIC,

odometer, and navigation system (for versions/

markets, where provided) changed between US and

Metric units of measure. Press US or Metric followed

by pressing the arrow back button on the touchscreen.

Then, as you continue, the information will display in

the selected units of measure.

• Voice Response Length (for versions/markets,

where provided)

When in this display you may change the Voice Re-

sponse Length settings. To change the Voice Response

Length press and release the Brief or Detailed button

on the touchscreen followed by pressing the arrow

back button on the touchscreen.

• Touchscreen Beep

When in this display you may turn on or shut off the

sound heard when a touchscreen button (button on

the touchscreen) is pressed. To change the Touch-

screen Beep setting press and release the On or Off

button on the touchscreen followed by pressing the

arrow back button on the touchscreen.

• NavigationTurn-By-Turn in Cluster (for

versions/markets, where provided)

When this feature is selected, the turn-by-turn direc-

tions will appear in the display as the vehicle ap-

proaches a designated turn within a programmed

route. To make your selection, press the Navigation

Turn-By-Turn in Cluster button on the touchscreen,

select On or Off followed by pressing the arrow back

button on the touchscreen.

Clock

• Sync Time with GPS (for versions/markets,

where provided)

When in this display you may automatically have the

radio set the time. To change the Sync Time setting

press and release the On or Off button on the touch-

screen followed by pressing the arrow back button on

the touchscreen.

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

• Set Time Hours

When in this display you may select the time display

settings. To make your selection, press the Set Time

button on the touchscreen, adjust the hours using the

up and down buttons on the touchscreen, followed by

pressing the arrow back button on the touchscreen

when all selections are complete.

• Set Time Minutes

When in this display you may select the time display

settings. To make your selection, press the Set Time

button on the touchscreen, adjust the minutes using

the up and down buttons on the touchscreen, followed

by pressing the arrow back button on the touchscreen

when all selections are complete.

• Time Format

When in this display you may select the time display

settings. To make your selection, press the Set Time

button on the touchscreen, select 12 hr or 24 hr

followed by pressing the arrow back button on the

touchscreen when all selections are complete.

• Show Time in Status Bar (for versions/markets,

where provided)

When in this display you may turn on or shut off the

digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Time

Status setting press and release the On or Off button

on the touchscreen followed by pressing the arrow

back button on the touchscreen.

Safety / Assistance

• Park Assist (for versions/markets, where pro-

vided)

The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects

behind the vehicle when the transmission shift lever is

in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 km/h.

The system can be enabled with Sound Only, Sound

and Display, or turned OFF. To change the Park Assist

status press and release the Off, Sound Only or Sounds

and Display button followed by pressing the arrow back

button on the touchscreen.

• Parkview Backup Camera (for versions/markets,

where provided)

Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView®

Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see an

on-screen image of the rear surroundings of your

vehicle whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE.

The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen

display along with a caution note to “check entire

surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five

seconds this note will disappear. The ParkView® cam-

era is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear

License plate. To make your selection, press the

Parkview Backup Camera check box in the "Safety &

Driving Assistance" menu to enable/disable the

Parkview Backup Camera.

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

• Hill Start Assist (for versions/markets, where

provided)

When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist

(HSA) system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake

Control System” in “Starting And Driving” for system

function and operating information. To make your

selection, press the Hill Start Assist button on the

touchscreen, select On or Off followed by pressing the

arrow back button on the touchscreen.

Lights

• Headlight Off Delay

When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to

have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90

seconds when exiting the vehicle. To change the Head-

light Off Delay status press the 0, 30, 60 or 90 button

on the touchscreen followed by pressing the arrow

back button on the touchscreen.

• Headlight Illumination on Approach (for

versions/markets, where provided)

When this feature is selected, the headlights will acti-

vate and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when

the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To

change the Illuminated Approach status press the 0, 30,

60 or 90 button on the touchscreen followed by

pressing the arrow back button on the touchscreen.

• Headlights with Wipers (for versions/markets,

where provided)

When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch

is in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on

approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned

on. The headlights will also turn off when the wipers

are turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To

make your selection, press the Headlights with Wipers

button on the touchscreen, select On or Off followed

by pressing the arrow back button on the touchscreen.

• Auto Dim High Beams “SmartBeam™” (for

versions/markets, where provided)

When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights

will deactivate automatically under certain conditions.

To make your selection, press the Auto High Beams

button on the touchscreen, select ON or OFF fol-

lowed by pressing the arrow back button on the touch-

screen. Refer to “Lights/SmartBeam™ (for versions/

markets, where provided)” in “Knowing Your Vehicle”

for further information.

• Headlight Dipped Beam (Traffic Changeover)

(for versions/markets, where provided)

Low beam headlights have more control of upward

light and direct most of their light downward and either

to the left for right hand drive countries or to the right

for left hand drive countries to provide safe forward

visibility without excessive glare.

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

• Flash Headlights With Lock (for versions/

markets, where provided)

When this feature is selected, the front and rear turn

signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked

with the RKE transmitter. To make your selection,

press the Flash Headlights with Lock button on the

touchscreen, select On or Off followed by pressing the

arrow back button on the touchscreen.

Doors & Locks

• Auto Lock (for versions/markets, where pro-

vided)

When this feature is selected, all doors will lock auto-

matically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 24 km/h.

To make your selection, press the “Auto Lock” button

on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to

setting, indicating that the setting has been selected.

Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to

return to the previous menu.

• Auto Unlock on Exit (for versions/markets,

where provided)

When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock

when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in

the PARK (for versions/markets, where provided) or

NEUTRAL position and the driver's door is opened. To

make your selection, press the Auto Unlock on Exit

button on the touchscreen, select On or Off followed

by pressing the arrow back button on the touchscreen.

• Flash Headlight with Lock (for versions/markets,

where provided)

When this feature is selected, the front and rear turn

signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked

with the RKE transmitter. To make your selection,

press the Flash Lights with Lock button on the touch-

screen, select On or Off followed by pressing the

arrow back button on the touchscreen.

• 1st Press of Key Fob Unlocks (for versions/

markets, where provided)

When Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is

selected, only the driver's door will unlock on the first

press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button. When

Driver Door 1st Press is selected, you must press the

RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the

passenger's doors. When Unlock All Doors On 1st

Press is selected, all of the doors will unlock on the

first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button.

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with Keyless Enter-

N-Go™ (Passive Entry) and the EVIC is programmed

to Unlock All Doors 1st Press, all doors will unlock no

matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is

grasped. If Driver Door 1st Press is programmed, only

the driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is

grasped. With Passive Entry, if Driver Door 1st Press is

programmed pressing the handle more than once will

only result in the driver’s door opening. If driver door

first is selected, once the driver door is opened, the

interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock

all doors (or use RKE transmitter).

• Passive Entry (for versions/markets, where pro-

vided)

This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s

door(s) without having to press the RKE transmitter

lock or unlock buttons. To make your selection, press

the Passive Entry button on the touchscreen, select

ON or OFF followed by pressing the arrow back

button on the touchscreen. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-

Go™” in “Knowing Your Vehicle”.

Engine Off Options

• Engine Off Power Delay

When this feature is selected, the power window

switches, radio, Uconnect® phone system (for

versions/markets, where provided), DVD video system

(for versions/markets, where provided), power sunroof

(for versions/markets, where provided), and power

outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the

ignition is cycled OFF. Opening either front vehicle

door will cancel this feature. To change the Engine Off

Power Delay status press the 0 seconds, 45 seconds, 5

minutes or 10 minutes button on the touchscreen

followed by pressing the arrow back button on the

touchscreen.

• Headlight Off Delay (for versions/markets,

where provided)

When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to

have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90

seconds when exiting the vehicle. To change the Head-

light Off Delay status press the 0, 30, 60 or 90 button

on the touchscreen followed by pressing the arrow

back button on the touchscreen.

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Compass Settings

• Variance (for versions/markets, where provided)

Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic

North and Geographic North. To compensate for the

differences the variance should be set for the zone

where the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once

properly set, the compass will automatically compen-

sate for the differences, and provide the most accurate

compass heading.

NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of

the instrument panel, such as iPod's, Mobile Phones,

Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is where the com-

pass module is located, and it can cause inter ference

with the compass sensor, and it may give false readings.

(fig. 18)

Compass Variance Map

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

• Perform Compass Calibration (for versions/

markets, where provided)

Press the Calibration button to change this setting.

This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the

need to manually reset the compass. When the vehicle

is new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC

will display CAL until the compass is calibrated. You

may also calibrate the compass by pressing the ON

button on the touchscreen and completing one or

more 360–degree turns (in an area free from large

metal or metallic objects) until the CAL indicator

displayed in the EVIC turns of f. The compass will now

function normally.

Audio

• Balance/Fade (for versions/markets, where pro-

vided)

When in this display you may adjust the Balance and

Fade settings.

• Equalizer (for versions/markets, where provided)

When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and

Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the + and –

setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any

point on the scale in between the + and – buttons on

the touchscreen followed by pressing the arrow back

button on the touchscreen.

NOTE: Bass/mid/treble allow the you to simply slide

your finger up/down to change the setting as well as

press directly on the desired setting.

• Speed AdjustedVolume (for versions/market s,

where provided)

Decreases volume relative to vehicle speed. To change

the Speed Adjusted Volume press the Off, 1, 2 or 3

button on the touchscreen followed by pressing the

arrow back button on the touchscreen.

• Music Info Cleanup (for versions/markets, where

provided)

This feature helps org anize music files for optimized

music navigation. To make your selection, press the

Music Info Cleanup button on the touchscreen, select

On or Off followed by pressing the arrow back button

on the touchscreen.

Phone/Bluetooth®

• Paired Devices

This feature shows which phones are paired to the

Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information,

refer to the Uconnect® Supplement.

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

SEATS

Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of

the vehicle.

WARNING!

• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,

inside

or outside of a vehicle. In a colli-

sion, people riding in these areas are more likely

to be seriously injured or killed.

• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your

vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat

belts. In a collision, people r iding in these areas

are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.

• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and

using a seat belt properly.

DRIVER'S POWER SEAT (for versions/

markets, where provided)

The power seat switch is on the outboard side of the

seat near the floor. Use this switch to move the seat up,

down, forward, rearward or to tilt the seat.

(fig. 19)

AdjustingThe Seat Forward Or Rearward

The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.

Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will

move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch

when the desired position has been reached.

AdjustingThe Seat Up Or Down

The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull

upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat

will move in the direction of the switch. Release the

switch when the desired position is reached.

Tilting The Seat Up Or Down

The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four

directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front

or rear of the seat switch; the front or rear of the seat

cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Re-

lease the switch when the desired position is reached.

(fig. 19)

Power Seat Switch

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

WARNING!

• Adjusting a seat while driving may be

dangerous

. Moving a seat while driving

could result in loss of control which could cause a

collision and serious injury or death.

• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the

seat belts and while the vehicle is parked.Serious

injury or death could result from a poorly ad-

justed seat belt.

•

Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that

the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your

chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat

belt, which could result in serious injury or death.

Do not place any article under a power

seat or impede its ability to move as it

may cause damage to the seat controls.

Seat travel may become limited if movement is

stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s path.

POWER LUMBAR (for versions/markets,

where provided)

The Power Lumbar switch is located on the outboard

side of the driver's seat. Push the switch forward to

increase the lumbar support. Push the switch rearward

to decrease the lumbar support. Pushing upward or

downward on the switch will raise or lower the posi-

tion of the support.

(fig. 20)

Power Lumbar Switch

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

HEATED SEATS (for versions/markets, where

provided)

The front heated seats control buttons are located

within the Uconnect® system. You can gain access to

the control buttons through the climate screen or the

controls screen.

• Press the heated seat button

once to turn the

High setting ON.

• Press the heated seat button

a second time to

turn the Low setting ON.

• Press the heated seat button

a third time to turn

the heating elements OFF.

If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will auto-

matically switch to LO-level after approximately 60

minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the

display will change from HI to LO, indicating the

change. The LO-level setting will turn OFF automati-

cally after approximately 45 minutes.

NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated

seats to operate.

WARNING!

• Persons who are unable to feel pain to

e skin because of advanced age,

chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medi-

cation, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical

condition must exercise care when using the seat

heater. It may cause burns even at low tempera-

tures, especially if used for long per iods of time.

• Do not place any thing on the seat or seatback

that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or

cushion.This may cause the seat heater to over-

heat. Sitting in a seat that has been overheated

could cause serious burns due to the increased

surface temperature of t he seat.

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

uMANUAL FRONT SEAT ADJUSTMENTS

For models equipped with manual seats, the driver and

passenger seats can be adjusted forward or rearward

by using a bar located by the front of the seat cushion,

near the floor.

(fig. 21)

While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar located and

move the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar

once the desired position has been reached. Then,

using body pressure, move forward and rearward on

the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched.

WARNING!

• Adjusting a seat while driving may be

dangerous

. Moving a seat while driving

could result in loss of control which could cause a

collision and serious injury or death.

• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the

seat belts and while the vehicle is parked.Serious

injury or death could result from a poorly ad-

justed seat belt.

(fig. 21)

Manual Seat Adjustment

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

RECLINER ADJUSTMENT

The recline lever is located on the outboard side of the

seat. To recline the seat, lean forward slightly, lift the

lever, lean back to the desired position and release the

lever. To return the seatback to its normal upright

position, lean forward and lift the lever. Release the

lever once the seatback is in the upright position.

(fig. 22)

WARNING!

• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is

ving is dangerous.The sudden move-

ment of the seat could cause you to lose control.

The seat belt might not be adjusted properly and

you could be injured. Adjust the seat only while

the vehicle is parked.

• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that

the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your

chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat

belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use

the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.

(fig. 22)

Recline Lever

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

DRIVER'S SEAT HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT

The seat height control lever is located on the out-

board side of the seat. Raise the lever to raise the seat.

Lower the lever to lower the seat. The total seat travel

is approximately 55 mm.

(fig. 23)

FOLD-FLAT FRONT PASSENGER SEAT (for

versions/markets, where provided)

This feature allows for extended cargo space. When

the seat is folded flat, it is an extension of the load floor

surface (allowing long cargo to fit from the rear hatch

up to the instrument panel). The fold-flat seatback also

has a hardback surface that you can use as a work

surface when the seat is folded flat and the vehicle is

not in motion.

(fig. 24)

Pull upward on the recline lever to fold or unfold the

seat.

WARNING!

Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is mov-

ing is

dangerous.The sudden movement

of the seat could cause you to lose control.Adjust

any seat only while the vehicle is parked.

(fig. 23)

Seat Height Adjustment Lever

(fig. 24)

Fold-Flat Seat

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

HEAD RESTRAINTS

Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of

injury by restricting head movement in the event of a

rear impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that

the top of the head restraint is located above the top of

your ear.

WARNING!

The head restraints for all occupants

must

be properly adjusted prior to oper-

ating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Head re-

straints should never be adjusted while the ve-

hicle is in motion.Driving a vehicle wit h the head

restraints improperly adjusted or removed could

cause serious injury or death in the event of a

collision.

Active Head Restraints (AHR) — Front Seats

Active Head Restraints are passive, deployable compo-

nents, and vehicles with this equipment can not be

readily identified by any markings, only through visual

inspection of the head restraint. The head restraint will

be split in two halves, with the front half being soft

foam and trim, the back half being decorative plastic.

When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half

of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the

gap between the back of the occupant’s head and the

AHR. This system is designed to help prevent or

reduce the extent of injuries to the driver and front

passenger in certain types of rear impacts. Refer to

“Occupant Restraints” in “Safety” for further informa-

tion.

To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head

restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push

button, located at the base of the head restraint, and

push downward on the head restraint.

(fig. 25)

Push Button

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

For comfort, the Active Head Restraints can be tilted

forward and backward. To tilt the head restraint closer

to the back of your head, pull forward on the bottom of

the head restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the

head restraint to move the head restraint away from

your head.

(fig. 26) (fig. 27)

NOTE:

• The head restraints should only be removed by

qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If

either of the head restraints require removal, see

your authorized dealer.

• In the event of deployment of an Active Head Re-

straint, refer to “Occupant Restraints/Supplemental

Active Head Restraints (AHR)/Resetting Active

Head Restraints (AHR)” in “Safety” for further infor-

mation.

(fig. 26)

Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)

(fig. 27)

Active Head Restraint (Tilted)

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

WARNING!

• Do not place items over the top of the

Act

ive Head Restraint, such as coats,

seat covers or portable DVD players.These items

may interfere with the operation of the Active

Head Restraint in the event of a collision and

could result in serious injury or death.

• Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they

are struck by an object such as a hand, foot or

loose cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of

the Active Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is

secured, as loose cargo could contact the Active

Head Restraint during sudden stops. Failure to

follow this warning could cause personal injury if

the Active Head Restraint is deployed.

Head Restraints — Second Row Seats

The rear seats are equipped with adjustable head re-

straints. To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the

head restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the

adjustment button, located on the base of the head

restraint, and push downward on the head restraint.

(fig. 28)

NOTE:

• The head restraints should only be removed by

qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If any

of the head restraints require removal, see your

authorized dealer.

• For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether, refer to

“Occupant Restraints” in “Safety”.

(fig. 28)

Adjustment Button

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

WARNING!

Driving a vehicle with the head re-

str

aints removed or improperly adjusted

could cause serious injury or death in the event of

a collision.The head restraints should be checked

prior to operating the vehicle and never adjusted

while the vehicle is in motion.

THIRD ROW PASSENGER SEATS (Seven

Passenger Models)

These head restraints are non-adjustable and non-

removable. However, you can fold them forward when

they are not in use by passengers.

WARNING!

Do not allow a passenger to sit in a third

row s

eat without having the head re-

straint unfolded and locked in place. Failure to

follow this warning may result in personal injury

to the passenger in the event of a collision.

60/40 SPLIT SECOND-ROW PASSENGER

SEATS

To provide additional storage area, each second-row

passenger seat can be folded flat. This allows for ex-

tended cargo space and still maintains some seating

room if needed.

NOTE: Prior to folding the second-row passenger

seat, make sure the front seatback is not in a reclined

position. This will allow the second-row seat to fold

easily.

WARNING!

• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a

cargo

area,inside or outside of a vehicle.

In a collision, people riding in these areas are

more likely to be seriously injured or killed.

• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your

vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat

belts.

• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and

using a seat belt properly.

• On seven passenger models, do not allow a

passenger to sit in a third row seat with the

second row seatback(s) folded flat. In a collision,

the passenger could slide underneath the seat

belt and be seriously or even fatally injured.

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

To Fold The Seat

1. Locate the control lever on the lower outboard side

of the seat. (fig. 29)

2. Place one hand on the seatback and apply a gentle

pressure.

3. Lift the control lever with the other hand, allow the

seatback to move forward slightly, and then release

the lever.

WARNING!

To prevent personal injury or damage to

objects

, keep your head, arms, and ob-

jects out of the folding path of the seatback.

4. Gently guide the seatback into the folded position.

To Unfold The Seat

Raise the seatback and lock it in place.

WARNING!

Be certain that the seatback is locked

securely in

to position. Otherwise, the

seat will not provide the proper stabilit y for child

seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched

seat could cause serious injury.

(fig. 29)

Seatback Release

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Forward And Rearward Adjustment

The control lever is on the outboard side of the seat.

Lift the lever to move the seat forward or rearward.

Release the lever once the seat is in the desired

position. Then, using body pressure, move forward and

rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters

have latched.

(fig. 30)

WARNING!

Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is mov-

ing is

dangerous.The sudden movement

of the seat could cause you to lose control.The

seat belt might not be adjusted properly and you

could be injured. Adjust any seat only while the

vehicle is parked.

Recliner Adjustment

The recline lever is on the outboard side of the seat. To

recline the seatback, lean back, lift the lever, position

the seatback as desired, and then release the lever. To

return the seatback to its normal upright position, lean

back, lift the lever, lean forward, and then release the

lever once the seatback is in the upright position.

(fig. 31)

(fig. 30)

Manual Seat Adjustment

(fig. 31)

Recline Lever

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

WARNING!

• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is

ving is dangerous.The sudden move-

ment of the seat could cause you to lose control.

The seat belt might not be adjusted properly and

you could be injured. Adjust the seat only while

the vehicle is parked.

• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that

the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your

chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat

belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use

the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.

Seatback/Armrest — Second Row Passenger

Seat

The latch release-loop is located at the top of the

seatback/armrest. Pull the release-loop forward to re-

lease the latch and then downward to lower the

seatback/armrest.

(fig. 32)

Raise the seatback/armrest and lock it in place when

not in use, or when additional seating area is required.

WARNING!

Keep the latch clean and free of objects

and be

certain that the seatback/

armrest is locked securely into position. Other-

wise,the seat will not provide the proper stability

for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly

latched seat could cause serious injury.

Stadium Tip 'n Slide™ (Easy Entry/Exit Seat)

— Seven Passenger Models

This feature allows passengers to easily enter or exit

the third-row passenger seats from either side of the

vehicle.

(fig. 32)

Seatback/Armrest

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

To Move The Second-Row Passenger Seat For-

ward

NOTE: Raise the seatback/armrest before moving the

seat to allow for full seat travel.

Move the control lever on the upper outboard side of

the seatback for ward. Then, in one fluid motion, the

seat cushion flips upward and the seat moves forward

on its tracks.

(fig. 33) (fig. 34)

NOTE: A hand-grip is molded into the front of each

quarter trim panel near the door opening to assist

entry and exit from the third-row passenger seats.

WARNING!

Do not drive the vehicle with the seat in

this posi

tion, as it is only intended for

entering and exiting the third row seats. Failure

to follow this warning may result in personal

injury.

(fig. 33)

Tip 'n Slide™ Control Lever

(fig. 34)

Tip 'n Slide™ Seat

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

To Unfold And Move The Second-Row Passen-

ger Seat Rearward

Move the seatback rearward until it locks in place and

then continue sliding the seat rearward on its tracks

until it locks in place.

Push the seat cushion downward to lock it in place.

Adjust the seat track position as desired. Using body

pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be

sure that the seat adjusters have latched.

WARNING!

Be certain that the seatback and seat

are locked

securely into position. Other-

wise,the seat will not provide the proper stability

for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly

latched seat could cause serious injury.

50/50 SPLIT THIRD-ROW PASSENGER

SEATS WITH FOLD-FLAT FEATURE (Seven

Passenger Models)

To provide additional storage area, each third-row

passenger seatback can be folded flat. This allows for

extended cargo space and still maintains some rear

seating room if needed.

NOTE: Prior to folding the third-row passenger seat-

back, make sure the second-row passenger seatback is

not in a reclined position. This will allow the seatback

to fold easily.

To Fold The Seatback

Pull the latch release-loop located at the top of the

seatback upward, push the seatback forward slightly,

and release the release-loop. Then, continue to push

the seatback forward. The head restraints will fold

automatically as the seatback moves forward.

(fig. 35)

Seatback Release

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

To Unfold The Seatback

Grasp the assist strap loop on the seatback and pull it

toward you to raise the seatback. Continue to raise the

seatback until it locks in place. Raise the head restraint

to lock it in place.

(fig. 36)

The seatback can also be locked in the reclined posi-

tion. To do so, pull the latch release-loop located at the

top of the seatback upward, allow the seatback to

recline, and release the release-loop.

WARNING!

• Be certain that the seatback is locked

securely

into position. Otherwise, the

seat will not provide the proper stability for

passengers. An improperly latched seat could

cause serious injury.

• Do not allow a passenger to sit in a third row

seat without having the head restraint unfolded

and locked in place. Failure to follow this warning

may result in personal injury to the passenger in

the event of a collision.

• Do not allow a passenger to sit in a third row

seat wit h the second row seatback(s) folded flat.

In a collision, the passenger could slide under-

neath the seat belt and be seriously or even

fatally injured.

(fig. 36)

Assist Strap

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING

COLUMN

This feature allows you to tilt the steering column

upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or

shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping con-

trol handle is located below the steering wheel at the

end of the steering column.

(fig. 37)

To unlock the steering column, push the control handle

downward. To tilt the steering column, move the steer-

ing wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen

or shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel

outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the

steering column in position, pull the control handle

upward until fully engaged.

WARNING!

Do not adjust the steering column while

driving.

Adjusting the steering column

while driving or driving with the steering column

unlocked could cause the driver to lose control of

the vehicle. Be sure the steering column is locked

before driving your vehicle. Failure to follow this

warning may resul t in serious injury or death.

(fig. 37)

Tilt/Telescoping Steering Control Handle

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

HEATED STEERING WHEEL (for

versions/markets, where

provided)

The steering wheel contains a heating element that

helps warm your hands in cold weather. The heated

steering wheel has only one temperature setting. Once

the heated steering wheel has been turned on it will

operate for up to 80 minutes before automatically

shutting off. The heated steering wheel can shut off

early or may not turn on when the steering wheel is

already warm.

The heated steering wheel control button is located

within the Uconnect® system. You can gain access to

the control button through the climate screen or the

controls screen.

• Press the heated steering wheel button

once to

turn the heating element ON.

• Press the heated steering wheel button

a second

time to turn the heating element OFF.

NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated

steering wheel to operate.

WARNING!

• Persons who are unable to feel pain to

e skin because of advanced age,

chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medi-

cation, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical

conditions must exercise care when using the

steering wheel heater. It may cause burns even at

low temperatures, especially if used for long pe-

riods.

• Do not place anything on the steering wheel

that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or

steering wheel covers of any type and material.

This may cause the steering wheel heater to

overheat.

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

MIRRORS

INSIDE DAY/NIGHT MIRROR

A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal and

vertical adjustment of the mirror. Adjust the mirror to

center on the view through the rear window.

Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small

control lever under the mirror to the night position

(lever flipped toward the rear of vehicle). The mirror

should be adjusted while set in the day position (to-

ward the windshield).

(fig. 38)

AUTOMATIC DIMMING MIRROR (for

versions/markets, where provided)

This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from

vehicles behind you. This feature will be defaulted on, and

only be disabled when the vehicle is moving in reverse.

(fig. 39)

To avoid damage to the mirror during

cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution

directly onto the mirror.Apply the solution

onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.

OUTSIDE MIRRORS

To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)

to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight

overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.

(fig. 38)

Adjusting Rearview Mirror

(fig. 39)

Automatic Dimming Mirror

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will

give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the

lane next to your vehicle.

WARNING!

Vehicles and other objects seen in the

passenger si

de convex mirror will look

smaller and farther away than they really are.

Relying too much on your passenger side convex

mirror could cause you to collide with another

vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror

when judging the size or distance of a vehicle

seen in the passenger side convex mirror.

POWER MIRRORS

The power mirror switch is located on the driver's

door trim panel.

(fig. 40)

Models Without Express Window Feature

Press the mirror select button marked L (left) or R

(right) and then press one of the four arrow buttons to

move the mirror in the direction the arrow is pointing.

Models With Express Window Feature

Press and release the mirror select button marked L

(left) or R (right) and then press one of the four arrow

buttons to move the mirror in the direction the arrow

is pointing. The selection times out af ter 30 seconds of

inactivity in order to guard against accidentally changing

a mirror position following an adjustment.

NOTE: A light in the selected button will illuminate

indicating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted.

(fig. 40)

Power Mirror Switches

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

POWER FOLDING MIRRORS (for

versions/markets, where provided)

The switch for the power folding mirrors is located

between the power mirror switches L (left) and R

(right). Press the switch once and the mirrors will fold

in, pressing the switch a second time will return the

mirrors to the normal driving position.

(fig. 41)

NOTE: If the vehicle speed is greater than 16 km/h the

folding feature will be disabled.

If the mirrors are in the folded position, and vehicle

speed is equal or greater than 16 km/h, they will

automatically unfold.

Resetting the Power Folding Outside Mirrors

You may need to reset the power folding mirrors if the

following occurs:

• The mirrors are accidentally blocked while folding.

• The mirrors are accidentally manually folded/

unfolded.

• The mirrors come out of the unfolded position.

• The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal driving

speeds.

To reset the power folding mirrors: Fold and unfold

them by pressing the button. (This may require multiple

button pushes). This resets them to their normal

position.

MANUAL FOLDING MIRRORS

Some models have exterior mirrors that are hinged.

The hinge allows the mirror to pivot forward and

rearward to resist damage. The hinge has three detent

positions: forward, rearward and normal.

(fig. 41)

Power Folding Mirror Switch

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

HEATED MIRRORS (for versions/markets,

where provided)

These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice.

This feature is activated whenever you turn on

the rear window defroster. Refer to “Rear Window

Features” for further information.

ILLUMINATED VANITY MIRRORS (for

versions/markets, where provided)

An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor. To use

the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing

the mirror cover upward. The light will turn on auto-

matically. Closing the mirror cover will turn off the

light.

(fig. 42)

Sun Visor “Slide-On Rod” Feature (for

versions/markets, where provided)

This feature allows for additional flexibility in position-

ing the visor to block out the sun.

1. Fold down the sun visor.

2. Unclip the visor from the center clip.

3. Pull the sun visor toward the inside rearview mirror

to extend it.

(fig. 42)

IlluminatedVanity Mirror

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

CLIMATE CONTROLS

The air conditioning and heating system is designed to

make you comfortable in all types of weather. This

system can be operated through either the instrument

panel or through the Uconnect® system display.

When the Uconnect® system is in different modes

(Radio, Player, Settings, More, etc.) the driver and

passenger temperature settings will be indicated at the

top of the display.

Manual Climate Controls With Touchscreen

(for versions/markets, where provided)

Buttons On The Faceplate

Buttons on the faceplate are located on the left and

right side of the Uconnect® 4.3 screen in the center of

the instrument panel. There are also buttons on the

faceplate located below the Uconnect® touchscreen.

(fig. 43) (fig. 44)

(fig. 43)

Manual Temperature Controls — Button On The

Faceplate

(fig. 44)

Manual Temperature Controls

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Buttons On The Touchscreen

Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the

Uconnect® system screen.

(fig. 45) (fig. 46)

Button Descriptions (Applies To Both Buttons

On The Faceplate And Buttons On The Touch-

screen)

1. MAX A/C Button

Press and release to change the current setting, the

indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Perform-

ing this function again will cause the MAX A/C opera-

tion to switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C

indicator will turn off.

2. A/C Button

Press and release to change the current setting, the

indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this

function again will cause the A/C operation to switch

into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.

3. Recirculation Button

Press and release to change the current setting, the

indicator illuminates when ON.

(fig. 45)

Uconnect® 4.3 Manual 3 — Zone Temperature Controls

— Buttons On The Touchscreen

(fig. 46)

Uconnect® 8.4 Manual 3 — Zone Temperature Controls

— Buttons On The Touchscreen

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

4. Front Defrost Button

Press and release to change the current airflow setting

to Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this

feature is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side

window demist outlets. When the defrost button is

selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost

mode with maximum temperature settings for best

windshield and side window defrosting and defogging. If

the front defrost mode is turned off the climate system

will return the previous setting.

5. Rear Defrost Button

Press and release this button to turn on the rear

window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (for

versions/markets, where provided). An indicator will

illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The

rear window defroster automatically turns off after 10

minutes.

Failure to follow these cautions can

cause damage to the heating elements:

• Use care when washing the inside of

the rear window. Do not use abrasive window

cleaners on the interior surface of the window.

Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution,

wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels

can be peeled off after soaking with warm water.

• Do not use scrapers,sharp instruments, or abra-

sive window cleaners on t he interior surface of

the window.

• Keep all objects a safe distance from the win-

dow.

6. Rear Climate Button (for versions/markets,

where provided)

Press and release this button to turn on the rear

climate controls. The indicator will illuminate when the

rear climate controls are ON. Performing this function

again will turn OFF the rear climate controls.

7. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button

(Uconnect® 8.4 Only)

Provides the passenger with independent temperature

control. Push the button for warmer temperature

settings.

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will

automatically exit Sync.

8. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button

(Uconnect® 8.4 Only)

Provides the passenger with independent temperature

control. Push the button for cooler temperature set-

tings.

NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will

automatically exit Sync.

9. SYNC

Press the Sync button on the touchscreen to toggle the

Sync feature On/Off. The Sync indicator is illuminated

when this feature is enabled. Sync is used to synchro-

nize the passenger temperature setting with the driver

temperature setting. Changing the passenger tempera-

ture setting while in Sync will automatically exit this

feature.

10. Blower Control

Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air

forced through the climate system. There are seven

blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will

cause automatic mode to switch to manual operation.

The speeds can be selected using either the blower

control knob on the faceplate or buttons on the touch-

screen as follows:

Blower Control Knob On The Faceplate

The blower speed increases as you turn the blower

control knob clockwise from the lowest blower set-

ting. The blower speed decreases as you turn the

blower control knob counter-clockwise.

Button On TheTouchscreen

Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting

and the large blower icon to increase the blower

setting. Blower can also be selected by pressing the

blower bar area between the icons.

11. Modes

The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air

comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,

demist outlets and defrost outlets. The Mode settings

are as follows:

• Panel Mode

Air comes from the outlets in the instrument

panel. Each of these outlets can be individually

adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the

center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up

and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction.

There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to

shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these

outlets.

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

• Bi-Level Mode

Air comes from the instrument panel outlets

and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is

directed through the defrost and side window demister

outlets.

NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort

conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel

outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.

• Floor Mode

Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight

amount of air is directed through the defrost

and side window demister outlets.

• Mix Mode

Air comes from the floor, defrost and side win-

dow demist outlets. This mode works best in

cold or snowy conditions.

12. Climate Control OFF Button

Press and release this button to turn the Climate

Control ON/OFF.

13. Driver Temperature Control Down Button

(Uconnect® 8.4 Only)

Provides the driver with independent temperature

control. Push the button for cooler temperature set-

tings.

NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automati-

cally adjust the passenger temperature setting at the

same time.

14. Driver Temperature Control Up Button

(Uconnect® 8.4 Only)

Provides the driver with independent temperature

control. Push the button for warmer temperature

settings.

NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automati-

cally adjust the passenger temperature setting at the

same time.

15. Temperature Control (Uconnect® 4.3 Only)

Press the driver or passenger temperature button on

the touchscreen to regulate the temperature of the air

inside the passenger compartment. Moving the tem-

perature bar into the red area, indicates warmer tem-

peratures. Moving the temperature bar into the blue

area indicates cooler temperatures. Driver and passen-

ger have independent temperature control if Sync

mode is not illuminated.

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

CLIMATE CONTROL FUNCTIONS

A/C (Air Conditioning)

The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the opera-

tor to manually activate or deactivate the air condition-

ing system. When the air conditioning system is turned

on, cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets

into the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the

A/C button to turn off the air conditioning and manu-

ally adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. Also,

make sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor

modes.

NOTE:

• For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in Mix,

Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be turned off,

but the A/C system shall remain active to prevent

fogging of the windows.

• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,

select Defrost mode and adjust blower speed if

needed.

• If your air conditioning performance seems lower

than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser

(located in front of the radiator), for an accumulation

of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray

from the front of the radiator and through the

condenser.

MAX A/C

MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling per-

formance.

Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the

prior settings. The button on the touchscreen illumi-

nates when MAX A/C is ON.

In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can

be adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other

settings will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to

the selected setting and MAX A/C to exit.

Recirculation Control

When outside air contains smoke, odors, or

high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,

you may wish to recirculate interior air by

pressing the Recirculation control button.

The recirculation indicator will illuminate when this

button is selected. Push the button a second time to

turn off the Recirculation mode and allow outside air

into the vehicle.

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode

may lead to excessive window fogging. The recircula-

tion feature may be unavailable (sof t button greyed

out). Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost

mode to improve window clearing operation. Recircu-

lation will be disabled automatically if this mode is

selected. Attempting to use Recirculation while in this

mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink

and then turn off.

Rear Manual Temperature Control (MTC) (for

versions/markets, where provided)

The rear MTC system has floor air outlets at the rear

right side of the 3rd Row seats and overhead outlets at

each outboard rear seating position. The system pro-

vides heated air through the floor outlets or cool,

dehumidified air through the headliner outlets.

The rear system temperature control buttons on the

touchscreen are located in the Uconnect® touch sys-

tem, located on the instrument panel.

(fig. 47) (fig. 48)

Controlling The Rear Climate Controls From

The Front Uconnect® Touchscreen

The Three-Zone climate control system allows for

adjustment of the rear climate controls from the front

ATC panel.

(fig. 47)

Uconnect® 4.3 Manual Rear Climate Button On The

Touchscreen

1 — Blower Up Button On

The Touchscreen

5 — Done Button On The

Touchscreen

2 — Mode Button On The

Touchscreen

6 — Rear Lock Button On

The Touchscreen

3 — Temperature Button

On The Touchscreen

7 — Rear Of f Button On

The Touchscreen

4 — Blower Down Button

On The Touchscreen

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

To change the rear system settings:

• Press "REAR" button to change control to rear

control mode, Rear display (below) will appear. Con-

trol functions now operate rear system.

• To return to Front screen, press "REAR" button

again, or it will revert to the Front screen after six

seconds.

Rear Lock

• Pressing the Rear Temperature Lock button on the

touchscreen, illuminates a lock symbol in the rear

display. The rear temperature and air source are

controlled from the front Uconnect® system.

• Rear occupants can only adjust the rear control

when the Rear Temperature Lock button is turned

off.

(fig. 48)

Uconnect® 8.4 Manual Rear Climate Button On The

Touchscreen

1 — Rear Lock Button On

The Touchscreen

5 — Blower Up Button On

The Touchscreen

2 — Front Climate Control

Button On The Touchscreen

6 — Mode Button On The

Touchscreen

3 — Temperature Up But-

ton On The Touchscreen

7 — Blower Down Button

On The Touchscreen

4 — Temperature Down

Button On The Touchscreen

8 — Rear Of f Button On

The Touchscreen

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Rear Blower Control

The rear blower control knob can be manually set to

off, or any fixed blower speed, by rotating the knob

from low to high. This allows the rear seat occupants to

control the volume of air circulated in the rear of the

vehicle.

(fig. 49)

Interior air enters the Rear Automatic

Temperature Control System through an

intake grille,located in t he right side trim

panel.The rear outlets are located in the right side

trim panel. Do not block or place objects directly

in front of the inlet grille or heater outlets. The

electrical system could overload causing damage

to the blower motor.

Rear Temperature Control

To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle,

rotate the temperature knob counterclockwise to

lower the temperature, and clockwise to increase the

temperature. The rear temperature settings are dis-

played in the Uconnect® system.

When rear controls are locked by the Uconnect®

system , the Rear Temperature Lock symbol on the

temperature knob is illuminated and any rear overhead

adjustments are ignored.

(fig. 49)

Rear Manual Climate Controls

1 — Rear Blower 3 — Rear Mode

2 — Rear Temperature 4 — Rear Climate Control

Lock

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Rear Mode Control

• Headliner Mode

Air comes from the outlets in the headliner.

Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted

to direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the

outlets to one side will shut off the airflow.

• Bi-Level Mode

Air comes from both the headliner outlets and

the floor outlets.

NOTE: In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level

mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the

headliner outlets and warmer air from the floor out-

lets.

• Floor Mode

Air comes from the floor outlets.

Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) With

Touchscreen (for versions/markets, where

provided)

Buttons On The Faceplate

Buttons on the faceplate are located on the left and

right side of the Uconnect® 4.3 screen in the center of

the instrument panel. There are also Buttons on the

faceplate located below the Uconnect® touchscreen.

(fig. 50) (fig. 51)

(fig. 50)

Automatic Temperature Controls — Button On The

Faceplate

(fig. 51)

Automatic Temperature Controls

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Buttons On The Touchscreen

Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the

Uconnect® system screen. (fig. 52) (fig. 53)

Button Descriptions (Applies To Both Buttons

On The Faceplate And Buttons On The Touch-

screen)

1. MAX A/C Button

Press and release to change the current setting, the

indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Perform-

ing this function again will cause the MAX A/C opera-

tion to switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C

indicator will turn off.

2. A/C Button

Press and release to change the current setting, the

indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this

function again will cause the A/C operation to switch

into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.

3. Recirculation Button

Press and release to change the current setting, the

indicator illuminates when ON.

(fig. 52)

Uconnect® 4.3 Automatic 3 — Zone Temperature

Controls — Buttons On The Touchscreen

(fig. 53)

Uconnect® 8.4 Automatic 3 — Zone Temperature

Controls — Buttons On The Touchscreen

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

4. AUTO O peration Button

Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature

by adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Perform-

ing this function will cause the ATC to switch between

manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Auto-

matic Operation” for more information.

5. Front Defrost Button

Press and release to change the current airflow setting

to Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this

feature is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side

window demist outlets. When the defrost button is

selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost

mode with maximum temperature settings for best

windshield and side window defrosting and defogging.

Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch

into manual mode. If the front defrost mode is turned

off, the climate system will return to the previous

setting.

6. Rear Defrost Button

Press and release this button to turn on the rear

window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (for

versions/markets, where provided). An indicator will

illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The

rear window defroster automatically turns off after 10

minutes.

Failure to follow these cautions can

cause damage to the heating elements:

• Use care when washing the inside of

the rear window. Do not use abrasive window

cleaners on the interior surface of the window.

Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution,

wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels

can be peeled off after soaking with warm water.

• Do not use scrapers,sharp instruments, or abra-

sive window cleaners on t he interior surface of

the window.

• Keep all objects a safe distance from the win-

dow.

7. Rear Climate Button (for versions/markets,

where provided)

Press and release this button to turn on the rear

climate controls. The indicator will illuminate when the

rear climate controls are ON. Performing this function

again will turn OFF the rear climate controls.

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

8. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button

Provides the passenger with independent temperature

control. Push the button for warmer temperature

settings.

NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will

automatically exit Sync.

9. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button

Provides the passenger with independent temperature

control. Push the button for cooler temperature set-

tings.

NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will

automatically exit Sync.

10. SYNC

Press the Sync button on the touchscreen to toggle the

Sync feature On/Off. The Sync indicator is illuminated

when this feature is enabled. Sync is used to synchro-

nize the passenger temperature setting with the driver

temperature setting. Changing the passenger tempera-

ture setting while in Sync will automatically exit this

feature.

11. Blower Control

Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air

forced through the climate system. There are seven

blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will

cause automatic mode to switch to manual operation.

The speeds can be selected using either the blower

control knob on the faceplate or buttons on the touch-

screen as follows:

Blower Control Knob On The Faceplate

The blower speed increases as you turn the blower

control knob clockwise from the lowest blower set-

ting. The blower speed decreases as you turn the

blower control knob counter-clockwise.

Button On TheTouchscreen

Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting

and the large blower icon to increase the blower

setting. Blower can also be selected by pressing the

blower bar area between the icons.

12. Modes

The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air

comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,

and demist outlets and defrost outlets. The Mode

settings are as follows:

• Panel Mode

Air comes from the outlets in the instrument

panel. Each of these outlets can be individually

adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the

center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up

and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction.

There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to

shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these

outlets.

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

• Bi-Level Mode

Air comes from the instrument panel outlets

and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is

directed through the defrost and side window demister

outlets.

NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort

conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel

outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.

• Floor Mode

Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight

amount of air is directed through the defrost

and side window demister outlets.

• Mix Mode

Air comes from the floor, defrost and side win-

dow demist outlets. This mode works best in

cold or snowy conditions.

• Defrost Mode

Air comes from the windshield and side window

demist outlets. Use Defrost mode with maxi-

mum temperature settings for best windshield and side

window defrosting and defogging. When the defrost

mode is selected, the blower level may will increase.

13. Climate Control OFF Button

Press and release this button to turn the Climate

Control ON/OFF.

14. Driver Temperature Control Down Button

Provides the driver with independent temperature

control. Push the button for cooler temperature set-

tings.

NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automati-

cally adjust the passenger temperature setting at the

same time.

15. Driver Temperature Control Up Button

Provides the driver with independent temperature

control. Push the button for warmer temperature

settings.

NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automati-

cally adjust the passenger temperature setting at the

same time.

16. Temperature Control (Uconnect® 4.3 Only)

Press the temperature button on the touchscreen to

regulate the temperature of the air inside the passen-

ger compartment. Moving the temperature bar into

the red area, indicates warmer temperatures. Moving

the temperature bar into the blue area indicates cooler

temperatures.

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

A/C (Air Conditioning)

The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the opera-

tor to manually activate or deactivate the air condition-

ing system. When the air conditioning system is turned

on, cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets

into the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the

A/C button to turn off the air conditioning and manu-

ally adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. Also,

make sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor

modes.

NOTE:

• For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in Mix,

Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be turned off,

but the A/C system shall remain active to prevent

fogging of the windows.

• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,

select Defrost mode and adjust blower speed if

needed.

• If your air conditioning performance seems lower

than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser

(located in front of the radiator), for an accumulation

of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray

from behind the radiator and through the condenser.

Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to

the condenser, reducing air conditioning perfor-

mance.

MAX A/C

MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling per-

formance.

Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the

prior settings. The button on the touchscreen illumi-

nates when MAX A/C is ON.

In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can

be adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other

settings will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to

the prior settings and the MAX A/C indicator will turn

off.

Recirculation Control

When outside air contains smoke, odors, or

high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,

you may wish to recirculate interior air by

pressing the Recirculation control button.

The recirculation indicator will illuminate when this

button is selected. Push the button a second time to

turn off the Recirculation mode and allow outside air

into the vehicle.

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode

may lead to excessive window fogging. The recircula-

tion feature may be unavailable (sof t button greyed

out). Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost

mode to improve window clearing operation. Recircu-

lation will be disabled automatically if this mode is

selected. Attempting to use Recirculation while in this

mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink

and then turn off.

Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)

Automatic Operation

1. Press the AUTO button on the faceplate or on the

touchscreen (4) on the Automatic Temperature

Control (ATC) Panel.

2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the

system to maintain by adjusting the driver and pas-

senger temperature control buttons (8, 9, 14, 15).

Once the desired temperature is displayed, the

system will achieve and automatically maintain that

comfort level.

3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it

is not necessary to change the settings. You will

experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing

the system to function automatically.

NOTE:

• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings.

The system automatically adjusts the temperature,

mode, and blower speed to provide comfort as

quickly as possible.

• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric

units by selecting the US/M customer-programmable

feature. Refer to the “Uconnect® System Settings”

in this section of the manual.

To provide you with maximum comfort in the Auto-

matic mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will

remain on low until the engine warms up. The blower

will increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.

Manual Operation Override

The system allows for manual selection of blower

speed, air distribution mode, A/C status and recircula-

tion control.

The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by

adjusting the blower control. The fan will now operate

at a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected.

This allows the front occupants to control the volume

of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto

mode.

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

The operator can also select the direction of the

airflow by selecting one of the available mode settings.

A/C operation and Recirculation control can also be

manually selected in Manual operation.

NOTE: Each of these features operates independently

from each other. If any feature is controlled manually,

temperature control will continue to operate auto-

matically.

Rear Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)

(for versions/markets, where provided)

The rear ATC system has floor air outlets at the rear

right side of the 3rd Row seats and overhead outlets at

each outboard rear seating position. The system pro-

vides heated air through the floor outlets or cool,

dehumidified air through the headliner outlets.

The rear system temperature control buttons are lo-

cated in the Uconnect® touch system, located on the

instrument panel. (fig. 54) (fig. 55)

Controlling The Rear Climate Controls From

The Front ATC Panel

The Three-Zone ATC system allows for adjustment of

the rear climate controls from the front ATC panel.

To change the rear system settings:

• Press the "REAR" button to change control to rear

control mode, Rear display (below) will appear. Con-

trol functions now operate rear system.

• To return to Front screen, press the "REAR" button

again, or it will revert to the Front screen after six

seconds.

(fig. 54)

Uconnect® 4.3 Automatic Rear Climate Button On The

Touchscreen

1 — Blower Up Button 2 — Mode Button

3 — Temperature Button 4 — Blower Down Button

5 — Done Button 6 — Rear Lock Button

7 — Rear Auto Button 8 — Rear Off Button

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Rear Lock

Pressing the Rear Temperature Lock button on the

Uconnect® touchscreen, illuminates a lock symbol in

the rear display. The rear temperature and air source

are controlled from the front Uconnect® system.

Rear second row occupants can only adjust the rear

ATC control when the Rear Temperature Lock button

is turned off.

The rear ATC is located in the headliner, near the

center of the vehicle.

• Press the Rear Temperature Lock button on the

Uconnect® touchscreen. This turns off the Rear

Temperature Lock icon in the rear temperature

knob.

• Rotate the Rear Blower, Rear Temperature and the

Rear Mode Control knobs to suit your comfort

needs.

• ATC is selected by adjusting the rear blower knob

counterclockwise to AUTO.

Once the desired temperature is displayed, the ATC

System will automatically achieve and maintain that

comfort level. When the system is set up for your

comfort level, it is not necessary to change the settings.

You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply

allowing the system to function automatically.

(fig. 55)

Uconnect® 8.4 Automatic Rear Climate Button On The

Touchscreen

1 — Rear Auto Button 2 — Rear Lock Button

3 — Front Climate Button 4 —

Temperature Up Button

5— Temperature Down

Button

6 — Blower Up Button

7 — Mode Button 8 — Blower Down Button

9 — Rear Of f Button

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

NOTE: It is not necessary to move the temperature

settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system automati-

cally adjusts the temperature, mode and fan speed to

provide comfort as quickly as possible.

(fig. 56)

Rear Blower Control

The rear blower control knob can be manually set to

off, or any fixed blower speed, by rotating the knob

from low to high. This allows the rear seat occupants to

control the volume of air circulated in the rear of the

vehicle.

Interior air enters the Rear Automatic

Temperature Control System through an

intake grille,located in t he right side trim

panel behind the third row seats.The rear outlets

are located in the right side trim panel of the 3rd

Row seat.Do not block or place objects directly in

front of the inlet grille or heater outlets. The

electrical system could overload causing damage

to the blower motor.

Rear Temperature Control

To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle,

rotate the temperature knob counterclockwise to

lower the temperature, and clockwise to increase the

temperature. The rear temperature settings are dis-

played in the Uconnect® system.

When rear controls are locked by the Uconnect®

system, the Rear Temperature Lock symbol on the

temperature knob is illuminated and any rear overhead

adjustments are ignored.

(fig. 56)

Rear ATC Control Features

1 — Blower Speed 3 — Rear MODE

2 — Rear Temperature 4 — Rear Temperature Lock

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Rear Mode Control

• Auto Mode

The rear system automatically maintains the correct

mode and comfort level desired by the rear seat occu-

pants.

• Headliner Mode

Air comes from the outlets in the headliner.

Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted

to direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the

outlets to one side will shut off the airflow.

• Bi-Level Mode

Air comes from both the headliner outlets and

the floor outlets.

NOTE: In many temperature positions, the BI-LEVEL

mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the

headliner outlets and warmer air from the floor out-

lets.

• Floor Mode

Air comes from the floor outlets.

OperatingTips

NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for

suggested control settings for various weather condi-

tions.

Summer Operation

The engine cooling system must be protected with a

high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper cor-

rosion protection and to protect against engine over-

heating. A solution of 50% OAT (Organic Additive

Technology) coolant that meets the requirements of

Fiat Classification 9.55522 and 50% water is recom-

mended. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Ser-

vice and Care” for proper coolant selection.

Winter Operation

Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter

months is not recommended because it may cause

window fogging.

Vacation Storage

Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of

service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the

air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in

the fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure

adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility

of compressor damage when the system is started

again.

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Window Fogging

Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re-

moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The

Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear

windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side win-

dow fogging becomes a problem, increase the blower

speed. Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in

mild but rainy or humid weather.

NOTE:

• Recirculation mode without A/C should not be used

for long periods, as fogging may occur.

• Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will auto-

matically adjust the climate control settings to re-

duce or eliminate window fogging on the front wind-

shield. When this occurs, recirculation will be

unavailable.

Outside Air Intake

Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the

windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves.

Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow,

and if they enter the plenum, they could plug the water

drains. In winter months, make sure the air intake is

clear of ice, slush, and snow.

A/C Air Filter

The climate control system filters outside air contain-

ing dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot

be totally filtered out. Refer to “Maintenance Proce-

dures” in “Servicing and Care” for filter replacement

instructions.

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Manual Control Setting Suggestions ForVarious Weather Conditions

(fig. 57)

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

LIGHTS

HEADLIGHT SWITCH

The headlight switch is located on the drivers

side of the instrument panel. This switch con-

trols the operation of the headlights, parking

lights, instrument panel lights, instrument panel light

dimming, interior lights and fog lights.

(fig. 58)

Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first

detent for parking light and instrument panel light

operation. Rotate the headlight switch to the second

detent for headlight, parking light and instrument panel

light operation.

AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS (for

versions/markets, where provided)

This system automatically turns the headlights on or off

according to ambient light levels. To turn the system

on, rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to

the AUTO position. When the system is on, the

headlight time delay feature is also on. This means the

headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you

turn the ignition switch OFF. To turn the automatic

system off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO

position.

NOTE: The engine must be running before the head-

lights will come on in the automatic mode.

HEADLIGHT LEVELING SYSTEM

This system allows the driver to maintain proper head-

light beam position with the road surface regardless of

vehicle load.

The headlight leveling switch is located next

to the dimmer control on the left side of the

instrument panel.

(fig. 58)

Headlight Switch

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

To operate, rotate the headlight leveling switch until

the appropriate number, which corresponds to the

load listed on the following chart, illuminates on the

switch.

0 Driver only, or driver and front passen-

ger.

Driver, plus an evenly distributed load in

the luggage compartment. The total

weight of the driver and load does not

exceed the maximum load capacity of the

vehicle.

All seating positions occupied, plus an

evenly distributed load in the luggage

compartment. The total weight of pas-

sengers and load does not exceed the

maximum load capacity of the vehicle.

Calculations based on a passenger weight of 75 kg.

HEADLIGHTS ON WITH WIPERS

(AVAILABLE WITH AUTOMATIC

HEADLIGHTS ONLY)

When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on

approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned

on if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO

position. In addition, the headlights will turn off when

the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this

feature.

NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be

turned on and off using the Uconnect® System, refer

to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Knowing Your Vehicle”

for further information.

HEADLIGHT TIME DELAY

This feature provides the safety of headlight illumina-

tion for up to 90 seconds when leaving your vehicle in

an unlit area.

To activate the delay feature, turn OFF the ignition

switch while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off

the headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval

begins when the headlight switch is turned off.

NOTE: The lights must be turned off within 45 sec-

onds of turning the ignition OFF to activate this fea-

ture.

If you turn the headlights, park lights or ignition switch

ON again, the system will cancel the delay.

If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they

will turn off in the normal manner.

NOTE: The Headlight Time Delay is programmable

using the Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect®

Settings” in “Knowing Your Vehicle” for further infor-

mation.

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

LIGHTS-ON REMINDER

If the headlights or parking lights are on after the

ignition is placed in the OFF position, a chime will

sound to alert the driver when the driver's door is

opened.

FRONT AND REAR FOG LIGHTS (for

versions/markets, where provided)

The front and rear fog light switch is built into the

headlight switch.

(fig. 59)

Front Fog Lights

To activate the front fog lights, turn on the

parking lights or the low beam headlights and

press the headlight switch. To turn off the front fog

lights, either press the headlight switch three more

times or turn off the headlight switch.

Rear Fog Lights

To activate the rear fog lights, turn the head-

lamp switch to the park lamp or headlamp

position. Press the headlight switch once for

front fog lights, press the switch a second time for front

and rear fog lights. Pressing the switch a third time will

deactivate the rear fog lights, and a fourth time will

deactivate the front fog lights. Turning the headlight

switch off will also deactivate the fog lights.

An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates

when the fog lights are turned on.

(fig. 59)

Fog Light Switch

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

MULTIFUNCTION LEVER

The multifunction lever controls the operation of the

turn signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights.

The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the

steering column.

(fig. 60)

TURN SIGNALS

Move the multifunction lever up or down and the

arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to

show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal

lights.

NOTE:

• If either light remains on and does not flash, or there

is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside

light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever

is moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is

defective.

• A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the EVIC

(for versions/markets, where provided) and a con-

tinuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more

than 1.6 km with either turn signal on.

LANE CHANGE ASSIST

Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond

the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash

three times then automatically turn off.

HIGH/LOW BEAM SWITCH

Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch

the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever

toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.

FLASH-TO-PASS

You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by

lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This

will turn on the high beams headlights until the lever is

released.

(fig. 60)

Multifunction Lever

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

INTERIOR LIGHTS

The interior lights come on when a door is opened.

To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off

automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is

moved to the LOCK position. This will occur if the

interior lights were switched on manually or are on

because a door is open. This includes the glove box

light, but not the trunk light. To restore interior light

operation, either turn the ignition switch ON or cycle

the light switch.

DIMMER CONTROLS

The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and

is located on the drivers side of the instrument panel.

(fig. 61)

Rotating the dimmer control upward with the parking

lights or headlights on will increase the brightness of

the instrument panel lights.

DOME LIGHT POSITION

Rotate the dimmer control completely upward to the

second detent to turn on the interior lights. The

interior lights will remain on when the dimmer control

is in this position.

INTERIOR LIGHT DEFEAT (OFF)

Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bottom off

position. The interior lights will remain off when the

doors are open.

PARADE MODE (DAYTIME BRIGHTNESS

FEATURE)

Rotate the dimmer control upward to the first detent.

This feature brightens all text displays such as the

odometer, and radio when the parking lights or head-

lights are on.

MAP/READING LIGHTS

Refer to “Overhead Console” for further information

on Map/Reading Lights.

(fig. 61)

Dimmer Controls

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

ILLUMINATED ENTRY

The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the

doors or open any door or liftgate.

This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the

outside mirrors (for versions/markets, where pro-

vided). Refer to “Mirrors” in “Knowing Your Vehicle”

for further information.

The interior lights will fade to off after approximately

30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once

the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN position from the

OFF position.

NOTE:

• The front courtesy overhead console and door cour-

tesy lights will turn on if the dimmer control is in the

"Dome ON" position (extreme top position).

• The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the

dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position

(extreme bottom position).

WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND

WASHERS

The windshield wiper/washer control lever is located

on the left side of the steering column.

(fig. 62)

The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch,

located at the end of the lever. Refer to “Rear Window

Features” for further information on using the rear

window wiper/washer.

(fig. 62)

Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

INTERMITTENT WIPER SYSTEM

Use the intermittent wiper system when weather con-

ditions make a single wiping cycle, with a variable pause

between cycles, desirable. Rotate the end of the wind-

shield wiper/washer control lever to one of the first

five detents to select the desired delay interval

(fig. 63)

There are five delay settings, which allow you to regu-

late the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle

every two seconds to a maximum of approximately 36

seconds between cycles at vehicle speeds below

16 km/h. At speeds greater than 16 km/h, the delay

varies from a minimum of one cycle every second to a

maximum of approximately 18 seconds between

cycles.

NOTE: The wiper delay times depend on vehicle

speed. If the vehicle is moving less than 16 km/h, delay

times will be doubled.

WINDSHIELD WIPER OPERATION

Rotate the end of the lever upward, to the first detent

past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper

operation. Rotate the end of the lever upward to the

second detent past the intermittent settings for high-

speed wiper operation.

(fig. 64)

(fig. 63)

Front Wiper Control

(fig. 64)

Front Wiper Control

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

NOTE: The wipers will automatically return to the

“park” position if you turn OFF the ignition switch

while they are operating. The wipers will resume op-

eration when you turn the ignition switch back to the

ON position.

• Turn the windshield wipers OFF when

driving through an automatic car wash.

Damage to the windshield wipers may

result if the wiper control is left in any posit ion

other than OFF.

• In cold weather, always turn OFF the wiper

switch and allow the wiper s to return to the park

position before turning OFF the engine. If the

wiper switch is left ON and the wipers freeze to

the windshield, damage to the wiper motor may

occur when t he vehicle is restarted.

• Always remove any buildup of snow that pre-

vents the windshield wiper blades from returning

to the “park” position. If the windshield wiper

control is turned OFF, and the blades cannot

return to the“park”position,damage to the wiper

motor may occur.

WINDSHIELD WASHERS

To use the windshield washer, push the washer knob,

located on the end of the multifunction lever, inward to

the second detent.

If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in

the delay range, the wipers will operate in low-speed

for two or three wipe cycles after releasing the lever

and then resume the intermittent interval previously

selected.

If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in

the OFF position, the wipers will operate for two or

three wipe cycles and then turn OFF.

WARNING!

Sudden loss of visibility through the

windshield

could lead to a collision.You

might not see other vehicles or other obstacles.To

avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freez-

ing weather, warm the windshield with the de-

froster before and during windshield washer use.

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

MIST FEATURE

Push the washer knob, located on the end of the

multifunction lever, inward to the first detent to acti-

vate a single wipe cycle to clear the windshield of road

mist or spray from a passing vehicle. The wipers will

continue to operate until you release the lever.

NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer

pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the

windshield. The wash function must be used in order to

spray the windshield with washer fluid.

HEADLIGHTS ON WITH WIPERS (for

versions/markets, where provided)

When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on

after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is

placed in the AUTO position and programmable fea-

ture is set to ON. In addition, the headlights will turn

off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned

on by this feature.

NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be

turned on or off using the Uconnect® System. Refer to

“Uconnect® Settings” in “Knowing Your Vehicle” for

further information.

HEADLIGHT WASHERS (for

versions/markets, where

provided)

The Headlight Washers are recessed into the top of

the fascia, centrally located below each headlight.

The windshield wiper/washer control lever operates

the headlight washers when the ignition switch is in the

ON position and the headlights are ON. The lever is

located on the left side of the steering column.

To use the headlight washers, push the washer knob,

located on the end of the multifunction lever, inward to

the second detent to activate the windshield washers

and release it. When this is done, the two stationary

washer nozzles at each headlight spray one timed

high-pressure spray of washer fluid onto each headlight

lens. In addition, the windshield washers will spray the

windshield and the windshield wipers will cycle.

NOTE: After turning the ignition switch and head-

lights ON, the headlight washers will operate on the

first spray of the windshield washer and then every

eleventh spray after that.

100

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

REAR WINDOW FEATURES

REAR WINDOW WIPER/WASHER

The rear window wiper/washer control is located on

the left side of the steering column.

(fig. 65)

Rotate the switch upward to the first detent

position for rear wiper operation.

NOTE: The rear wiper operates in an intermittent

mode only.

Rotate the switch upward past the first detent

position to activate the rear washer. The washer

pump will continue to operate as long as the switch is

held. Upon release, the wiper will cycle three times

before returning to the set position.

(fig. 66)

If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is

turned to the LOCK position, the wiper will automati-

cally return to the “Park” position. When the vehicle is

restarted, the wiper will resume function at whichever

position the switch is set at.

(fig. 65)

Rear Wiper/Washer

(fig. 66)

Rear Wiper/Washer Control

101

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

• Turn the rear wiper off when driving

through an automatic car wash. Damage

to the rear wiper may result if the rear

wiper switch is left in the ON position.

• In cold weather, always turn off the rear wiper

switch and allow the rear wiper to return to the

park posi tion before turning off the engine. If the

rear wiper switch is left on and the rear wiper

freezes to the window, damage to the rear wiper

motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted.

• Always remove any buildup of snow that pre-

vents the rear wiper blade from returning to the

park position. If the rear wiper control is turned

off and the blade cannot return to the park

position, damage to the rear wiper motor may

occur.

REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER

The rear window defroster button is located on

the climate control panel. Press this button to

turn on the rear window defroster and the heated

outside mirrors (for versions/markets, where pro-

vided). An indicator in the button will illuminate when

the rear window defroster is on. The rear window

defroster automatically turns off after approximately

10 minutes.

NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the

rear window defroster only when the engine is oper-

ating.

Failure to follow these cautions can

cause damage to the heating elements:

• Use care when washing the inside of

the rear window. Do not use abrasive window

cleaners on the interior surface of the window.

Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution,

wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels

can be peeled off after soaking with warm water.

• Do not use scrapers,sharp instruments, or abra-

sive window cleaners on t he interior surface of

the window.

• Keep all objects a safe distance from the win-

dow.

102

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL

When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes

over accelerator operations at speeds greater than

40 km/h.

(fig. 67)

NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the

Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to

shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are

operated at the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic

Speed Control System can be reactivated by pushing

the Electronic Speed Control ON/OFF button and

resetting the desired vehicle set speed.

TO ACTIVATE

Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light

in the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the

system off, push the ON/OFF button a second time.

The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off. The system

should be turned off when not in use.

WARNING!

Leaving the Electronic Speed Control

system on

when not in use is dangerous.

You could accidentally set the system or cause it

to go faster than you want.You could lose control

and have an accident. Always leave the system

OFF when you are not using it.

TO SET A DESIRED SPEED

Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the

vehicle has reached the desired speed, press the SET (-)

button and release. Release the accelerator and the

vehicle will operate at the selected speed.

NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady

speed and on level ground before pressing the SET (-)

button.

(fig. 67)

Electronic Speed Control Buttons

1 — ON/OFF 3 — SET -

2 — RES + 4 — CANCEL

103

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

TO DEACTIVATE

A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL

button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the

vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control

without erasing the set speed memory.

Pressing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition

switch OFF erases the set speed memory.

TO RESUME SPEED

To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)

button and release. Resume can be used at any speed

above 32 km/h.

TO VARY THE SPEED SETTING

To Increase Speed

When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can

increase speed by pushing the RES (+) button.

• Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a

2 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of

the button results in an increase of 2 km/h.

• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will

continue to increase until the button is released,

then the new set speed will be established.

To Decrease Speed

When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can

decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.

• Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a

2 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of

the button results in a decrease of 2 km/h.

• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will

continue to decrease until the button is released,

then the new set speed will be established.

TO ACCELERATE FOR PASSING

Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the

pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set

speed.

104

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills

The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain

the vehicle set speed.

NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system main-

tains speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on

moderate hills is normal.

On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur

so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic

Speed Control.

WARNING!

Electronic Speed Control can be danger-

ous wh

ere the system cannot maintain a

constant speed.Your vehicle could go too fast for

the conditions , and you could lose control and

have an accident. Do not use Electronic Speed

Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are

winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.

OVERHEAD CONSOLE

The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights,

storage for sunglasses, an interior observation mirror

and an optional power sunroof switch.

(fig. 68)

Overhead Console

105

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

COURTESY/READING LIGHTS

The overhead console has two courtesy lights. The

lights turn on when a door or the liftgate is opened. If

your vehicle is equipped with Remote Keyless Entry

(RKE) the lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK

button on the RKE transmitter is pressed. The cour-

tesy lights also function as reading lights. Press in on

each lens to turn these lights on while inside the

vehicle. Press the lens a second time to turn each light

off. You may adjust the direction of these lights by

pressing the outside ring, which is identified with four

directional arrows.

(fig. 69)

SUNGLASSES STORAGE

To access the storage compartment, press on the

raised bars on the compartment door in the center of

the console and release and the door will swing

downward.

(fig. 70)

INTERIOR OBSERVATION MIRROR

The convex interior observation mirror provides the

driver and front seat passenger a wide field of view to

conveniently view passengers sitting in the rear passen-

ger seats. To use the interior observation mirror, press

on the raised bars on the compartment door and

release (the door will swing downward), then raise the

door until it is almost closed and release. The door will

latch in position to use the interior observation mirror.

(fig. 69)

Courtesy/Reading Light

(fig. 70)

Sunglasses Storage Compartment

106

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

NOTE: From the “observation mirror” position, the

door can only be closed.

To return to the full open position, the door must first

be closed and then opened by pressing the latch again

to release.

(fig. 71)

POWER SUNROOF SWITCH (for

versions/markets, where provided)

Refer to “Power Sunroof” for further information.

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS

The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the

instrument panel switch bank, above the climate

controls.

Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning

flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc-

tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncom-

ing traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second

time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.

This is an emergency warning system and it should not

be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your

vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for

other motorists.

When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance,

the Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate

even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.

NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flash-

ers may wear down your battery.

(fig. 71)

Observation Mirror

107

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

STORAGE

GLOVE COMPARTMENT

The glove compartment is located on the passenger

side of the instrument panel. Pull on the release handle

to open the glove compartment.

(fig. 72)

FLOOR CONSOLE STORAGE

An open storage area, or cubby bin, is located in the

floor console.

(fig. 73)

CENTER CONSOLE STORAGE

There is a storage tray and storage compartment

located under the center console armrest.

(fig. 74)

(fig. 72)

Glove Compartment

(fig. 73)

Floor Console Cubby Bin

(fig. 74)

Center Console

108

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Pull upward on the release handle, located on the front

of the lid, to gain access to the storage tray and storage

compartment.

(fig. 75)

The storage tray can be slid forward and rearward or

removed to access the center console storage

compartment.

(fig. 76)

WARNING!

Do not operate this vehicle with a con-

sole compar

tment lid in the open posi-

tion. Driving with the console compartment lid

open may result in injury in a collision.

(fig. 75)

Center Console StorageTray

(fig. 76)

Center Console Storage Compartment

109

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Sliding Armrest (for automatic transmission

only)

The center console armrest can also be slid rearward

for easy access to the storage area.

(fig. 77)

FLIP 'N STOW™ FRONT PASSENGER SEAT

STORAGE (for versions/markets, where

provided)

The seat latch release-loop is located in the center of

the seat cushion between the seat cushion and the

seatback. Pull the loop upward to release the latch and

then forward to open the seat to the detent position.

(fig. 78)

NOTE: Make sure that objects inside the bin do not

interfere with the latch before closing the seat. Push

the seat cushion downward after closing it to make

sure it latches to the base.

WARNING!

Be certain that the seat cushion is

locked sec

urely into position before us-

ing the seat. Otherwise, the seat will not provide

the proper stability for passengers. An improp-

erly latched seat cushion could cause serious

injury.

(fig. 77)

Sliding Armrest

(fig. 78)

Front Passenger Seat Storage Compartment

110

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

SECOND-ROW PASSENGER SEAT

TEMPORARY STORAGE BIN

This is a temporary storage bin designed for use when

the seatback/armrest is down. Be sure to remove all

items from this bin before raising the seatback/armrest.

SECOND-ROW MAP POCKET AND

GROCERY RETAINERS

A map storage pocket and grocery retainers are lo-

cated on the back of the drivers seatback.

(fig. 79)

IN-FLOOR STORAGE BIN WITH

REMOVABLE LINER

NOTE: Position the front seat to at least a mid-track

position to provide easier access to the storage bin.

An in-floor storage bin is located behind each front

seat. Each 5.9L bin can hold up to 12, 0.35L cans, plus

ice, or other items. The removable bin liner allows for

easy filling, emptying, and cleaning.

To access the bin, position the floor mat aside (for

versions/markets, where provided). Pull the door latch

release-loop upward to release the latch and then

forward to open the bin door.

(fig. 80)

(fig. 79)

Seat Storage And Grocery Retainers

(fig. 80)

In-Floor Storage

111

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

The liner can be removed for easy cleaning. (fig. 81)

ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS

A 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlet is located in the

center console below the radio. The power outlet has

power available when the ignition switch in the ON/

RUN or ACC position.

(fig. 82)

This power outlet will also operate a conventional cigar

lighter unit. To preserve the heating element, do

not hold the lighter in the heating position.

(fig. 81)

Removable Liner

(fig. 82)

Front 12 Volt Power Outlet

112

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

A second 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlet is located

inside the center console storage area. Power is avail-

able with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN, ACC or

LOCK position.

(fig. 83)

A third fused 12 Volt power outlet is located on the

back of the center console. This power outlet has

power available when the ignition switch is in the

LOCK, ON or ACC position.

(fig. 84)

A fourth fused 12 Volt power outlet is located on the

left quarter trim panel in the cargo area. This power

outlet has power available when the ignition switch is in

the ON or ACC position.

(fig. 85)

(fig. 83)

Center Console 12 Volt Power Outlet

(fig. 84)

Rear Seat 12 Volt Power Outlet

(fig. 85)

Rear Cargo Area Power Outlet

113

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

• Do not exceed the maximum power of

160Watts (13Amps) at 12Volts.If the 160

Watt (13 Amp) power rating is exceeded

the fuse protecting the system will need to be

replaced.

• The power outlet on the bottom of the center

console shares the fuse with the power outlet on

the back of the console.The combined usage must

not exceed 160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts.

• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs

only. Do not insert any other object in the power

outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow

the fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can

cause damage not covered by your New Vehicle

Limited Warranty.

(fig. 86)

WARNING!

To avoid serious injury or death:

•

Only devices designed for use in this type

of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.

• Do not touch with wet hands.

• Close the lid when not in use and while dr iving

the vehicle.

• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an

electric shock and failure.

(fig. 86)

Power Outlet Fuses

1 — F103 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Console Bin & Power

Outlet Console Rear

2 — F102 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel &

Power Outlet Left Rear Cargo Area

114

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

• Many accessories that can be plugged

in draw power from the vehicle's battery,

even when not in use (i.e., cellular

phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long

enough, the vehicle's battery will discharge suffi-

ciently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the

engine from starting.

• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., cool-

ers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the

battery even more quickly. Only use these inter-

mittently and with greater caution.

• After the use of high power draw accessories,or

long periods of the vehicle not being started (with

accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be

driven a sufficient length of time to allow the

alternator to recharge the vehicle's battery.

• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs

only. Do not hang any type of accessory or acces-

sory bracket from the plug.

CUPHOLDERS

There are two cupholders, located in the center floor

console, for the front passengers.

(fig. 87)

For passengers in the second row there are two cup-

holders, located in the center armrest between the

two seats.

(fig. 87)

Floor Console Cupholders

115

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

When the armrest is folded flat the cupholders are in

the back of the Head Restraint. The Head Restraint can

be adjusted to better position the cupholders.

(fig. 88)

For vehicles equipped with third row seating, there are

additional cupholders located in the trim panels.

In addition to cupholders, vehicles may also be

equipped with bottle holders. The bottle holders are

located on the door trim panels.

(fig. 89)

WARNING!

If containers of hot liquid are placed in

the

bottle holder,they can spill when the

door is closed, burning the occupants. Be careful

when closing the doors to avoid injury.

(fig. 88)

Armrest Cupholders

(fig. 89)

Door Bottle Holder

116

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

POWER SUNROOF (for

versions/markets, where

provided)

The power sunroof switch is located between the sun

visors on the overhead console.

(fig. 90)

WARNING!

• Never leave children unattended in a

vehi

cle, or with access to an unlocked

vehicle. Never leave the Key Fob in or near the

vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. Do

not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with

Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN

mode. Occupants, particularly unattended chil-

dren, can become entrapped by the power sun-

roof while operating the power sunroof switch.

Such entrapment may result in serious injury or

death.

• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being

thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof.You

could also be seriously injured or killed. Always

fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all

passengers are also properly secured.

• Do not allow small children to operate the

sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body

parts, or any object, to project through the sun-

roof opening. Injury may result.

(fig. 90)

Power Sunroof Switch

117

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

OPENING SUNROOF — EXPRESS

Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half

second and the sunroof will open automatically from

any position. The sunroof will open fully and stop

automatically. This is called “Express Open”. During

Express Open operation, any movement of the sunroof

switch will stop the sunroof.

OPENING SUNROOF — MANUAL MODE

To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rear-

ward to full open. Any release of the switch will stop

the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially

opened condition until the switch is pushed and held

rearward again.

CLOSING SUNROOF — EXPRESS

Press the switch forward and release it within one-half

second and the sunroof will close automatically from

any position. The sunroof will close fully and stop

automatically. This is called “Express Close”. During

Express Close operation, any movement of the switch

will stop the sunroof.

CLOSING SUNROOF — MANUAL MODE

To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the

forward position. Any release of the switch will stop

the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially

closed condition until the switch is pushed and held

forward again.

PINCH PROTECT FEATURE

This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening

of the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an

obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the

sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the ob-

struction if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward

and release to Express Close.

VENTING SUNROOF — EXPRESS

Press and release the Vent button within one half

second and the sunroof will open to the vent position.

This is called “Express Vent” and it will occur regardless

of sunroof position. During Express Vent operation,

any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.

SUNSHADE OPERATION

The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the

sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.

NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof

is open.

WIND BUFFETING

Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of

pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the

ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the

windows down, or the sunroof (for versions/markets,

where provided) in certain open or partially open

positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be

118

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear win-

dows open, open the front and rear windows together

to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with

the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to mini-

mize the buffeting or open any window.

SUNROOF MAINTENANCE

Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean

the glass panel.

IGNITION OFF OPERATION

The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to

10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the

LOCK position. Opening either front door will cancel

this feature.

NOTE: The delay time is programmable using the

Uconnect® system. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” for

further information.

DOOR LOCKS

MANUAL DOOR LOCKS

To lock each door, push the door lock knob on each

door trim panel downward. To unlock the front doors,

pull the inside door handle to the first detent. To

unlock the rear doors, pull the door lock knob on the

door trim panel upward.

(fig. 91)

If the door lock knob is down when you shut the door,

the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the Key Fob is

not inside the vehicle before closing the door.

NOTE: The manual door locks will not lock or unlock

the liftgate.

(fig. 91)

Manual Door Lock Knob

119

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

WARNING!

• For personal security and safety in the

ent of a collision, lock the vehicle

doors before you drive as well as when you park

and leave the vehicle.

• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the

Key Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.

Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may

cause severe personal injuries or death.

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with

access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children

to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a

number of reasons. A child or others could be

seriously or fatally injured. Children should be

warned not to touch the parking brake, brake

pedal or the transmission gear selector.

• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle,

or in a location accessible to children, and do not

leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with

Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN

mode. A child could operate power windows,

other controls, or move t he vehicle.

POWER DOOR LOCKS

A power door lock switch is on each front door trim

panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors and

liftgate.

(fig. 92)

If you press the power door lock switch while the

ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, and any

front door is open, the power locks will not operate.

This prevents you from accidentally locking the Key

Fob in the vehicle. Cycling the ignition to the OFF

position or closing the door will allow the locks to

operate. If a door is open, and the ignition is in the

ACC or ON/RUN position, a chime will sound as a

reminder to turn the ignition OFF.

(fig. 92)

Power Door Lock Switch Location

120

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Automatic Door Locks — (for versions/

markets, where provided)

The auto door lock feature default condition is dis-

abled. When enabled, the door locks will lock auto-

matically when the vehicle's speed exceeds 24 km/h.

The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled

by your authorized dealer per written request of the

customer. Please see your authorized dealer for ser-

vice.

Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit

The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with

power door locks if:

1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is

enabled.

2. The vehicle was in motion, then speed returned to

0 km/h and the transmission shift lever is placed in

PARK.

3. Any door is opened.

4. The doors were not previously unlocked.

To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect®

Settings” in “Knowing Your Vehicle” for further infor-

mation.

NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit

feature in accordance with local laws.

Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit

Programming

The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be

enabled or disabled as follows:

• For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect®, refer to

“Uconnect® Settings” in “Knowing Your Vehicle” for

further information.

NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit

feature in accordance with local laws.

CHILD-PROTECTION DOOR LOCK SYSTEM

— REAR DOORS

To provide a safer environment for small children riding

in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a

Child-Protection Door Lock system.

121

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

To Engage The Child-Protection Door Lock

System

1. Open the rear door.

2. Insert the tip of the emergency key (or alike) into

the child lock control and rotate it to the LOCK

position. (fig. 93) (fig. 94)

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.

NOTE: When the Child-Protection Door Lock sys-

tem is engaged, the door can be opened only by using

the outside door handle even though the inside door

lock is in the unlocked position.

WARNING!

Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a

collision. Remember that the rear doors

can only be opened from the outside when the

Child-Protection locks are engaged.Failure to follow

this warning may result in serious injury or death.

NOTE:

• After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock sys-

tem, always test the door from the inside to make

certain it is in the desired position.

• For emergency exit with the system engaged, move

the lock knob up to the UNLOCK position, roll

down the window, and open the door with the

outside door handle.

(fig. 93)

Child-Protection Door Lock Location

(fig. 94)

Child-Protection Door Lock Function

122

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

To Disengage The Child-Protection Door Lock

System

1. Open the rear door.

2. Insert the tip of the emergency key (or alike) into

the child lock control and rotate it to the UNLOCK

position. (fig. 95)

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.

NOTE: After disengaging the Child-Protection Door

Lock system, always test the door from the inside to

make certain it is in the desired position.

KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™

The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the

vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a

feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go™. This feature allows

you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without

having to press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock

buttons.

NOTE:

• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to

“Uconnect® Settings” in “Knowing Your Vehicle” for

further information.

• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been

raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock

sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower re-

sponse time.

• If the vehicle is unlocked by the RKE transmitter or

Passive Entry and no door goes ajar within 60 sec-

onds, the vehicle will re-lock and will arm the secu-

rity alarm.

(fig. 95)

Child-Protection Door Lock Function

123

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

To Unlock From The Driver's Side:

With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 1.5

m of the driver's door handle, grab the driver's front

door handle to unlock the driver's door automatically.

The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the

door is unlocked.

(fig. 96)

NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is pro-

grammed all doors will unlock when you grab hold of

the driver’s front door handle. To select between

“Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All

Doors 1st Press”, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Informa-

tion Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-

Programmable Features)” in “Knowing Your Vehicle”

for further information.

To Unlock From The Passenger Side:

With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 1.5

m of the passenger door handle, grab the front passen-

ger door handle to unlock all four doors and the liftgate

automatically.

NOTE: All doors and the liftgate will unlock when the

front passenger door handle is grabbed regardless of

the driver’s door unlock preference setting (“Unlock

Driver Door 1st Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st

Press”).

Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive En-

try RKE Transmitter In Vehicle

To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a

Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the

Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic

door unlock feature which will function if the ignition is

OFF.

If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel

switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors

have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and

outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE

transmitters. If one of the vehicle's Passive Entry RKE

transmitters is detected inside the vehicle, and no

other valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters are de-

tected outside the vehicle, the Passive Entry System

automatically unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the

(fig. 96)

Grabbing The Driver's Door Handle

124

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

horn three times (on the third attempt ALL doors will

lock and the Passive Entry RKE transmitter can be

locked in the vehicle).

To Enter The Liftgate

With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 1.0

m of the liftgate, press the button underneath the left

side of the accent bar, which is located on the liftgate

below the glass, to lock or unlock the vehicle.

(fig. 97)

To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors

With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmit-

ters within 1.5 m of the driver or passenger front door

handle, press the door handle LOCK button to lock all

four doors and liftgate.

(fig. 98)

(fig. 97)

Liftgate Unlock/Lock Button

(fig. 98)

Outside Door Handle Lock Button

125

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Do NOT grab the door handle, when pressing the door

handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).

(fig. 99)

NOTE:

• After pressing the door handle LOCK button, you

must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock

the doors, using either Passive Entry door handle.

This is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is

locked by pulling the door handle, without the ve-

hicle reacting and unlocking.

• If Passive Entry is disabled using Uconnect® System,

the key protection described in "Preventing Inadver-

tent Locking of Passive Entry RKE Transmitter in

Vehicle" remains active/functional.

• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE

transmitter battery is dead.

The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE

transmitter lock button or the lock button located on

the vehicle’s interior door panel.

(fig. 99)

Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking

126

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

WINDOWS

POWER WINDOWS

The window controls on the driver's door trim panel

control all of the door windows.

(fig. 100)

There are single window controls on each passenger

door trim panel, which operate the passenger door

windows. The window controls will operate when the

ignition is in the ON/RUN or ACC position.

NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect®,

the power window switches will remain active for up to

10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to the LOCK/

OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel

this feature. The time is programmable. Refer to

“Uconnect® Settings” in “Knowing Your Vehicle” for

further information.

WARNING!

Never leave children unattended in a

vehicle

. Do not leave the Key Fob in or

near the vehicle or in a location accessible to

children,and do not leave the igni tion of a vehicle

equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC

or ON/RUN mode. Occupants,particularly unat-

tended children, can become entrapped by the

windows while operating the power window

switches. Such entrapment may result in serious

injury or death.

(fig. 100)

Power Window Switches

127

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

AUTO-DOWN FEATURE

The driver's power window switch has an Auto-down

feature. Press the window switch past the first detent,

release, and the window will go down automatically.

To open the window part way, press the window

switch to the first detent and release it when you want

the window to stop.

To stop the window from going all the way down during

the Auto-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.

AUTO-UP FEATURE WITH ANTI-PINCH

PROTECTION

On some models, the driver and front passenger

power window switches have an Auto-up feature. Pull

the window switch up to the second detent, release,

and the window will go up automatically.

To stop the window from going all the way up during

the Auto-up operation, push down on the switch

briefly.

To close the window par t way, pull the window switch

up to the first detent and release it when you want the

window to stop.

NOTE:

• If the window runs into any obstacle during Auto-

closure, it will reverse direction and then go back

down. Remove the obstacle and use the window

switch again to close the window.

• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger

the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during auto-

closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the

first detent and hold to close window manually.

WARNING!

There is no anti-pinch protection when

the

window is almost closed. To avoid

personal injury,be sure to clear your arms,hands,

fingers,and objects from the window path before

closing the window. Such entrapment may result

in ser ious injury.

RESET

It may be necessary at some point in time to reactivate

the Auto-up/Auto-down feature. To do so, perform

the following steps:

1. Pull the window switch up to close the window

completely and continue to hold the switch up for

an additional two seconds after the window is

closed.

128

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second

detent to open the window completely and con-

tinue to hold the switch down for an additional two

seconds after the window is fully open.

WINDOW LOCKOUT SWITCH

The window lockout switch on the driver's door trim

panel allows you to disable the window control on the

rear doors. To disable the window controls, press and

release the window lockout button (setting it in the

down position). To enable the window controls, press

and release the window lockout button again (setting it

in the up position).

(fig. 101)

WIND BUFFETING

Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of

pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the

ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the

windows down, or the sunroof (for versions/markets,

where provided) in certain open or partially open

positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be

minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear win-

dows open, then open the front and rear windows

together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting

occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof

opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window.

(fig. 101)

Window Lockout Switch

129

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

LIFTGATE

The liftgate can be unlocked or locked pushing the

UNLOCK or LOCK button on the Remote Keyless

Entry (RKE) transmitter, the Keyless Enter-N-Go™

(Passive Entry) LOCK/UNLOCK button underneath

the left side of the accent bar, which is located on the

liftgate below the glass or by activating the power door

lock switch located on either front door trim panel.

For further information on Keyless Enter-N-Go™

(Passive Entry), refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in

“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.

NOTE: The liftgate cannot be unlocked or locked with

the manual door lock plungers on the door trim panels

or the door lock cylinder on the driver's door.

To open the unlocked liftgate, squeeze the handle and

pull the liftgate toward you. Gas props will raise and

support the liftgate in the open position.

NOTE:

• In the event of a power malfunction to the liftgate, an

emergency liftgate latch release can be used to open

the liftgate. The emergency liftgate latch release can

be accessed through a snap-in cover located on the

liftgate trim panel.

• If liftgate is left open for an extended period of time,

the liftgate may need to be closed manually to reset

power lif tgate functionality.

(fig. 102)

NOTE: Because the gas pressure drops with tempera-

ture, it may be necessary to assist the props when

opening the liftgate in cold weather.

(fig. 102)

Liftgate Release

130

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

WARNING!

• Driving with the liftgate open can al-

low

poisonous exhaust gases into your

vehicle. These fumes could injure you and your

passengers.Keep the liftgate closed when you are

operating the vehicle.

• If you are required to drive with the liftgate

open, make sure that all windows are closed, and

the blower switch on the climate control is set at

high speed. Do not use the recirculation mode.

CARGO AREA FEATURES

RECHARGEABLE FLASHLIGHT (for

versions/markets, where provided)

The rechargeable LED flashlight stores in its charging

station in the left rear quar ter trim panel. To remove it,

press on the indent on the side of the flashlight and

release.

(fig. 103)

Rechargeable Flashlight

131

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

To operate the flashlight, press the switch once for

high, twice for low, and a third time to return to off.

(fig. 104)

NOTE: Be sure to return the flashlight to its charging

station when not in use to ensure it is ready for

operation the next time you need it.

CARGO MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

FIVE PASSENGER SYSTEM FEATURES

• A raised load floor that sits on top of a large built-in

storage bin.

• A tri-fold door built into the load floor that allows

easy access to items in the built-in storage bin.

• 60/40 split second-row passenger seats with fold flat

feature, which allows for extended cargo space. Re-

fer to “Seats” for further information.

• An optional front passenger seat with fold flat fea-

ture, which extends cargo space even further. Refer

to “Seats” for further information.

• Cargo tie-downs.

• A retractable cargo area cover (for versions/markets,

where provided).

SEVEN PASSENGER SYSTEM FEATURES

• A large built-in storage bin with a hinged hardcover

located in the floor behind the third-row passenger

seats.

• 60/40 split second-row passenger seats with fold flat

feature, which allows for extended cargo space. Re-

fer to “Seats” in “Knowing your vehicle” for further

information.

• 50/50 split third-row passenger seats with fold flat

feature, which allows for extended cargo space. Re-

fer to “Seats” for further information.

• An optional front passenger seat with fold flat fea-

ture, which extends cargo space even further. Refer

to “Seats” for further information.

• Cargo tie-downs.

(fig. 104)

Three-Press Switch

132

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

CARGO TIE-DOWNS

WARNING!

Cargo tie-downs are not safe anchors for

a child seat

tether strap.In a sudden stop

or collision, a tie-down could pull loose and allow

the child seat to come loose. A child could be

badly injured. Use only the anchors provided for

child seat tethers.

Cargo tie-downs are located on both rear trim panels.

These tie-downs should be used to secure loads safely

when the vehicle is moving.

(fig. 105)

WARNING!

The weight and position of cargo and

passengers

can change the vehicle cen-

ter of gravity and vehicle handling.To avoid loss of

control resulting in personal injury, follow these

guidelines for loading your vehicle:

• Do not carry loads that exceed the load limits de-

scribed on the label attached to the left door or left

door center pillar.

• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put

heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.

• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear

axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight

over or behind the rear axle can cause the vehicle to

sway.

• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of

the seatback. This could impair visibility or become a

dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.

• To help protect against personal injur y, passengers

should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear

cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes

only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats and

use seat belts.

(fig. 105)

Cargo Tie-Downs

133

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

RETRACTABLE CARGO AREA COVER —

FIVE PASSENGER MODELS (for

versions/markets, where provided)

NOTE: The purpose of this cover is for privacy, not to

secure loads. It will not prevent cargo from shifting or

protect passengers from loose cargo.

The removable retractable cargo area cover mounts in

the cargo area behind the top of the rear seats.

The cover, when extended, covers the cargo area to

keep items out of sight. Notches in the trim panels near

the liftgate opening secure the extended cover in place.

The cover rolls away neatly inside its housing when not

in use. You can also remove the cover from the vehicle

to make more room in the cargo area.

To install the cover, position it in the vehicle so that the

flat side of the housing faces upward. Then, insert

either the left or the right spring-loaded post (located

on the ends of the cover housing) into the left attach-

ment point or the right attachment point (shown).

(fig. 106)

Insert the spring-loaded post on the opposite end of

the cover housing into the attachment point on the

opposite side of the vehicle.

(fig. 106)

Installing Retractable Cargo Area Cover

134

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Grab the cover handle and pull it toward you. As the

cover nears the liftgate opening, guide the rear attach-

ment posts (on both ends of the cover) into the

notches in the trim panels. Lower the cover to position

the posts into the bottom of the notches and release

the handle.

(fig. 107)

WARNING!

A cargo cover that is unsecured in the

vehicle

could cause injury in a collision.It

could become airborne during a sudden stop and

strike someone inside the vehicle. Do not store

the cargo cover on the cargo floor or in t he

passenger compartment. Remove the cover from

the vehicle when taken from its mount ing.Do not

store it in the vehicle.

(fig. 107)

Positioning Retractable Cargo Area Cover

135

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD

Two latches must be released to open the hood.

1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left

side of the instrument panel. (fig. 108)

2. Outside of the vehicle, locate the safety latch lever

near the center of the grille between the grille and

hood opening. Push the safety latch lever to the

right and then raise the hood. (fig. 109)

Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open

position. Place the upper end of the prop rod in the

hole on the underside of the hood.

(fig. 110)

(fig. 108)

Hood Release Lever

(fig. 109)

Underhood Safety Latch

(fig. 110)

Hood Prop Rod

136

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

To prevent possible damage:

• Before closing hood, make sure the

hood prop rod is fully seated into its

storage retaining clips.

• Do not slam the hood to close it. Use a firm

downward push at the center front edge of the

hood to ensure that both latches engage. Never

drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed,

with both latches engaged.

WARNING!

Be sure the hood is fully latched before

driving

your vehicle . If the hood is not

fully latched, i t could open when the vehicle is in

motion and block your vision. Failure to follow

this warning could result in serious injury or

death.

ROOF LUGGAGE RACK (for

versions/markets, where

provided)

The roof rack crossbars and side rails are designed to

carry cargo weight. The load must not exceed 68 kg

and it should be distributed uniformly over the cross-

bars. In addition, the roof rack does not increase the

total load carrying capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the

total load of cargo inside the vehicle plus that on the

roof rack does not exceed the maximum vehicle load

capacity.

NOTE: The roof rack side rails on your vehicle are

NOT designed to carry a load without the addition of

crossbars.

Metal Crossbars can be purchased from your FIAT

dealer to provide a functional roof rack system.

137

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

To Move The Crossbars

1. Loosen the knobs on top of each crossbar approxi-

mately six turns to disengage the clamp tooth from

the side rail. (fig. 111)

Relocate the crossbars, aligning the crossbar stan-

chions (end pieces) with one of the vertical marks on

the outboard surface of the side rail for proper

positioning. There are four frontward marks for the

front crossbar and four rearward marks for the rear

crossbar. Make sure the crossbars remain equally

spaced or parallel at any position for proper function.

3. Tighten the knobs on each crossbar to lock it in

position. As you tighten the knob, make sure the

clamp tooth engages completely into the side rail

slot.

4. Attempt to move the crossbar to ensure that it is

locked in position.

NOTE:

• To help control wind noise when installing the cross-

bars, make sure the arrows marked on the underside

of the crossbars face the front of the vehicle .

• To help reduce the amount of wind noise when the

crossbars are not in use, fasten the front crossbar in

the fourth position from the front and the rear

crossbar in the eighth position. The tie down holes

on the crossbar ends should always be used to tie

down the load. Check the straps frequently to be

sure that the load remains securely attached.

(fig. 111)

Crossbar Knobs

138

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

• To prevent damage to the roof of your

vehicle, DO NOT carry any loads on the

roof rack without the crossbars installed.

The load should be secured and placed on top of

the crossbars, not directly on the roof. If it is

necessary to place the load on the roof, place a

blanket or other protective layer between the

load and the roof surface.

• Crossbars should remain equally spaced or par-

allel at any roof rack position for proper function.

Noncompliance could result in damage to the

roof rack, cargo, and vehicle.

• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle ,

do not exceed the maximum roof rack load ca-

pacity of 68 kg. Always distribute heavy loads as

evenly as possible and secure the load appropri-

ately.

• Long loads, which extend over the windshield,

such as wood panels or surfboards, should be

secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle.

• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners care-

fully when carrying large or heavy loads on the

roof rack . Wind forces, due to natural causes or

nearby truck traffic, can add sudden upward

loads.This is especially true on large flat loads and

may result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle.

WARNING!

Cargo must be securely tied before driv-

ing y

our vehicle. Improperly secured

loads can fly off the vehicle, particularly at high

speeds, resulting in personal injury or property

damage. Follow the roof rack cautions when

carrying cargo on your roof rack .

139

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

BRAKE SYSTEM

Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic

brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic

systems loses normal capability, the remaining system

will still function. However, there will be some loss of

overall braking effectiveness. This will be evident by

increased pedal travel during application and greater

pedal force required to slow or stop the vehicle. In

addition, if the malfunction is caused by a leak in the

hydraulic system, the “Brake System Warning Light”

will turn on as the brake fluid level drops in the master

cylinder.

In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,

repeated brake applications with the engine OFF) the

brakes will still function. However, the effor t required

to brake the vehicle will be much greater than that

required with the power system operating.

WARNING!

• Riding the brakes can lead to brake

failure

and possibly a collision. Driving

with your foot resting or riding on the brake

pedal can result in abnormally high brake tem-

peratures, excessive lining wear, and possible

brake damage.You would not have your full brak-

ing capacity in an emergency.

• Driving a vehicle with the “Brake Warning

Light” on is dangerous. A significant decrease in

braking performance or vehicle stability during

braking may occur. It will take you longer to stop

the vehicle or will make your vehicle harder to

control.You could have a collision. Have the ve-

hicle checked immediately.

140

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle con-

trol under adverse braking conditions. The system

controls hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel

lock-up to help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces

during braking. Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System

(ABS)” under “Knowing Your Vehicle/Electronic Brake

Control System” for further information.

WARNING!

TheABS cannot prevent the natural laws

of physi

cs from acting on the vehicle, nor

can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing

road conditions. ABS cannot prevent accidents ,

including those resulting from excessive speed in

turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-

planing.The capabili ties of an ABS-equipped ve-

hicle must never be exploited in a reckless or

dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the

user's safety or the safety of others.

ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL

SYSTEM

Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic

brake control system commonly referred to as ESC.

This system includes Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS),

Brake Assist System (BAS), Traction Control System

(TCS), Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM), Electronic

Stability Control (ESC), Trailer Sway Control (TSC)

and Hill Start Assist (HSA). These systems work to-

gether to enhance both vehicle stability and control in

various driving conditions.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased

vehicle stability and brake performance under most

braking conditions. The system automatically “pumps”

the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent

wheel lock-up.

When the vehicle is driven over 11 km/h, you may also

hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related

motor noises. These noises are the system performing

its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS is working

properly. This self check occurs each time the vehicle is

started and accelerated past 11 km/h.

141

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

ABS is activated during braking under certain road or

stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can in-

clude ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose

debris, or panic stops.

You also may experience the following when the brake

system goes into Anti-lock:

• The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a

short time after the stop)

• The clicking sound of solenoid valves

• Brake pedal pulsations

• A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the

end of the stop

These are all normal characteristics of ABS.

WARNING!

• The ABS contains sophisticated elec-

troni

c equipment t hat may be suscep-

tible to interference caused by improperly in-

stalled or high output radio transmitting

equipment.This interference can cause possible

loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation

of such equipment should be performed by quali-

fied professionals.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish

their ef fectiveness and may lead to an accident.

Pumping makes the stopping distance longer.Just

press firmly on your brake pedal when you need

toslowdownorstop.

• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of

physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it

increase braking or steering efficiency beyond

that afforded by the condition of the vehicle

brakes and tires or the traction afforded.

• The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including

those resulting from excessive speed in turns,

following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-

planing.

• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle

must never be exploited in a reckless or danger-

ous manner, which could jeopardize the user's

safety or the safety of others.

All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and

type and tires must be properly inflated to produce

accurate signals for the computer.

142

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Anti-Lock Brake Light

The Anti-Lock Brake Light monitors the ABS.

The light will turn on when the ignition

switch is turned to the ON position and may

stay on for as long as four seconds.

If the ABS Light remains on or comes on while driving,

it indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake

system is not functioning and that service is required.

However, the conventional brake system will continue

to operate normally if the Brake System Warning Light

is not on.

If the ABS Light is on, the brake system should be

serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of

Anti-Lock brakes. If the ABS Light does not come on

when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position,

have the light repaired as soon as possible.

If both the Brake System Warning Light and the ABS

Light remain on, the ABS and Electronic Brake Force

Distribution (EBD) systems are not functioning. Imme-

diate repair to the ABS system is required.

BRAKE ASSIST SYSTEM (BAS)

The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking

capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The

system detects an emergency braking situation by sens-

ing the rate and amount of brake application and then

applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help

reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the

ABS. Applying the brakes very quickly results in the

best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of the

system, you must apply continuous braking pressure

during the stopping sequence, (do not “pump” the

brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless

braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal is

released, the BAS is deactivated.

WARNING!

BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of

physics

from acting on the vehicle, nor

can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing

road conditions. BAS cannot prevent accidents,

including those resulting from excessive speed in

turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-

planing. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped ve-

hicle must never be exploited in a reckless or

dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the

user's safety or the safety of others.

143

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (TCS)

This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each

of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake

pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine

power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration

and stability. A feature of the TCS system, Brake Lim-

ited Differential (BLD), functions similar to a limited

slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a

driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning

faster than the other, the system will apply the brake of

the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine torque

to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning. This

feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in the

“Partial Off” mode. Refer to “Electronic Stability Con-

trol (ESC)” for further information.

ELECTRONIC ROLL MITIGATION (ERM)

This system anticipates the potential for wheel lif t by

monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the

speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the

rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle's

speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it

then applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce

engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will

occur. ERM will only intervene during very severe or

evasive driving maneuvers. ERM can only reduce the

chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive

driving maneuvers. It cannot prevent wheel lift due to

other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the

roadway, or striking objects or other vehicles.

WARNING!

Many factors, such as vehicle loading,

road con

ditions, and driving conditions,

influence the chance that wheel lift or rollover

may occur. ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or

rollovers,especially those that involve leaving the

roadway or striking objects or other vehicles.The

capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle must

never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous

manner, which could jeopardize the user's safety

or the safety of others.

ELECTRONIC STABILITY CONTROL (ESC)

This system enhances directional control and stability

of the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC

corrects for over-steering and under-steering the ve-

hicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel.

Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle

maintain the desired path.

The ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the

path that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and

compares it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the

actual path does not match the intended path, the ESC

144

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in

counteracting the condition of over-steer or under-

steer.

• Over-steer - when the vehicle is turning more than

appropriate for the steering wheel position.

• Under-steer - when the vehicle is turning less than

appropriate for the steering wheel position.

WARNING!

• Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

cannot

prevent the natural laws of phys-

ics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase

the traction afforded by prevailing road condi-

tions.

• ESC cannot prevent collisions, including those

resulting from excessive speed in turns,driving on

very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also

cannot prevent collisions resulting from the loss

of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver

input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive,

and skillfull driver can prevent collisions.

• The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle

must never be explained in a reckless or danger-

ous manner which could jeopardize t he user's

safety or the safety of others.

ESC Operating Modes

The ESC system has two available operating modes.

Full On

This is the normal operating mode for ESC. Whenever

the vehicle is started the system will be in this mode.

This mode should be used for most driving situations.

ESC should only be turned to “Partial Off” for specific

reasons as noted. Refer to “Partial Off” for additional

information.

145

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Partial Off

The “ESC OFF” button is located in the switch bank

above the climate control. To enter the “Partial Off”

mode, momentarily press the “ESC OFF” button and

the “ESC OFF” Indicator Light will illuminate. To turn

the ESC on again, momentarily press the “ESC OFF”

button and the “ESC OFF” Indicator Light will turn off.

This will restore the normal “ESC On” mode of opera-

tion.

(fig. 112)

NOTE: To improve the vehicle's traction when driving

with snow chains, or when starting off in deep snow,

sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the

“Partial Off” mode by momentarily pressing the “ESC

OFF” button. Once the situation requiring “Partial

Off” mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momen-

tarily pressing the “ESC OFF” button. This may be

done while the vehicle is in motion.

WARNING!

• When in “Partial Off ” mode, the TCS

funct

ionality of ESC (except for the lim-

ited slip feature described in theTCS section) has

been disabled and t he “ESC Off Indicator Light”

will be illuminated.When in “Partial Off ” mode,

the engine power reduction of TCS is disabled,

and the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the

ESC system is reduced.

• Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when

the ESC system is in the “Partial Off ” mode.

(fig. 112)

ESC OFF Button

146

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

ESC ACTIVATION/MALFUNCTION

INDICATOR LIGHT AND ESC OFF

INDICATOR LIGHT

The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator

Light” in the instrument cluster will come on

when the ignition switch is turned to the ON

position. It should go out with the engine

running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator

Light” comes on continuously with the engine running,

a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If

this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and

the vehicle has been driven several kilometers at

speeds greater than 48 km/h, see your authorized

dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diag-

nosed and corrected.

The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lo-

cated in the instrument cluster) star ts to flash as soon

as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes

active. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator

Light” also flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC

Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash

during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and

apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your

speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions.

NOTE:

• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”

and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momen-

tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.

• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system

will be ON even if it was turned off previously.

• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds

when it is active . This is normal; the sounds will stop

when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver

that caused the ESC activation.

The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is in Partial

OFF mode.

HILL START ASSIST (HSA)

The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when

starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will

maintain the level of brake pressure the driver applied

for a short period of time after the driver takes their

foot off of the brake pedal. If the driver does not apply

the throttle during this short period of time, the

system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will

roll down the hill. The system will release brake pres-

sure in proportion to the amount of throttle applied as

the vehicle starts to move in the intended direction of

travel.

147

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

HSA Activation Criteria

The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to

activate:

• Vehicle must be stopped.

• Vehicle must be on a 6% (approximate) grade or

greater hill.

• Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,

vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing

uphill is in REVERSE gear).

WARNING!

There may be situations on minor hills

with

a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a

trailer where the system will not activate and

slight rolling may occur, which could cause a

collision with another vehicle or object. Always

remember the driver is res ponsible for braking

the vehicle.

HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears when

the activation criteria have been met. The system will

not activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL or

PARK.

Towing With HSA

HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade

when pulling a trailer.

WARNING!

• If you use a trailer brake controller

wit

h your trailer, your trailer brakes may

be activated and deactivated with the brake

switch. If so, when the brake pedal is released,

there may not be enough brake pressure to hold

the vehicle and trailer on a hill and this could

cause a collision with another vehicle or object

behind you. In order to avoid rolling down the hill

while resuming acceleration, manually activate

the trailer brake prior to releasing the brake

pedal.Always remember the driver is responsible

for braking the vehicle.

• HSA is not a parking brake. If you stop the

vehicle on a hill without putting the transmission

in PARK and using the parking brake, it will roll

down the hill and could cause a collision with

another vehicle or object. Always remember to

use the parking brake while parking on a hill, and

that the driver is responsible for braking the

vehicle.

HSA Off

If you wish to turn off the HSA system, it can be done

using the Customer Programmable Features in the

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to

“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in

“Knowing your vehicle” for further information.

148

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

TRAILER SWAY CONTROL (TSC)

TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an exces-

sively swaying trailer. TSC activates automatically once

the excessively swaying trailer is recognized. When

TSC is functioning, the “ESC Activation/Malfunction

Indicator Light” will flash, the engine power will be

reduced, and you will feel the brake being applied to

individual wheels in an attempt to stop the trailer from

swaying.

NOTE: The TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in

the “Partial Off” mode.

WARNING!

• TSC cannot stop all trailers from

aying. Always use caution when tow-

ing a trailer and follow the tongue weight recom-

mendations.Refer to “TrailerTowing”in “Starting

and Driving” for further information.

• IfTSC activates while towing a trailer, stop the

vehicle at the nearest safe location and adjust

the trailer load to eliminate the trailer sway.

• Failure to follow these warnings can result in an

accident or ser ious personal injury.

ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM —

OBD II

Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard

diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors

the performance of the emissions, engine, and auto-

matic transmission control systems. When these sys-

tems are operating properly, your vehicle will provide

excellent performance and fuel economy, as well as

engine emissions well within current government regu-

lations.

If any of these systems require service , the OBD II

system will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light”

(MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes and other

information to assist your service technician in making

repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable

and not need towing, see your authorized dealer for

service as soon as possible.

• Prolonged driving with the MIL on

could cause further damage to the emis-

sion control system. It could also affect

fuel economy and driveability.The vehicle must be

serviced before any emissions tests can be per-

formed.

• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,

severe catalytic converter damage and power loss

will soon occur. Immediate service is required.

149

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

POWER STEERING

The standard power steering system will give you good

vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability

in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical

steering capability if power assist is lost.

If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it

will still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these

conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in

steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds

and during parking maneuvers.

NOTE:

• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering

wheel travel are considered normal and do not

indicate that there is a problem with the power

steering system.

• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power

steering pump may make noise for a short amount of

time. This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the

steering system. This noise should be considered

normal, and it does not in any way damage the

steering system.

Prolonged operation of the steering sys-

tem at the end of the steering wheel

travel will increase the steering fluid tem-

perature and it should be avoided when possible.

Damage to the power steering pump may occur.

POWER STEERING FLUID CHECK

Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined

service interval is not required. The fluid should only be

checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are

apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as an-

ticipated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an

authorized dealer.

150

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Do not use chemical flushes in your

power steering sys tem as the chemicals

can damage your power steering compo-

nents. Such damage is not covered by the New

Vehicle Limited Warranty.

WARNING!

Fluid level should be checked on a level

surfa

ce and with the engine off to pre-

vent injury from moving parts and to ensure

accurate fluid level reading. Do not overfill. Use

only manufacturer's recommended power steer-

ing fluid.

If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indi-

cated level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid

from all surfaces.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM

(TPMS)

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn

the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle

recommended cold placard pressure.

The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about

0.07 BAR for every 7°C. This means that when the

outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will

decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on

cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire

pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at

least three hours, or driven less than 1.6 km after a

three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure

must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure

molded into the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General

Information” in “Technical Specifications” for informa-

tion on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The

tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven.

This is normal and there should be no adjustment for

this increased pressure.

151

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if

the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning

limit for any reason, including low temperature effects

and natural pressure loss through the tire.

The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire

pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not

turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the

recommended cold placard pressure. Once the low

tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring Tell-

tale Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pres-

sure to the recommended cold placard pressure in

order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to

turn off.

NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may

need to be increased to an additional 0.3 BAR above

the recommended cold placard pressure in order to

turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.

The system will automatically update and the Tire

Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off once the

system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle

may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above

25 km/h in order for the TPMS to receive this informa-

tion.

• The TPMS has been optimized for the

original equipment tires and wheels.

TPMS pressures and warning have been

established for the tire size equipped on your

vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor

damage may result when using replacement

equipment that is not of the same size, type,

and/or style .Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor

damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may

cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) sensor to become inoperable.After using

an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended

that you take your vehicle to an authorized deal-

ership to have your sensor function checked.

• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,

always reinstall the valve stem cap.This will pre-

vent moisture and dirt from entering the valve

stem,which could damage theTire Pressure Moni-

toring Sensor.

152

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

NOTE:

• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care

and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire

failure or condition.

• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure

gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.

• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes

the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.

Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire

tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and

stopping ability.

• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-

nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain

correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure

gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the

level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure

Monitoring Telltale Light.

• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pres-

sure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire

pressure in the tire.

BASE SYSTEM

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wire-

less technology with wheel rim mounted electronic

sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors,

mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem,

transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module.

NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check

the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle

monthly and to maintain the proper pressure .

The TPMS consists of the following components:

• Receiver Module

• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors

• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light

Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure

Warnings

The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will

illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime

will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of

the four active road tires. Should this occur, you should

stop as soon as possible, check the inflation pressure of

each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the

vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value.

153

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may

need to be increased to an additional 0.3 BAR above

the recommended cold placard pressure in order to

turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.

Once the system receives the updated tire pressures,

the system will automatically update and the Tire

Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off. The

vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes

above 25 km/h in order for the TPMS to receive this

information.

Service TPMS Warning

When a system fault is detected, the Tire Pressure

Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75

seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will

also sound a chime. If the ignition switch is cycled, this

sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still

exists. The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will

turn off when the fault condition no longer exists. A

system fault can occur due to any of the following:

1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to

facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the

TPMS sensors.

2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting

that affects radio wave signals.

3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel

housings.

4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.

5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sen-

sors.

NOTE:

1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pres-

sure monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will

not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire.

2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road

tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure

warning limit, a chime will sound and the TPMS

Telltale Light will turn on upon the next ignition

switch cycle.

3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above

25 km/h, the TPMS Telltale Light will flash on and off

for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.

4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime

will sound and the TPMS Telltale Light will flash on

and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.

154

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and

reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact

spare, the TPMS will update automatically and the

TPMS Telltale Light will turn off, as long as no tire

pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in

any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may

need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above

25 km/h in order for the TPMS to receive this

information.

TPMS Deactivation And Reactivation

The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all four wheel

and tire assemblies (road tires) with wheel and tire

assemblies that do not have TPMS Sensors, such as

when installing winter wheel and tire assemblies on

your vehicle.

To deactivate the TPMS, first, replace all four wheel and

tire assemblies (road tires) with those not equipped

with TPM Sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for at least

20 minutes above 25 km/h. The TPMS will chime and

the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75

seconds and then remain on solid. Upon the next

ignition switch cycle, the TPMS will no longer chime or

turn on the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.

To reactivate the TPMS, first, replace all four wheel and

tire assemblies (road tires) with those equipped with

TPM Sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to 20

minutes above 25 km/h. The TPMS will chime and the

Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and

off for 75 seconds.

PREMIUM SYSTEM — (for versions/market s,

where provided)

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wire-

less technology with wheel rim mounted electronic

sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors,

mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem,

transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module.

NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check

the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle

monthly and to maintain the proper pressure .

The TPMS consists of the following components:

• Receiver module

• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors

• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages,

which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information

Center (EVIC)

• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light

155

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure

Warnings

The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will

illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime

will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of

the four active road tires. In addition, the Electronic

Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will display a

graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with

the low tire pressure values in a different color. An

"Inflate Tire to XXX" message will also be displayed.

Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible

and inflate the tires with low pressure (those displayed

in a different color in the EVIC graphic) to the vehicle’s

recommended cold placard pressure value as shown in

the "Inflate Tire to XXX" message.

NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may

need to be increased to an additional 0.3 BAR above

the recommended cold placard pressure in order to

turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.

Once the system receives the updated tire pressures,

the system will automatically update, the graphic dis-

play in the EVIC will return to the original color, and

the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off.

The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes

above 25 km/h in order for the TPMS to receive this

information.

ServiceTPMS Warning

When a system fault is detected, the Tire Pressure

Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75

seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will

also sound a chime. In addition, the EVIC will display a

"SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for a minimum of

five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the

pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being

received.

If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,

providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault

no longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale

Light will no longer flash, and the "SERVICE TPM

SYSTEM" message will no longer display, and a pressure

value will display in place of the dashes. A system fault

can occur due to any of the following:

1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to

facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the

TPMS sensors.

2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting

that affects radio wave signals.

3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel

housings.

4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.

Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.

156

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

The EVIC will also display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM"

message for a minimum of five seconds when a system

fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is

detected. In this case, the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM"

message is then followed with a graphic display with

pressure values still shown. This indicates that the

pressure values are still being received from the TPM

sensors but they may not be located in the correct

vehicle position. The system still needs to be serviced

as long as the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message is

displayed.

NOTE:

1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pres-

sure monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will

not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire.

2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road

tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure

warning limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle,

the TPMS Telltale Light will remain on and a chime

will sound. In addition, the graphic in the EVIC will

still display a different color pressure value. An

"Inflate Tire to XXX" message will also be displayed.

3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above

25 km/h, the TPMS Telltale Light will flash on and off

for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In addition,

the EVIC will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM"

message for a minimum of five seconds and then

display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value .

4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime

will sound, the TPMS Telltale Light will flash on and

off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the

EVIC will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" mes-

sage for a minimum of five seconds and then display

dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.

5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and

reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact

spare, the TPMS will update automatically. In addi-

tion, the TPMS Telltale Light will turn off and the

graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure value

instead of dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is

below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the

four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be

driven for up to 20 minutes above 25 km/h in order

for the TPMS to receive this information.

157

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

TPMS Deactivation And Reactivation

The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all four wheel

and tire assemblies (road tires) with wheel and tire

assemblies that do not have TPMS Sensors, such as

when installing winter wheel and tire assemblies on

your vehicle.

To deactivate the TPMS, first, replace all four wheel and

tire assemblies (road tires) with those not equipped

with TPM Sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for 20

minutes above 25 km/h. The TPMS will chime and the

Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and

off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In addition,

the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will

display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” text message, and

the graphic will display “- -“ in place of four tire

pressure values. Upon the next ignition switch cycle,

the TPMS will no longer chime or turn on the Tire

Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light, or display the text

message in the EVIC. However, the graphic will still

display “- -.“

To reactivate the TPMS, first, replace all four wheel and

tire assemblies (road tires) with those equipped with

TPM Sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to 20

minutes above 25 km/h. The TPMS will chime, the Tire

Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off

for 75 seconds, the EVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM

SYSTEM” text message, and the graphic will display tire

pressure values to show that the TPMS is receiving

sensor data.

GENERAL INFORMATION

Transmitter and receivers operate on a carrier fre-

quency of 433.92 MHz as required by EEC regulations.

These devices must be certified to conform to specific

regulations in each individual country. Two sets of

regulations are involved: ETS (European Telecommuni-

cation Standard) 300–220, which most countries use,

and German BZT federal regulation 225Z125, which is

based on ETC 300–220 but has additional unique re-

quirements. Other defined requirements are noted in

ANNEX VI of COMMISSION DIRECTIVE 95/56/EC.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

• This device may not cause harmful interference.

• This device must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause undesired op-

eration.

158

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

REAR PARK ASSIST (for

versions/markets, where

provided)

The Rear Park Assist system provides visual and audible

indications of the distance between the rear fascia and

a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. during a

parking maneuver. Refer to “Park Assist System Usage

Precautions” for limitations of this system and recom-

mendations.

Park Assist will retain the last system state (enabled or

disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition

is changed to the ON/RUN position.

Park Assist can be active only when the shift lever is in

REVERSE. If Park Assist is enabled at this shift lever

position, the system will remain active until the vehicle

speed is increased to approximately 11 km/h or above.

The system will become active again if the vehicle

speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately

9 km/h.

PARK ASSIST SENSORS

The four Park Assist sensors, located in the rear

fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that

is within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can

detect obstacles from approximately 30 cm up to 200

cm from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direc-

tion, depending on the location, type and orientation

of the obstacle.

PARK ASSIST WARNING DISPLAY

The Park Assist Warning screen will only be displayed if

Sound and Display is selected from the Uconnect®

System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” for further

information.

The Park Assist Warning screen is located within the

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). It pro-

vides visual warnings to indicate the distance between

the rear fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Re-

fer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/

Settings” for further information.

159

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

PARK ASSIST DISPLAY

When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display

will turn ON indicating the system status.

(fig. 113)

(fig. 114)

The system will indicate a detected obstacle by show-

ing three solid arcs and will produce a one-half second

tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the object, the

EVIC display will show fewer arcs and the sound tone

will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.

(fig. 115)

(fig. 116) (fig. 117)

(fig. 113)

Park Assist Ready

(fig. 114)

Park Assist System Off

160

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

(fig. 115)

Slow Tone

(fig. 116)

FastTone

(fig. 117)

Continuous Tone

161

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning

display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous

tone. The following chart shows the warning alert

operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:

WARNING ALERTS

Rear Distance

(cm)

Greater than

200 cm

200-100 cm 100-65 cm 65-30 cm Less than

30 cm

Audible Alert

Chime

None Single 1/2-

Second Tone

Slow Fast Continuous

Arcs None 3 Solid

(Continuous)

3 Slow

Flashing

2 Slow

Flashing

1 Slow

Flashing

ENABLING AND DISABLING PARK ASSIST

Park Assist can be enabled and disabled using the

Uconnect® System. The available choices are: Off,

Sound Only, or Sound and Display. Refer to

“Uconnect® Settings” for further information.

When the Park Assist button is pushed to disable the

system, the EVIC will display the “PARK ASSIST SYS-

TEM OFF” message for approximately five seconds.

Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC)” for fur ther information. When the shift lever is

moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled, the

EVIC will display the “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF”

message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.

SERVICE THE REAR PARK ASSIST SYSTEM

During vehicle start up, when the Rear Park Assist

system has detected a fault condition, the Electronic

Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will actuate a single

chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will display the

“CLEAN PARK ASSIST”, “SERVICE PARK ASSIST” or

“SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message . Refer to

“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” for

further information. When the shift lever is moved to

REVERSE and the system has detected a fault condi-

tion, the EVIC will display the “CLEAN PARK ASSIST”,

“SERVICE PARK ASSIST” or “SERVICE PARK ASSIST

SYSTEM” message for as long as the vehicle is in

REVERSE. Under this condition, Park Assist will not

operate.

162

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

If “CLEAN PARK ASSIST” appears in the Electronic

Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) make sure the

outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/

bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or

other obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the

message continues to appear see an authorized dealer.

If “SERVICE PARK ASSIST” or “SERVICE PARK ASSIST

SYSTEM” appears in the EVIC, see your authorized

dealer.

CLEANING THE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM

Clean the sensors with water, car wash soap and a soft

cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not scratch

or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the

sensors.

PARK ASSIST SYSTEM USAGE

PRECAUTIONS

NOTE:

• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice,

mud, dirt and debris to keep the Park Assist system

operating properly.

• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations

could affect the performance of Park Assist.

• When you turn Park Assist off, the EVIC will display

“PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF.” Furthermore, once

you turn Park Assist of f, it remains off until you turn

it on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.

• When you move the shif t lever to the REVERSE

position and Park Assist is turned off, the EVIC will

display the “PARK A SSIST SYSTEM OFF” message

for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.

• Clean the Park Assist sensors regularly, taking care

not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must

not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or

debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not

working properly. The Park Assist system might not

detect an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it

could provide a false indication that an obstacle is

behind the fascia/bumper.

• Ensure that the Park Assist system is turned OFF if

objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc.,

are placed within 30 cm from the rear fascia/bumper

while driving the vehicle . Failure to do so can result in

the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor

problem, causing the “SERVICE PARK ASSIST” mes-

sage to be displayed in the EVIC.

163

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

• ParkAssist is only a parking aid and it is

unable to recognize every obstacle, in-

cluding small obs tacles. Parking curbs

might be temporarily detected or not detected at

all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors

will not be detected when they are in close prox-

imity.

• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using

ParkAssist in order to be able to stop in time when

an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that

the driver looks over his/her shoulder when using

Park Assist.

WARNING!

• Drivers must be careful when backing

up e

ven when using Park Assist. Always

check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind

you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, ani-

mals, other vehicles,obstructions,and blind spots

before backing up.You are res ponsible for safety

and must continue to pay attention to your sur-

roundings. Failure to do so can result in serious

injury or death.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Before using Park Assist, it is strongly recom-

mended that the ball mount and hitch ball as-

sembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the

vehicle is not used for towing.Failure to do so can

result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles

because the hitch ball will be much closer to the

obstacle than the rear fascia when the loud-

speaker sounds the continuous tone. Also, the

sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball

assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving

a false indication that an obstacle is behind the

vehicle.

164

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP

CAMERA (for versions/markets,

where provided)

Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView®

Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see an

on-screen image of the rear surroundings of your

vehicle whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE.

The ParkView® camera is located on the rear of the

vehicle above the rear License plate. The image will be

displayed in the touchscreen display along with a cau-

tion note to “check entire surroundings” across the top

of the screen. After five seconds this note will disap-

pear.

When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear

camera mode is exited and the last selected touch-

screen appears again.

If your vehicle is equipped with the Camera Delay

feature and it is turned ON, the rear camera image will

be displayed for up to 10 seconds when the vehicle is

shifted out of REVERSE unless the forward vehicle

speed exceeds 13 km/h, the transmission is shifted into

"PARK" or the vehicle's ignition is cycled to the OFF

position.

Static grid lines will illustrate the width of the vehicle

while a dashed center-line will indicate the center of

the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a

hitch/receiver. The static grid lines will show separate

zones that will help indicate the distance to the rear of

the vehicle.

NOTE: The ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera has

programmable modes of operation that may be se-

lected through the Uconnect® System. Refer to

“Uconnect® Settings” in “Knowing Your Vehicle” for

further information.

Different colored zones indicate the dist ance to the

rear of the vehicle.

The following table shows the approximate distances

for each zone:

Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle

Red 0-30cm

Yellow 30 cm-1m

Green 1 m or greater

165

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

WARNING!

Drivers must be careful when backing up

even

when using the ParkView® Rear

Back Up Camera.Always check carefully behind

your vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestri-

ans,animals,other vehicles, obs tructions,or blind

spots before backing up.You are responsible for

the safety of your surroundings and must con-

tinue to pay attention while backing up. Failure

to do so can result in serious injury or death.

• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView®

should only be used as a parking aid.The

ParkView® camera is unable to view ev-

ery obstacle or object in your drive path.

• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be

driven slowly when using ParkView® to be able to

stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recom-

mended that the driver look frequently over his/

her shoulder when using ParkView®.

NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance

builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with

water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.

NAVIGATION SYSTEM (for

versions/markets, where

provided)

Refer to your Uconnect® User Manual.

166

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

SOUND SYSTEMS

Refer to your Uconnect® User Manual.

STEERING WHEEL AUDIO

CONTROLS

The remote sound system controls are located on the

rear surface of the steering wheel. The left and right-

hand controls are rocker-type switches with a pushbut-

ton in the center of each switch. Reach behind the

steering wheel to access the switches.

(fig. 118)

RIGHT-HAND SWITCH FUNCTIONS

• Push the top of the switch to increase the volume .

• Push the bottom of the switch to decrease the

volume.

• Push the button in the center of the switch to change

modes (i.e., AM, FM, etc.).

(fig. 118)

Remote Sound Controls (Back View Of Steering Wheel)

167

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

LEFT-HAND SWITCH FUNCTIONS FOR

RADIO OPERATION

• Push the top of the switch to SEEK the next listen-

able station up from the current setting.

• Push the bottom of the switch to SEEK the next

listenable station down from the current setting.

• Push the button in the center of the switch to tune to

the next preset that you have programmed.

LEFT-HAND SWITCH FUNCTIONS FOR

MEDIA (I.E., CD) OPERATION

• Push the top of the switch once to listen to the next

track.

• Push the bottom of the switch once, either to listen

to the beginning of the current track or to listen to

the beginning of the previous track, if it is within eight

seconds after the current track begins to play.

• Pushing the switch up will request the system to

start playing the next track in the current play se-

quence with wrap around to the beginning of the play

sequence. If you are currently playing track 5, push

the switch up twice to begin playing track 7 (if

available).

• The button in the center of the left-hand switch has

no function in this mode.

UCONNECT® MULTIMEDIA VIDEO

ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (VES™)

(for versions/markets, where

provided)

Your rear seat Video Entertainment System (VES™) is

designed to give your family years of enjoyment. You

can play your favorite CDs or DVDs, listen to audio

over the wireless headphones, or plug and play a variety

of standard video games or audio devices. Please re-

view this Owner's Manual to become familiar with its

features and operation.

Getting Started

• Screen located in the overhead console:

Unfold

the overhead LCD screen by pushing the button on

the overhead console behind the screen.

(fig. 119)

• With the ignition switch in the ON or ACC position,

turn the radio on by pushing the ON/OFF Volume

Control knob.

• When the Video Screen is open and a DVD is

inserted into the radio, the screen turns on auto-

matically, the headphone transmitters turn on and

playback begins.

168

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Video Screen

NOTE: Typically there are two different ways to

operate the features of the Video Entertainment Sys-

tem (VES™).

• The Remote Control

• The Touchscreen Radio (for versions/markets,

where provided)

Play Video Games

Connect the video game console to the Auxiliary RCA

input jacks located on the back of the center console.

Audio/Video RCA Jacks (AUX Jacks)

on the rear of the center console

enable the monitor to display video

directly from a video camera, con-

nect video games for display on the

screen, or play music directly from an

MP3 player.

1. Video in (yellow)

2. Left audio in (white)

3. Right audio in (red)

When connecting an external source to the AUX

input, be sure to follow the standard color coding for

the VES™ jacks:

NOTE: Certain high-end video games, such as Playsta-

tion3 and XBox360 will exceed the power limit of the

vehicle's Power Inverter. Refer to the Power Inverter

section in your vehicle's Owner's Manual for more

information.

Ensure the remote control channel selector switch and

Headphone switch (IR channel) are the same number.

(fig. 119)

Overhead Video Screen

169

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

UsingThe Remote Control

1. Push the MODE button on the Remote Control.

2. While looking at the video screen, highlight AUX 1,

by either pushing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or

by repeatedly pushing the MODE button, then push

ENTER on the Remote Control.

UsingThe Touchscreen Radio Controls

1. Press the “Player” button on the touchscreen.

2. Press the “Rear Entertainment” button on the

touchscreen to display the Rear Entertainment

Controls.

3. If the Rear Entertainment is turned off, press the

“Power” button on the touchscreen.

4. Press the “1” or “2” button on the touchscreen for

the channel desired and press the Source button on

the touchscreen to select the desired mode.

Listen To An Audio Source On Channel 2

While A Video Is Playing On Channel 1

Ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is

on Channel 2.

UsingThe Remote Control

1. Push the MODE button on the Remote Control and

the Mode Select Screen will display, unless a video is

playing then only a small banner will appear on the

bottom of the screen.

2. While looking at the video screen, either press

Up/Down/Left/Right on the Remote Control to

highlight the desired audio source or repeatedly

push the MODE button on the remote until the

desired audio source appears on the screen.

UsingThe Touchscreen Radio Controls

1. Press the “Player” button on the touchscreen.

2. Press the “Rear Entertainment” button on the

touchscreen to display the Rear Entertainment

Controls.

3. If the Rear Entertainment is turned off, press the

“Power” button on the touchscreen.

4. Press the “1” or “2” button on the touchscreen for

the channel desired then press the SOURCE button

on the touchscreen to select the desired mode.

170

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Important Notes For Single Video Screen

System

• VES™ is able to transmit two channels of stereo

audio simultaneously.

• In split screen mode the left side equates to Channel

1 and right side equates to Channel 2.

• If a video source is selected on Channel 1, then

Channel 2 is for audio only.

• When selecting a video source on Channel 1, the

video will display on the screen and the audio will be

heard on Channel 1 in the headphones.

• Audio can be heard through the headphones even

when the Video Screen is closed.

Play A DVD Using The Touchscreen Radio

1. Insert the DVD with the label facing up. The radio

automatically selects the appropriate mode after

the disc is recognized and displays the menu screen

or starts playing the first track.

UsingThe Remote Control

1. Push the MODE button on the Remote Control.

2. While looking at the Video Screen, highlight DISC

by either pushing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or

by repeatedly pushing the MODE button, then push

ENTER.

NOTE:

• The VES™ system will retain the last setting when

turned off.

• Viewing a DVD on the Touchscreen radio screen is

not available in some regions or locations, the vehicle

must be stopped, and the shift lever must be in the

PARK position for vehicles with automatic transmis-

sion. In vehicles with manual transmission the park-

ing brake must be engaged even when the vehicle is

parked. Refer to local and state laws.

171

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

UsingThe Touchscreen Radio Controls

1. Press the “Player” button on the touchscreen.

2. Press the “Rear Entertainment” button on the

touchscreen to display the Rear Entertainment

Controls.

3. If the Rear Entertainment is turned off, press the

“Power” button on the touchscreen.

4. Press the “1” or “2” Source button on the touch-

screen based on the channel you want to change and

press the “Disc” button on the touchscreen. To exit

Press the “X” at the top right of the screen.

NOTE: Pressing the screen on a Touchscreen radio

while a DVD is playing full screen brings up basic

control functions for DVD play such as DVD Menu,

Seek Up/Down, Navigating through the menus, Exit.

The basic control functions screen will time out and

disappear from the screen.

Remote Control Operation

Quick Reference Chart

This chart provides a quick reference of the remote

control button functions for the different radio modes

and menu screens.

NOTE:

• Ensure the remote control channel/screen selector

switch is set to the screen or channel to be con-

trolled.

• Ensure the headphone channel selector switch is set

to the screen or channel to be listened to.

172

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Remote Con-

trol Button

Standard Screens Menu Screens

AM/FM/

MW/LW

DISC

AUX/AUX1/AUX2

Mode

Select

Screen

Setup

P ower

Screen ON/OFF

Light

Remote Backlight ON/OFF

Up Arrow Next

Seek Up*

Track

Audio: Next Track

Not

Available

Selection

Video Play: Next

Chapter

Video Menu: Selection

Down Arrow

Seek Down*

Track

Audio: Previous Track

Not

Available

Selection

Down

Selection

Down

Video Play: Previous

Chapter

Video Menu: Selection

Down

Right Arrow FF

Tune Up*

Fast

Forward

Audio: Fast Forward

Not

Available

Selection

Right

Selection

Right

Video Play: Fast Forward

Video Menu: Selection

Right

Left Arrow RW

Tune Down*

Fast

Rewind

Audio: Fast Rewind

Not

Available

Selection

Left

Selection

Left

Video Play: Fast Rewind

Video Menu: Selection

Left

173

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Remote Con-

trol Button

Standard Screens Menu Screens

AM/FM/

MW/LW

DISC

AUX/AUX1/AUX2

Mode

Select

Screen

Setup

Enter

Show

Numeric

Entry Menu*

Show

Numeric

Entry

Audio: Show Numeric

Entry

Not

Available

Activate

Selected

Item

Not

Available

Video Play: Not Available

Video Menu: Activate

Selected Item

Back

Not Available

Not

Available

Audio: Not Available

Not

Available

Return

to Std

Screen

Return to

Std

Screen

Video Play: Not Available

Video Menu: Previous

Setup

Not Available

Not

Available

Audio: Not Available

Audio:Not

Available

Not

Available

Return to

Std

Screen

Video Play: Show/Hide

Settings

Video:

Show/Hide

Display

Settings

Not Available

Show Disc

Options

Audio: Disc Options

Not

Available

Not

Available

Not

Available

Video Play: Show Disc

174

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Remote Con-

trol Button

Standard Screens Menu Screens

AM/FM/

MW/LW

DISC

AUX/AUX1/AUX2

Mode

Select

Screen

Setup

Play/Pause

Not Available

Pause if

playing,

else re-

sume play

Audio: Pause if playing/

resume

Not

Available

Not

Available

Not

Available

Video Play: Pause if

playing/resume

Video Menu: Activate

selected item

Stop

Not Available Stop Stop

Not

Available

Not

Available

Not

Available

Mute

Mute/Unmute Headphones

Slow

Not Available

Not

Available

Audio: Not Available

Not

Available

Not

Available

Not

Available

Video Play: Slow play/

resume

Video Menu: Not Available

Status

Not Available

Not

Available

Audio: Not Available

Audio:

Not

Available

Not

Available

Not

Available

Video Play: Show Mode

Info

Video:

Show

Mode Info

Mode

Advance

to Next

Mode

Show

Mode

Select

Item

175

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Remote Con-

trol Button

Standard Screens Menu Screens

AM/FM/

MW/LW

DISC

AUX/AUX1/AUX2

Mode

Select

Screen

Setup

Prog Up

Preset*

Not

Available

Next Disc (if player is

changer)

Not

Available

Not

Available

Not

Available

Prog Down

Preset*

Not

Available

Previous Disc (if player is

changer)

Not

Available

Not

Available

Not

Available

Ensure remote control selector switch is set to Screen

or Channel to be controlled: 1 OR 2. Ensure head-

phone selector switch is set to Screen or Channel to be

listened to: 1 OR 2. *No action when mode is shared

with cabin speakers.

(fig. 120)

1. Power – Turns the screen and wireless headphone

transmitter for the selected Channel on or off. To

hear audio while the screen is closed, press the

Power button to turn the headphone transmitter

on.

2. Channel Selector Indicators – When a button is

pressed, the currently affected channel or channel

button is illuminated momentarily.

3. Light – Turns the remote control backlighting on or

off. The remote backlighting turns off automatically

after five seconds.

4. Channel/Screen Selector Switch - Indicates which

channel is being controlled by the remote control.

When the selector switch is in the Channel 1

position, the remote controls the functionality of

headphone Channel 1. When the selector switch is

in the Channel 2 position, the remote controls the

functionality of headphone Channel 2.

(fig. 120)

Remote Control

176

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

5. ▸▸ – In radio modes, press to seek the next tunable

station. In disc modes, press and hold to fast for-

ward through the current audio track or video

chapter. In menu modes use to navigate in the menu.

6. ▾ / Prev – In radio modes, press to select to the

previous station. In disc modes, press to advance to

the start of the current or previous audio track or

video chapter. In menu modes, use to navigate in the

menu.

7. MENU – Press to return to the main menu of a DVD

disc, or to select playback modes (RANDOM for a

CD).

8. ▸ /

(Play/Pause) – Begin/resume or pause disc play.

9. ▪ (Stop) – Stops disc play

10. PROG Up/Down – When listening to a radio

mode, pressing PROG Up selects the next preset

and pressing PROG Down selects the previous

preset stored in the radio. When listening to com-

pressed audio on a data disc, PROG Up selects the

next directory and PROG Down selects the pre-

vious directory. When listening to a disc in a radio

with a multiple-disc changer, PROG Up selects the

next disc and PROG Down selects the previous

disc.

11. MUTE – Press to mute the headphone audio out-

put for the selected channel.

12. SLOW – Press to slow playback of a DVD disc.

Press play (▸) to resume normal play.

13. STATUS – Press to display the current status while

in a video mode display.

14. MODE – Press to change the mode of the selected

channel. See the Mode Selection section of this

manual for details on changing modes.

15. SETUP – When in a video mode, press the SETUP

button to access the display settings (see the

display settings section) to access the DVD setup

menu, select the menu button on the radio. When

a disc is loaded in the DVD player (for versions/

markets, where provided) and the VES™ mode is

selected and the disc is stopped, press the SETUP

button to access the DVD Setup menu. (see the

DVD Setup Menu of this manual.)

16. BACK – When navigating in menu mode, press to

return to the previous screen. When navigating a

DVDs disc menu, the operation depends on the

disc’s contents.

17. ◂◂ – In radio modes, press to seek to the previous

tunable station. In disc modes, press and hold to

fast rewind through the current audio track or

video chapter. In menu modes use to navigate in

the menu.

177

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

18. ENTER – Press to select the highlighted option in

a menu.

19. ▴ / NEXT – In radio modes, press to select to the

next station. In disc modes, press to advance to

the next audio track or video chapter. In menu

modes, use to navigate in the menu.

Remote Control Storage

The video screen(s) come with a built in storage

compartment for the remote control which is acces-

sible when the screen is opened. To remove the re-

mote, use your index finger to pull and rotate the

remote towards you. Do not try to pull the remote

straight down as it will be very difficult to remove. To

return the remote back into its storage area, insert one

long edge of the remote into the two retaining clips

first, and then rotate the remote back up into the other

two retaining clips until it snaps back into position.

(fig. 121)

LockingThe Remote Control

All remote control functionality can be disabled as a

parental control feature.

• To disable the Remote Control from making any

changes, press the Video Lock button and follow the

radio’s instructions (select menu, rear ves, lock). If

the vehicle is not equipped with a DVD player, follow

the radio’s instructions to turn Video Lock on. The

radio and the video screen(s) indicate when Video

Lock is active.

• Pressing the Video Lock again or turning the ignition

OFF turns Video Lock OFF and allows remote con-

trol operation of the VES™.

(fig. 121)

The Remote Control Storage

178

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

ReplacingThe Remote Control Batteries

The remote control requires two AAA batteries for

operation. To replace the batteries:

• Locate the battery compartment on the back of the

remote, then slide the battery cover downward.

• Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them

according to the polarity diagram shown.

• Replace the battery compartment cover.

Headphones Operation

The headphones receive two separate channels of

audio using an infrared transmitter from the video

screen.

If no audio is heard after increasing the volume control,

verify that the screen is turned on and in the down

position and that the channel is not muted and the

headphone channel selector switch is on the desired

channel. If audio is still not heard, check that fully

charged batteries are installed in the headphones.

(fig. 122)

Controls

The headphone power indicator and controls are lo-

cated on the right ear cup.

NOTE: The rear video system must be turned on

before sound can be heard from the headphones. To

conserve battery life, the headphones will automati-

cally turn of f approximately three minutes after the

rear video system is turned off.

(fig. 122)

Headphone Operation

1 — Volume Control

2 — Power Button

3 — Channel Selection Switch

4 — Power Indicator

179

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Changing The Audio Mode For Headphones

1. Ensure the Remote Control channel/screen selec-

tor switch is in the same position as the headphone

selector switch.

NOTE:

• When both switches are on Channel 1, the Remote

is controlling Channel 1 and the headphones are

tuned to the audio of the VES™ Channel 1.

• When both switches are on Channel 2, the Remote

is controlling Channel 2 and the headphones are

tuned to the audio of the VES™ Channel 2.

2. Push the MODE button on the remote control.

3. If the video screen is displaying a video source (such

as a DVD Video), pushing STATUS shows the status

on a popup banner at the bottom of the screen.

Pushing the MODE button will advance to the next

mode. When the mode is in an audio only source

(such as FM), the Mode Selection menu appears on

screen.

4. When the Mode Selection menu appears on screen,

use the cursor buttons on the remote control to

navigate to the available modes and push the EN-

TER button to select the new mode.

5. To cancel out of the Mode Selection menu, push the

BACK button on the remote control.

ReplacingThe Headphone Batteries

Each set of headphones requires two AAA batteries for

operation. To replace the batteries:

• Locate the battery compartment on the left ear cup

of the headphones, and then slide the battery cover

downward.

• Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them

according to the polarity diagram shown.

• Replace the battery compartment cover.

Unwired® Stereo Headphone Lifetime

Limited Warranty

Who Does This Warranty Cover? This warranty

covers the initial user or purchaser ("you" or "your") of

this particular Unwired Technology LLC ("Unwired")

wireless headphone ("Product"). The warranty is not

transferable.

How Long Does The Coverage Last? This war-

ranty lasts as long as you own the Product.

What DoesThisWarranty Cover? Except as speci-

fied below, this warranty covers any Product that in

normal use is defective in workmanship or materials.

180

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

What Does This Warranty Not Cover? This war-

ranty does not cover any damage or defect that results

from misuse, abuse or modification of the Product

other than by Unwired. Foam earpieces, which will

wear over time through normal use, are specifically not

covered (replacement foam is available for a nominal

charge). UNWIRED TECHNOLOGY IS NOT LIABLE

FOR ANY INJURIES OR DAMAGES TO PERSONS

OR PROPERTY RESULTING FROM THE USE OF, OR

ANY FAILURE OR DEFECT IN, THE PRODUCT,

NOR IS UNWIRED LIABLE FOR ANY GENERAL,

SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, CON-

SEQUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY, PUNITIVE OR OTHER

DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR NATURE WHATSO-

EVER. Some states and jurisdictions may not allow the

exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential

damages, so the above limitation may not apply to you.

This warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may

also have other rights, which vary from jurisdiction to

jurisdiction.

WhatWill Unwired® Do? Unwired®, at its option,

will repair or replace any defective Product. Unwired®

reserves the right to replace any discontinued Product

with a comparable model. THIS WARRANTY IS THE

SOLE WARRANTY FOR THIS PRODUCT, SETS

FORTH YOUR EXCLUSIVE REMEDY REGARDING

DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS, AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL

OTHER WARRANTIES (EXPRESS OR IMPLIED), IN-

CLUDING ANY WARRANTY OR MERCHANTABIL-

ITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

Displaying Video

The video screen has two different operating modes, a

video mode (when displaying video such as DVD video,

Aux video, etc.) and an information mode as shown in

Figure 123. Because the VES™ is a dual channel system,

Information Mode is displayed in a split screen format.

When in Information Mode, the left side of the screen

is referred to as Channel 1 and the right side of the

screen is referred to as Channel 2.

181

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Only Channel 1 displays video images. When in video

mode the image is displayed on the full screen, however

Channel 2’s functionality is still available. A popup

banner at the bottom of the screen is displayed mo-

mentarily over the video image. While in video mode

and Channel 2 is selected on the remote control

selector switch, the first remote control key press will

activate the popup banner indicating Channel 2’s sta-

tus. While the banner is still visible, any subsequent

remote control key press for Channel 2 shall initiate

the requested remote control command.

(fig. 123)

In a two-screen system, the video for Channel 1 is

displayed on the first rear seat screen and the video for

Channel 2 is displayed on the second rear seat screen.

Information Mode is displayed in split screen, the left

side of the screen (Channel 1) shows the status/mode

of the first rear seat screen and the right side of the

screen (Channel 2) shows the status/mode of the

second rear seat screen.

When Channel 1 is in a video mode, the image is

displayed on the first rear seat screen as a full screen

image. A popup banner at the bottom of the screen is

displayed momentarily over the video image showing

any change in status of Channel 2.

When Channel 2 is in video mode, the image is dis-

played on the second rear seat screen as a full screen

image. A popup banner at the bottom of the screen is

displayed momentarily over the video image showing

any change in status of Channel 1.

(fig. 123)

Popup Banner

182

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

System Information

Information Mode Display

When information mode is active, the current mode

setting for both audio channels is displayed. In addition

to the items called out by number, the remaining

information displays the current status of the source

(such as station frequency, name, preset or track num-

ber, song title, artist name, album name, etc.).

• Channel 1 Mode – Displays the current source for

Channel 1.

• Channel 1 Audio Only/Mute — Audio: The audio

only icon is not used on Channel 1, in a single screen

system. Mute: when the Mute icon is displayed, the

audio for Channel 1 has been muted using the re-

mote control’s MUTE button.

• Channel 2 Audio Only/Mute — Audio: Only in a

single screen system: The audio only icon is displayed

on Channel 2 when Channel 1 is in a video mode.

Mute: when the Mute icon is displayed, the audio for

Channel 2 has been muted using the remote con-

trol’s MUTE button.

• Channel 2 Mode — Displays the current source for

Channel 2.

• Channel 2 ENTER Button Action — When the

ENTER button on the remote control is pressed

with the "INPUT FILE #" button visible on the

screen, the screen shows a numeric entry keypad

which allows you to enter a specific track number on

data discs and HDD (see Numeric Keypad Menu

section of this manual). Also, Enter Button Action –

“INPUT TRK #” to enter a specific track number on

audio discs.

• Remote Locked Out — When the icon is displayed,

the remote control functions are disabled.

• Clock — Displays the time.

• Channel 1 Shared Status — When the icon is dis-

played, the audio for Channel 1 is also shared with

the radio and playing through the cabin speakers.

183

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Numeric Keypad Menu

(fig. 124)

When the display for either Channel 1 or Channel 2

shows DIRECT TUNE, pushing the remote control’s

ENTER button activates a numeric keypad menu. This

screen makes it easy to enter a specific tuner frequency

or track number. To enter the desired digit:

1. Push the remote control’s navigation buttons (▴, ▾,

▸, ◂) to navigate to the desired digit.

2. When the digit is highlighted, push the remote

control’s ENTER button to select the digit. Repeat

these steps until all digits are entered.

3. To delete the last digit, navigate to the Del button

and push the remote control’s ENTER button.

4. After all of the digits are entered, navigate to the Go

button and push the remote control’s ENTER but-

ton.

Disc Menu

When listening to a CD Audio or CD Data disc,

pushing the remote control’s MENU button displays a

list of all commands which control playback of the disc.

Using the options you can activate or cancel Random

play.

Options Menu

When watching a video source (DVD Video with the

disc in Play mode , Aux Video, etc.), pressing the “Op-

tions” button on the touchscreen activates the Op-

tions Settings menu. From this menu you can adjust

Audio, Subtitles, Angle and Title.

Display Settings

When watching a video source (DVD Video with the

disc in Play mode, Aux Video, etc.), pushing the remote

control’s SETUP button activates the Display Settings

menu. These settings control the appearance of the

video on the screen. The factory default settings are

already set for optimum viewing, so there is no need to

change these settings under normal circumstances.

(fig. 124)

Numeric Keypad Menu

184

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

To change the settings, push the remote control’s

navigation buttons to select an item, then push the

remote control’s navigation buttons to change the

value for the currently selected item. To reset all values

back to the original settings, select the Default Settings

menu option and push the remote control’s ENTER

button.

(fig. 125)

Listening To Audio With The Screen Closed

To listen to only audio portion of the channel with the

screen closed:

• Set the audio to the desired source and channel.

• Close the video screen.

• To change the current audio mode, push the remote

control’s MODE button. This will automatically se-

lect the next available audio mode without using the

MODE/SOURCE Select menu.

If the screen is closed and there is no audio heard,

verify that the headphones are turned on (the ON

indicator is illuminated) and the headphone selector

switch is on the desired channel. If the headphones are

turned on, push the remote control’s power button to

turn audio on. If audio is still not heard, check that fully

charged batteries are installed in the headphones.

Disc Formats

The DVD player is capable of playing the following

types of discs (8 cm or 12 cm diameter):

• DVD-Video discs (MPEG-2 video compression) (see

notes about DVD Region Codes)

• Audio Compact Discs (CDs)

• CD Data discs with MP3 and WMA compressed

audio format files

• Video CDs (MPEG-1 video compression)

(fig. 125)

Display Settings Menu

185

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

DVD Region Codes

The DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by

geographic region. These region codes must match in

order for the disc to play. If the region code for the

DVD disc does not match the region code for the

player, the disc will stop playing and a warning will be

displayed.

DVD Audio Support

When a DVD-Audio disc is inserted in the DVD player,

the DVD-Audio title on the disc is played by default

(most DVD-Audio discs also have a Video title, but the

Video title is ignored). All multi-channel program ma-

terial is automatically mixed down to two channels,

which may result in a lowered apparent volume level. If

you increase the volume level to account for this

change in level, remember to lower the volume before

changing the disc or to another mode.

Recorded Discs

The DVD player will play CD-R and CD-RW discs

recorded in CD-Audio or Video-CD format, or as a

CD-ROM containing MP3 or WMA files. The player

will also play DVD-Video content recorded to a

DVD-R, DVD-RW and DVD-ROM discs.

If you record a disc using a personal computer, there

may be cases where the DVD player may not be able to

play some or the entire disc, even if it is recorded in a

compatible format and is playable on other players. To

help avoid playback problems, use the following guide-

lines when recording discs.

• Open sessions are ignored. Only sessions that are

closed are playable.

• For multi-session CDs that contain only multiple

CD-Audio sessions, the player will renumber the

tracks so each track number is unique.

• For CD Data (or CD-ROM) discs, always use the

ISO-9660 (Level 1 or Level 2), Joliet, or UDF format.

CD-DA may also be used for PCM Audio contained

on CD-Based Data.

• The player recognizes a maximum of 512 files and 99

folders per CD-R and CD-RW disc.

• Mixed media recordable DVD formats will only play

the Video_TS portion of the disc.

If you are still having trouble writing a disc that is

playable in the DVD player, check with the disc record-

ing sof tware publisher for more information about

burning playable discs.

The recommended method for labeling recordable

discs (CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R and DVD-RW) is with a

permanent marker. Do not use adhesive labels as they

may separate from the disc, become stuck, and cause

permanent damage to the DVD player.

186

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Compressed Audio Files (MP3, WMA AND

ACC)

The DVD player is capable of playing MP3 (MPEG-1

Audio Layer 3 with data bitrates from 32 to 320 kbit/s,

including variable bit rates), WMA (All Standard 8.x,

9.x Windows Media Audio) and ACC (MPEG-4 audio;

sampling frequencies 8 to 48 kHz; mono and stereo)

audio files with the from a CD Data disc (usually a

CD-R or CD-RW).

• The DVD player always uses the file extension to

determine the audio format, so MP3 files must always

end with the extension ".mp3" or ".MP3", WMA files

must always end with the extension ".wma" or

"WMA", and ACC files must end with the extensions

“.acc” or “.m4a”. To prevent incorrect playback, do

not use these extensions for any other types of files.

• For MP3 files, ID3 tag data v1, v1.1, v2 and v2.4 (such

as artist name, track title, album, etc.) are supported.

• Any file that is copy protected (such as those down-

loaded from many online music stores) will not play.

The DVD player will automatically skip the file and

begin playing the next available file.

• Other compression formats such as AAC, MP3 Pro,

Ogg Vorbis, and ATRAC3 will not play. The DVD

player will automatically skip the file and begin playing

the next available file.

•

If you are creating your own files, the recommended

fixed bit rate for MP3 files is between 96 and 192Kbps

and the recommended fixed bit rate for WMA files is

between 64 and 192Kbps. Variable bit rates are also

supported. For both formats, the recommended

sample rate is either 44.1kHz or 48kHz.

• To change the current file, use the remote control’s

or DVD player’s ▴ button to advance to the next file,

or the ▾ button to return to the start of the current

or previous file.

• To change the current directory, use the remote

control’s PROG UP and Down buttons or Rewind/

skip back and fast fwd/skip forward.

Disc Errors

If the DVD player is unable to read the disc, a "Disc

Error" message is displayed on the Radio display and

the disc is automatically ejected. A dirty, damaged, or

incompatible disc format are all potential causes for a

"Disc Error" message.

If a disc has a damaged track which results in audible or

visible errors that persists for 2.0 seconds, the DVD

player will attempt to continue playing the disc by

skipping forward 1.0 to 3.0 seconds at a time. If the end

of the disc is reached, the DVD player will return to the

beginning of the disc and attempt to play the start of

the first track.

187

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

The DVD player may shut down during extremely hot

conditions, such as when the vehicle’s interior tem-

perature is above 49°C. When this occurs, the DVD

player will display "High Temp" and will shut off the

display until a safe temperature is reached. This shut-

down is necessary to protect the optics of the DVD

player.

Product Agreement

This product incorporates copyright protection tech-

nology that is protected by U.S. patents and other

intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright pro-

tection technology must be authorized by Macrovision,

and is intended for home or other limited viewing uses

otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engi-

neering or disassembly is prohibited.

Dolby® Digital and MLP Lossless Manufactured

under license from Dolby Laboratories. "Dolby," "MLP

Lossless," and the double-D symbol are trademarks of

Dolby Laboratories. Confidential unpublished works.

reserved.

188

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL (for

versions/markets, where

provided)

This feature allows an iPod® or external USB device to

be plugged into the USB port.

iPod® control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G

iPod® and iPhone® devices. Some iPod® software

versions may not fully support the iPod® control

features. Please visit Apple’s website for software up-

dates.

For further information, refer to the Uconnect® User’s

Manual.

CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE

To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the follow-

ing precautions:

1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the

surface.

2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft

cloth, wiping from center to edge.

3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid

scratching the disc.

4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, clean-

ers, or anti-static sprays.

5. Store the disc in its case after playing.

6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.

7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may

become too high.

NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particu-

lar disc, it may be damaged (e.g., scratched, reflective

coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)

oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known

good disc before considering disc player service.

189

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE

PHONES

Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in

your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance

from your radio. This condition may be lessened or

eliminated by relocating the mobile phone antenna.

This condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio

performance does not satisfactorily “clear” by the

repositioning of the antenna, it is recommended that

the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile

phone operation.

ADDING FUEL

FUEL FILLER CAP (GAS CAP)

The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the

left side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged,

be sure the replacement cap has been designed for use

with this vehicle.

(fig. 126)

Locking Fuel Filler Cap (for versions/markets,

where provided)

Your vehicle may be equipped with a locking fuel cap.

Use the specific blade key to lock/unlock this fuel cap.

(fig. 126)

Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)

190

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

NOTE: When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap

tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler door

reinforcement.

• Damage to the fuel system or emissions

control system could result from using an

improper fuel tank filler tube cap.

• A poorly fitting fuel filler cap could let impuri-

ties into the fuel system.

• A poorly fitting fuel filler cap may cause the

“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn on.

• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling,do not“top

off ” the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel

nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.

WARNING!

• Never have any smoking materials lit

in or

near t he vehicle when the gas cap is

removed or the tank is being filled.

• Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is

running.

• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a

portable container that is inside of a vehicle.You

could be burned.Always place gas containers on

the ground while filling.

• Failure to follow this warning may result in

serious injury or death.

NOTE:

• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel

tank is full.

• Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound.

This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened

properly. The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn

on if the gas cap is not secured properly. Make sure

that the g as cap is tightened each time the vehicle is

refueled.

LOOSE FUEL FILLER CAP MESSAGE (for

versions/markets, where provided)

If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the

fuel filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged,

a “Check Gascap” message will display in the Electronic

Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). If this occurs,

tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the TRIP

ODOMETER button to turn off the message . If the

problem continues, the message will appear the next

time the vehicle is started.

191

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STAR

TING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

SAFETY

OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS

Some of the most important safety features in your

vehicle are the restraint systems:

• Seat Belt Systems

• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags

• Supplemental Active Head Restraints

• Active Hood System

• Child Restraints

IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS:

Please pay close attention to the information in this

section. It tells you how to use your restraint system

properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as

possible.

Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize

the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:

1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride

buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat. (fig. 127)

2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing

child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat,

move the seat as far back as possible and use the

proper child restraint. (Refer to “Child Restraints”)

3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle

seat belt properly (Refer to "Child Restraints")

should be secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in

child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats.

Older children who do not use child restraints or

belt-positioning booster seats should ride properly

buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.

4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt

behind them or under their arm.

5. You should read the instructions provided with your

child restraint to make sure that you are using it

properly.

(fig. 127)

Warning Label On Front Passenger Sun Visor

192

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

6. All occupants should always wear their lap and

shoulder belts properly.

7. The driver and front passenger seats should be

moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced

Front Air Bags room to inflate.

8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your

vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the

side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space

between you and the door and you could be injured.

9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be

modified to accommodate a disabled person, con-

tact the Customer Center. Phone numbers are

provided under "If You Need Assistance."

WARNING!

• Never place a rear-facing child re-

raint in front of an air bag.A deploying

Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause

death or serious injury to a child 12 years or

younger, including a child in a rear-facing child

restraint.

• Only use rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle

with a rear seat.

SEAT BELT SYSTEMS

Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even

on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor

driver and could cause a collision that includes you.

This can happen far away from home or on your own

street.

Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they

can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision.

Some of the worst injuries happen when people are

thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possi-

bility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking

the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle

should be belted at all times.

ENHANCED SEAT BELT USE REMINDER

SYSTEM (BeltAlert)

BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver

and outboard front passenger (if equipped with out-

board front passenger BeltAlert) to buckle their seat

belts. The feature is active whenever the ignition switch

is in the START or ON/RUN position. If the driver or

outboard front seat passenger is unbelted, the Seat

Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until

both outboard front seat belts are buckled.

193

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

The BeltAlert warning sequence begins after the ve-

hicle speed is over 8 km/h by blinking the Seat Belt

Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime.

Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the

entire duration or until the respective seat belts are

buckled. After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt

Reminder Light remains illuminated until the respective

seat belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all

other occupants to buckle their seat belts. If an out-

board front seat belt is unbuckled while traveling at

speeds greater than 8 km/h, BeltAlert will provide both

audio and visual notification.

The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not

active when the outboard front passenger seat is un-

occupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal

or heavy object is on the outboard front passenger seat

or when the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is

recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat

(if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are

secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.

BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your

authorized dealer. Fiat Group does not recommend

deactivating BeltAlert.

NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated, the Seat Belt

Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the

driver’s or outboard front passenger’s (if equipped with

BeltAlert) seat belt remains unbuckled.

LAP/SHOULDER BELTS

All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with

lap/shoulder belts.

The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during

very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the

shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you

under normal conditions. However, in a collision the

seat belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the

inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.

WARNING!

• Relying on the air bags alone could

lead to

more severe injuries in a collision.

The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain

you properly. In some collisions, the air bags

won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt

even though you have air bags.

(Continued)

194

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

WARNING! (Continued)

• In a collision, you and your passengers can

suffer much greater injuries if you are not prop-

erly buckled up.You can strike the interior of your

vehicle or other passengers,or you can be thrown

out of the vehicle.Always be sure you and others

in your vehicle are buckled up properly.

• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or

outside of a vehicle.In a collision,people riding in

these areas are more likely to be seriously injured

or killed.

• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your

vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat

belts.

• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and

using a seat belt properly.

• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make

your injuries in a collision much worse.You might

suffer internal injuries,or you could even slide out

of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear

your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers

safe, too.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Two people should never be belted into a single

seat belt. People belted together can crash into

one another in a collision, hurting one another

badly. Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt

for more than one person, no matter what their

size.

• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of

injury in a collision.The seat belt forces won’t be

at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across

your abdomen.Always wear the lap part of your

seat belt as low as possible and keep it snug.

• A twisted seat belt may not protect you prop-

erly. In a collision, it could even cut into you. Be

sure the seat belt is flat against your body, with-

out twists. If you can’t straighten a seat belt in

your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer

immediately and have it fixed.

• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong

buckle will not protect you properly. The lap

portion could ride too high on your body,possibly

causing internal injuries.Always buckle your seat

belt into the buckle nearest you.

(Continued)

195

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

WARNING! (Continued)

• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you

properly.In a sudden stop,you could move too far

forward, increasing the possibili ty of injury.Wear

your seat belt snugly.

• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is

dangerous.Your body could strike the inside sur-

faces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing head

and neck injury.A seat belt worn under the arm

can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong

as shoulder bones.Wear the seat belt over your

shoulder so that your strongest bones will take

t he force in a collision.

• A shoulder bel t placed behind you will not

protect you from injury during a collision.You are

more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do

not wear your shoulder belt.The lap and shoulder

belt are meant to be used together.

• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a

collision and leave you with no protection. In-

spect the seat belt system periodically, checking

for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts

must be replaced immediately. Do not disas-

semble or modify the seat belt system. Seat belt

assemblies must be replaced after a collision.

LAP/SHOULDER BELT OPERATING

INSTRUCTIONS

1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and

adjust the seat.

2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the

front seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for

vehicles equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch

plate and pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate

up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat

belt to go around your lap. (fig. 128)

(fig. 128)

Pulling Out The Latch Plate

196

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the

latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”

(fig. 129)

4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low

across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove

slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder

belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the

latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt

reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a

collision. (fig. 130)

5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and

chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort-

able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will

withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.

6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the

buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its

stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate

down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract

fully.

LAP/SHOULDER BELT UNTWISTING

PROCEDURE

Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted

lap/shoulder belt.

1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the

anchor point.

2. At about 15 to 30 cm above the latch plate, grasp

and twist the belt webbing 180° to create a fold that

begins immediately above the latch plate.

(fig. 129)

Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle

(fig. 130)

PositioningThe Lap Belt

197

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded web-

bing. The folded webbing must enter the slot at the

top of the latch plate.

4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the

folded webbing.

ADJUSTABLE UPPER SHOULDER BELT

ANCHORAGE

In the driver and front passenger seats, the top of the

shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to

position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or

squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchor-

age, and move it up or down to the position that serves

you best.

(fig. 131)

As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will

prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position,

and if you are taller than average, you will prefer the

shoulder belt anchorage in a higher position. After you

release the anchorage button, try to move it up or

down to make sure that it is locked in position.

NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage

is equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows

the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the

upward position without pushing or squeezing the

release button. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is

latched, pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage

until it is locked into position.

SEAT BELTS AND PREGNANT WOMEN

We recommend that pregnant women use the seat

belts throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother

safe is the best way to keep the baby safe.

Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the seat

belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as

possible. Keep the seat belt low so that it does not

come across the abdomen. That way the strong bones

of the hips will take the force if there is a collision.

(fig. 131)

Adjustable Anchorage

198

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

SEAT BELT PRETENSIONER

The front seat belt system is equipped with pretension-

ing devices that are designed to remove slack from the

seat belt in the event of a collision. These devices may

improve the performance of the seat belt by removing

slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretension-

ers work for all size occupants, including those in child

restraints.

NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper

seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still

must be worn snugly and positioned properly.

The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-

straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten-

sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner

or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.

ENERGY MANAGEMENT FEATURE

This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy

Management feature in the front seating positions that

may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event

of a collision. This seat belt system has a retractor

assembly that is designed to release webbing in a

controlled manner.

SUPPLEMENTAL ACTIVE HEAD

RESTRAINTS (AHR)

These head restraints are passive, deployable compo-

nents, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be

readily identified by any markings, only through visual

inspection of the head restraint. The head restraint will

be split in two halves, with the front half being soft

foam and trim, the back half being decorative plastic.

How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work

The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines

whether the severity, or type of rear impact will require

the Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. If a rear

impact requires deployment, both the driver and front

passenger seat AHRs will be deployed.

When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half

of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the

gap between the back of the occupant’s head and the

AHR. This system is designed to help prevent or

reduce the extent of injuries to the driver and front

passenger in certain types of rear impacts.

199

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

NOTE: The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or

may not deploy in the event of a front or side impact.

However if during a front impact, a secondary rear

impact occurs, the AHR may deploy based on the

severity and type of the impact.

(fig. 132)

WARNING!

All occupants, including the driver,

should n

ot operate a vehicle or sit in a

vehicle’s seat until the head restraints are placed

in their proper positions in order to minimize the

risk of neck injury in the event of a collision.

NOTE: For more information on properly adjusting

and positioning the head restraint, refer to “Adjusting

Active Head Restraints” in “Understanding The Fea-

tures Of Your Vehicle.”

RESETTING ACTIVE HEAD RESTRAINTS

(AHR)

If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in a collision,

you must reset the head restraint on the driver ’s and

front passenger’s seat before driving. You can recognize

when the Active Head Restraint has been triggered by

the fact that they have moved forward (as shown in

step three of the resetting procedure).

1. Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat.

(fig. 133)

2. Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR

at a comfortable position.

(fig. 132)

Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components

1 — Head Restraint Front

Half (Soft Foam and Trim)

3 — Head Restraint Back

Half (Decorative Plastic Rear

Cover)

2 — Seatback 4 — Head Restraint Guide

Tubes

200

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

3. Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the

vehicle then down to engage the locking

mechanism. (fig. 134) (fig. 135)

(fig. 133)

Hand Positioning Points On AHR

(fig. 134)

(fig. 135)

ReviewTable Below

A — Downward Movement

B — Rearward Movement

C — Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking

Mechanism

201

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

4. The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock

into the back decorative plastic half. (fig. 136)

NOTE:

• If you have difficulties or problems resetting the

Active Head Restraints, see an authorized dealer.

• For safety reasons, have the Active Head Restraints

checked by a qualified specialist at an authorized

dealer.

ACTIVE HOOD SYSTEM

The Active Hood system is intended to enhance pe-

destrian protection by elevating the vehicle’s hood

upon an impact with a pedestrian or other object. The

system is automatically activated when the vehicle is

moving within a specified vehicle speed range. In order

to detect a range of pedestrians, other objects that are

impacted may result in an Active Hood deployment.

Deployment Sensors And Controls

The Electronic Pedestrian Protection Module (EPPM)

determines if deployment of the actuators in a frontal

impact is required. Based on the impact sensors signals,

the EPPM determines when to deploy the actuators.

The impact sensors are located within the front bum-

per area. The EPPM monitors the readiness of the

electronic parts of the Active Hood system whenever

the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN posi-

tion. If the key is in the LOCK position, in the ACC

position, or not in the ignition, the Active Hood system

is not on and the Active Hood will not deploy.

The EPPM contains a backup power supply system that

may deploy the actuators even if the battery loses

power or it becomes disconnected prior to deploy-

ment.

(fig. 136)

AHR In Reset Position

202

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

SERVICE ACTIVE HOOD SYSTEM

If the system has deployed the Active Hood, or if it

detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns

on the Air Bag Warning Light and it will display the

“SERVICE ACTIVE HOOD” message in the Electronic

Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), if equipped. A

single chime will sound if the Air Bag Warning Light

comes on again after initial startup. It also includes

diagnostics that will illuminate the Air Bag Warning

Light if a malfunction is noted that could affect the

Active Hood system. The diagnostics also record the

nature of the malfunction. If the Air Bag Warning Light

is illuminated, or if “SERVICE ACTIVE HOOD” ap-

pears in the EVIC, if equipped, see your authorized

dealer.

In the event of an Active Hood deployment, the vehicle

should be serviced by an authorized dealer. The hood

hinges must be serviced and the actuator assemblies

replaced to restore system functionality. Following an

Active Hood deployment, the hood position can be

temporarily reset by pushing down at the rear edge

over the hood hinges as the internal pressure of each

actuator is relieved. The temporary hood reset posi-

tion is intended to improve forward driving visibility

over the hood until the vehicle can be serviced.

The temporary hood reset position will leave the hood

approximately 5 mm above the fender surface. The

front bumper assembly may affect proper operation of

the Active Hood system. The front bumper compo-

nents should be inspected for damage and replaced if

necessary in the event of a frontal impact, even if it

occurs at a low rate of speed.

NOTE: After any Active Hood deployment, the ve-

hicle should be taken to an authorized dealer

immediately.

(fig. 137)

Service Active Hood

203

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

To prevent possible damage, do not slam

the rear of the hood to reset it. Press the

rear of the hood down until an audible

and tactile detent is detected (approximately 5

mm above the fender). This should secure both

hood hinge reset mechanisms.

WARNING!

• Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in

your

instrument panel or the “SERVICE

ACTIVE HOOD”message in the EVIC could mean

you won’t have the Active Hood to enhance pe-

destrian protection. If the light does not come on

as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned

on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it

comes on as you drive, see your authorized

dealer.

• Modifications to any part of the Active Hood

system could cause it to fail when you need it. Do

not modify the component s or wiring. Do not

modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure,

or add an aftermarket front bumper or cover.

• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the

Active Hood system yourself. Be sure to tell any-

one who works on your vehicle that it has an

Active Hood system.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not attempt to modify any part of your

Active Hood system.TheActive Hood may deploy

accidentally or may not function properly if

modifications are made.Take your vehicle to an

authorized dealer for any hood service.

• Drivers must be aware of pedestrians. Always

be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other

vehicles,and obstructions.You are res ponsible for

safety and must continue to pay attention to

your surroundings . Failure to do so can result in

serious injury or death.

204

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM

(SRS)

AIR BAG SYSTEM COMPONENTS

Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag

system components:

• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)

• Air Bag Warning Light

• Steering Wheel and Column

• Instrument Panel

• Knee Impact Bolsters

• Advanced Front Air Bags

• Supplemental Side Air Bags

• Front and Side Impact Sensors

• Seat Belt Pretensioners

• Seat Belt Buckle Switch

ADVANCED FRONT AIR BAGS

This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the

driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat

belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air

Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The

passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the

instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The

words SRS AIRBAG or AIRBAG are embossed on the

air bag covers.

(fig. 138)

Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations

1 — Driver And Passenger

Advanced Front Air Bags

2 — Passenger Knee Impact

Bolster

3 — Driver Knee Impact

Bolster

205

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

WARNING!

• Being too close to t he steering wheel

or ins

trument panel during Advanced

Front Air Bag deployment could cause serious

injury, including death. Air bags need room to

inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your

arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument

panel.

• Never place a rear-facing child res traint in

front of an air bag. A deploying Passenger Ad-

vanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious

injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a

child in a rear-facing child restraint.

• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a ve-

hicle with a rear seat.

ADVANCED FRONT AIR BAG FEATURES

The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage

driver and front passenger air bags. This system pro-

vides output appropriate to the severity and type of

collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint

Controller (ORC), which may receive information

from the front impact sensors or other system com-

ponents.

The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during

an impact that requires air bag deployment. A low

energy output is used in less severe collisions. A higher

energy output is used for more severe collisions.

This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front

passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether

the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The

seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inf lation rate of

the Advanced Front Air Bags.

WARNING!

• No objects should be placed over or

near

the air bag on the instrument panel

or steering wheel,because any such objects could

cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe

enough to cause the air bags to inflate.

• Do not put anything on or around the air bag

covers or attempt to open them manually. You

may damage the air bags and you could be

injured because the air bags may no longer be

functional.The protective covers for the air bag

cushions are designed to o pen only when the air

bags are inflating.

• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to

more severe injuries in a collision. The air bags

work with your seat belt to restrain you properly.

In some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all.

Always wear your seat belts even though you

have air bags.

206

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

ADVANCED FRONT AIR BAG OPERATION

Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide

additional protection by supplementing the seat belts.

Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce

the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The

Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal

collisions, including some that may produce substantial

vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions,

truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.

On the other hand, depending on the type and location

of impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in

crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but that

produce a severe initial deceleration.

Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration

over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are

not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should

have deployed.

Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all

collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in

position, away from an inflating air bag.

When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad-

vanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A

large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate

the Advanced Front Air Bags.

The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right

side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of

the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The

Advanced Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it

takes to blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly

deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front

passenger.

KNEE IMPACT BOLSTERS

The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of

the driver and front passenger, and position the front

occupants for improved interaction with the Advanced

Front Air Bags.

WARNING!

• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the

knee

impact bolsters in any way.

• Do not mount any accessories to the knee

impact bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos,

citizen band radios, etc.

207

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

SUPPLEMENTAL SIDE AIR BAGS

Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags:

1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs):

Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The

SABs are marked with a SRS AIRBAG or AIRBAG

label sewn into the outboard side of the seats.

(fig. 139)

The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant

injury during certain side impact and certain roll-

over events, in addition to the injury reduction

potential provided by the seat belts and body struc-

ture.

When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the

outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover. The

inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into the

space between the occupant and the door. The SAB

moves at a very high speed and with such a high

force that it could injure you if you are not seated

properly, or if items are positioned in the area

where the SAB inflates. Children are at an even

greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.

WARNING!

Do not use accessory seat covers or

place obj

ects between you and the Side

Air Bags; the performance could be adver sely

affected and/or objects could be pushed into you,

causing serious injury.

(fig. 139)

Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label

208

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains

(SABICs): Located above the side windows. The

trim covering the SABICs is labeled SRS AIRBAG or

AIRBAG. (fig. 140)

SABICs may help reduce the risk of head injury to

front and rear seat outboard occupants. SABICs

may reduce the risk of injuries in certain side impact

and vehicle rollover events, in addition to the injury

reduction potential provided by the seat belts and

body structure.

The SABICs deploy downward, covering the side

windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside

edge of the trim out of the way and covers the

window. The SABICs inflate with enough force to

injure you if you are not belted and seated properly,

or if items are positioned in the area where the

SABICs inflate. Children are at an even greater risk

of injury from a deploying air bag.

The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or

complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side

windows in certain rollover or side impact events.

WARNING!

• Your vehicle is equipped with left and

righ

t Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflat-

able Curtains (SABICs). Do not stack luggage or

other cargo up high enough to block the deploy-

ment of the SABICs.The trim covering above the

side windows where the SABIC and its deploy-

ment path are located should remain free from

any obstructions.

• Your vehicle is equipped with SABICs. In order

for the SABICs to work as intended,do not install

any accessory items in your vehicle which could

alter the roof.Do not add an aftermarket sunroof

to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that re-

quire permanent attachments (bolts or screws)

for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill

into the roof of the vehicle for any reason.

(fig. 140)

Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)

Label Location

209

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

The SABICs and SABs (“Side Air Bags”) are designed to

activate in certain side impacts and certain rollover

events. The Occupant Restraint Controller (“ORC”)

determines whether the deployment of the Side Air

Bags in a particular side impact or rollover event is

appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision.

Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of

whether or not Side Air Bags should have deployed.

Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint

system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to

blink your eyes. Occupants, including children, who are

up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be

seriously injured or killed. Occupants, including chil-

dren, should never lean on or sleep against the door,

side windows, or area where the Side Air Bags inflate,

even if they are in an infant or child restraint.

Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are

necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also

help keep you in position, away from inflating Side Air

Bags. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags,

occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit

upright with their backs against the seats. Children

must be properly restrained in a child restraint or

booster seat that is appropriate for the size of the child.

WARNING!

• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do

not

lean against the door or window. Sit

upright in the center of the seat.

• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during

deployment could cause you to be severely in-

jured or killed.

• Relying on the SideAir Bags alone could lead to

more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air

Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you

properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t

deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even

though you have Side Air Bags.

NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the

interior trim, but they will open during air bag deploy-

ment.

Side Impacts

In side impacts, the side impact sensors aid the ORC in

determining the appropriate response to impact

events. The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air

Bags on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts

that require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side

impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left

side impact deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a

right side impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only.

210

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,

including some collisions at certain angles, or some

side collisions that do not impact the area of the

passenger compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy

during angled or offset frontal collisions where the

Advanced Front Air Bags deploy.

Rollover Events

Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain roll-

over events. The ORC determines whether the de-

ployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover

event is appropriate, based on the severity and type of

collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indica-

tor of whether or not Side Air Bags should have

deployed.

The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events.

The rollover sensing-system determines if a rollover

event may be in progress and whether deployment is

appropriate. A slower-developing event may deploy the

seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle. A

faster-developing event may deploy the seat belt pre-

tensioners as well as the SABs and SABICs on both

sides of the vehicle. The rollover sensing-system may

also deploy the seat belt pretensioners, with or with-

out the SABs and SABICs, on both sides of the vehicle

if the vehicle experiences a near rollover event.

IF A DEPLOYMENT OCCURS

The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate

immediately after deployment.

NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all

collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with

the air bag system.

If you do have a collision, which deploys the air bags,

any or all of the following may occur:

• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions

and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air

bags deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to

friction rope burns or those you might get sliding

along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not

caused by contact with chemicals. They are not

permanent and normally heal quickly. However, if you

haven’t healed significantly within a few days, or if you

have any blistering, see your doctor immediately.

• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like

particles. The particles are a normal by-product of

the process that generates the non-toxic gas used for

air bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate

the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye

irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or

throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation

continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle

on your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s

instructions for cleaning.

211

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have

deployed. If you are involved in another collision, the

air bags will not be in place to protect you.

WARNING!

Deployed air bags and seat belt preten-

sioner

s cannot protect you in another

collision. Have the air bags, seat belt pretension-

ers, and the seat belt retractor assemblies re-

placed by an authorized dealer immediately.

Also,have the Occupant Restraint Controller Sys-

tem serviced as well.

NOTE:

• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior

trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.

• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an

authorized dealer immediately.

ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE

SYSTEM

In the event of an impact, if the communication net-

work remains intact, and the power remains intact,

depending on the nature of the event, the ORC will

determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident

Response System perform the following functions:

• Cut off fuel to the engine.

• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power

or until the ignition switch is turned to the “OFF”

position.

• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long

as the battery has power or until the ignition switch

is turned to the “OFF” position.

• Unlock the doors automatically.

SYSTEM RESET PROCEDURE

In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response

System functions after an event, the ignition switch

must be changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to

ignition OFF.

212

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

AIR BAG WARNING LIGHT

The air bags must be ready to inflate for your

protection in a collision. The Occupant Re-

straint Controller (ORC) monitors the inter-

nal circuits and interconnecting wiring asso-

ciated with air bag system electrical components.

The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic

parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition

switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If the

ignition switch is in the OFF position or in the ACC

position, the air bag system is not on and the air bags

will not inflate

The ORC contains a backup power supply system that

may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power

or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.

The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light

in the

instrument panel for approximately four to eight sec-

onds for a self-check when the ignition switch is first

turned to the ON/RUN position. After the self-check,

the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC

detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns

on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily or

continuously. A single chime will sound to alert you if

the light comes on again after initial startup.

The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate

the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a mal-

function is detected that could affect the air bag sys-

tem. The diagnostics also record the nature of the

malfunction. While the air bag system is designed to be

maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have an

authorized dealer service the air bag system immedi-

ately.

• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during

the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is

first turned to the ON/RUN position.

• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on af ter the four

to eight-second interval.

• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently

or remains on while driving.

NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine

related gauges are not working, the Occupant Re-

straint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this

condition the air bags may not be ready to inflate for

your protection. Have an authorized dealer service the

air bag system immediately.

213

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

WARNING!

Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in

your ins

trument panel could mean you

won’t have the air bags to protect you in a

collision. If the light does not come on as a bulb

check when the ignition is first turned on, stays

on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as

you drive, have an authorized dealer service the

air bag system immediately.

MAINTAINING YOUR AIR BAG SYSTEM

WARNING!

• Modifications to any part of the air

bag sys

tem could cause it to fail when

you need it.You could be injured if the air bag

system is not there to protect you. Do not modify

the components or wiring, including adding any

kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel

hub trim cover or the upper right side of the

instrument panel. Do not modify the front bum-

per, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket

side ste ps or running boards.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the

air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone

who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag

system.

• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air

bag system.The air bag may inflate accidentally

or may not function properly if modifications are

made.Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer

for any air bag system service.If your seat,includ-

ing your trim cover and cushion, needs to be

serviced in any way (including removal or

loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts),

take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only

manufacturer approved seat accessories may be

used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag

system for persons with disabilit ies, contact your

authorized dealer.

214

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder

(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in

certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an

air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that

will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems

performed. The EDR is designed to record data related

to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short

period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in

this vehicle is designed to record such data as:

• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;

• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts

were buckled/fastened;

• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the

accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

• How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better understanding of

the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.

NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if

a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are re-

corded by the EDR under normal driving conditions

and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash

location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as

law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with

the type of personally identifying data routinely ac-

quired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is

required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is

needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other

parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special

equipment, can read the information if they have access

to the vehicle or the EDR.

215

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

CHILD RESTRAINTS - CARRYING

CHILDREN SAFELY

(fig. 141)

Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all

times, including babies and children. EC directive 2003/

20/EC requires proper use of restraints in all EC

countries.

Children less than 1.5 meters tall and 12 years or

younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat,

if available. According to crash statistics, children are

safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather

than in the front.

WARNING!

In a collision, an unrestrained child can

become

a projectile inside the vehicle.

The force required to hold even an infant on your

lap could become so great that you could not

hold the child, no matter how strong you are.The

child and others could be badly injured.Any child

riding in your vehicle should be in a proper re-

straint for the child's size.

There are different sizes and types of restraints for

children from newborn size to the child almost large

enough for an adult safety belt. Children should ride

rearward facing as long as possible; this is the most

protected position for a child in the event of a crash.

Always check the child seat Owner’s Manual to make

sure you have the correct seat for your child. Carefully

read and follow all the instructions and warnings in the

child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all the labels

attached to the child restraint.

(fig. 141)

216

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

In Europe, children restraint systems are defined by

regulation ECE-R44, which divides them into five

weight groups:

Restraint Group Weight Group

Group0 upto10kg

Group 0+ up to 13 kg

Group 1 9-18 kg

Group 2 15-25 kg

Group 3 22-36 kg

Check the label of your child restraint. All approved

child restraints must include type-approval data and

the control mark on its label. The label must be

permanently secured to the child restraint system. You

should not remove this label from the child restraint.

WARNING!

Extreme Hazard! Do not place rearward

facing

infant seat in front of an active air

bag. Refer to visor and door shut face mounted

labels for information.Deployment of the air bag

in an accident could cause fatal injuries to the

baby regardless of the severity of the collision. It

is advisable to always carry children in a child

restraint system on the rear seat, which is the

most protected position in the event of a colli-

sion.

“UNIVERSAL” CHILD RESTRAINT

SYSTEMS

The figures in the following sections are examples of

each type of universal child restraint system. Typical

installations are shown. Always install your child re-

straint system according to the child restraint manu-

facturer’s instructions, which must be included with

this type of restraint system.

217

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Group 0 And 0+

(fig. 142)

Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward

facing in the vehicle as long as possible . Infants up to

13 kg must be restrained in a rear-facing seat like the

child seat shown in fig. A. This type of child restraint

supports the child’s head and does not induce stress on

the neck in the event of sudden decelerations or a

crash.

The rear-facing child restraint is restrained by the

vehicle’s seat belts, as shown in fig. A. The child seat

restrains the child with its own harness.

WARNING!

• Never place a rear-facing child re-

raint in front of an air bag.A deploying

passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause

death or serious injury to a child 12 years or

younger, including a child in a rear-facing child

restraint.

• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a ve-

hicle with a rear seat.

(fig. 142)

fig.A

218

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Group 1

(fig. 143)

Children who weigh between 9 kg and 18 kg may be

carried in a Group 1, forward facing seat like the one in

fig. B. This type of child restraint is for older children

who are too big for a Group 0 or 0+ child restraint.

Group 2

(fig. 144)

Children who weigh between 15 kg and 25 kg and who

are too big for the Group 1 child restraint may use a

Group 2 child restraint system.

As shown in fig. C, the Group 2 child restraint system

positions the child correctly with respect to the seat

belt so that the shoulder belt crosses the child’s chest

and not the neck, and the lap belt is snug on the pelvis

and not the abdomen.

(fig. 143)

fig. B

(fig. 144)

fig. C

219

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Group 3

(fig. 145)

Children who weigh between 22 kg and 36 kg and who

are tall enough to use the adult shoulder belt may use

a Group 3 child restraint. Group 3 child restraints

position the lap belt on the child’s pelvis. The child

must be tall enough that the shoulder belt crosses the

child’s chest and not their neck.

fig. D shows an example of a Group 3 child restraint

system correctly positioning the child on the rear seat.

WARNING!

• Improper installation can lead to fail-

ure of

an infant or child restraint. It

could come loose in a collision.The child could be

badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint

manufacturer’s directions exactly when install-

ing an infant or child restraint.

• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle,

do not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward

because it can loosen the child restraint attach-

ments. Remove the child restraint before adjust-

ing the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle

seat has been adjusted, reinstall the child re-

straint.

• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it

in the vehicle with the seat belt or ISOFIX an-

chorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not

leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or

accident, it could strike the occupants or seat-

backs and cause serious personal injury.

(fig. 145)

fig. D

220

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

INTEGRATED CHILD BOOSTER SEAT (for

versions/markets, where provided)

The Integrated Child Booster Seat is located in each

outboard second-row passenger seat. The Booster

Seat is designed for children weighing between 22 and

39 kg and between 119 cm and 145 cm tall.

To position a child into the Integrated Child Booster

Seat follow these steps:

1. Slide the second row seat to the full rear position to

use the Integrated Child Booster Seat. NOTE: The

second row bench with Integrated Child Booster

Seat must remain in the full rear position during use .

2. Pull the release loop forward to release the latch

and seat cushion. (fig. 146)

3. Lift the seat cushion up and push back to lock it in

the booster seat position. (fig. 147)

4. Place the child upright in the seat with their back

firmly against the seatback.

5. Grasp the latch plate and pull out the seat belt.

6. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as neces-

sary to allow the seat belt to go around the child’s

lap. NOTE: The lap portion of the seat belt should

be low on the hips and as snug as possible.

(fig. 146)

Release Loop

(fig. 147)

Booster Seat

221

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

7. Once the seat belt is long enough to fit properly,

insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear

a “click.” (fig. 148)

8. To remove the slack from the lap belt, pull upward

on the shoulder portion of the seat belt.

9. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the

buckle.

WARNING!

Securely lock the seat cushion into posi-

tion

before using the seat. Otherwise,

the seat will not provide the proper stability for

child seats and/or passengers. An improperly

latched seat cushion could cause serious injury.

(fig. 148)

Proper Belt Use

222

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

SUITABILITY OF PASSENGER SEATS FOR

UNIVERSAL CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM

USE

According to the European Directive 2000/3/EC, the

suitability of each passenger seat position for the instal-

lation of Universal Child Restraint Systems is shown in

the following table:

Mass Group

Seating Position (or other site)

Front

Passenger

Rear

Outboard

Rear Center

Intermediate

Outboard

Intermediate

Center

Group0—upto

10 kg

X U N/A U U

Group 0+ — up

to 13 kg

X U N/A U U

Group1–9to

18 kg

X U N/A U U

Group II – 15 to

25 kg

X U N/A U U

Group III — 22

to 36 kg

X U N/A U U

Key of letters used in the table above

U = Suitable for “universal” category restraints ap-

proved for use in this mass group

X = Seat position no suitable for children in this mass

group

223

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Seat Belts For Older Children

Children over 1.50 m in height can wear seat belts

instead of using child restraints.

Use this simple 5-step test to decide whether the seat

belt properly fits the child or if they should still use a

Group 2 or Group 3 child restraint to improve the fit of

the seat belt:

1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of

the vehicle seat?

2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the

front of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting

all the way back?

3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder

between their neck and arm?

4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching

the child’s thighs and not their stomach?

5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?

If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then

the child still needs to use a Group 2 or 3 child restraint

in this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder belt,

check belt fit periodically and make sure the seat belt

buckle is latched. A child’s squirming or slouching can

move the belt out of position. If the shoulder belt

contacts the face or neck, move the child closer to the

center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to position

the seat belt on the child correctly.

WARNING!

Never allow a child to put the shoulder

belt un

der an arm or behind their back.

In a crash, the shoulder belt will not protect a

child properly, which may result in serious injury

or death. A child must always wear both the lap

and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.

224

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

ISOFIX Restraint System

(fig. 149)

Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint an-

chorage system called ISOFIX. This system allows ISO-

FIX - equipped child seats to be installed without using

the vehicle’s seat belts. The ISOFIX system has two

lower anchorages located at the back of the seat

cushion where it meets the seatback and a top tether

anchorage located behind the seating position.

An example of a Universal ISOFIX child restraint sys-

tem for weight group 1 is shown in fig. B. ISOFIX child

restraints are also available in the other weight groups.

LOCATING THE LOWER ISOFIX

ANCHORAGES

The lower anchorages are round bars that are found at

the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seat-

back. They are just visible when you lean into the rear

seat to install the child restraint. You will easily feel

them if you run your finger along the gap between the

seatback and seat cushion.

(fig. 150)

(fig. 149)

(fig. 150)

Lower ISOFIX Anchorages

225

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

LOCATING THE UPPER TETHER

ANCHORAGES

There are tether strap anchorages behind

each second row rear seating position, lo-

cated near the floor. (fig. 151)

ISOFIX child restraint systems will be equipped with a

rigid bar on each side. Each will have a connector to

attach to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the

connection to the anchorage. Forward-facing child re-

straints and some rear-facing child restraints may also

be equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap will

have a hook at the end to attach to the top tether

anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is

attached to the anchorage.

CENTER SEAT ISOFIX:

This vehicle has 5 lower ISOFIX anchorages in the rear

seat. Anchorages A and B are used for the right out-

board rear seating position (1). Anchorages D and E are

used for the left outboard rear seating position (3).

Anchorages B and C are used for the center seating

position (2). Do not install an ISOFIX child restraint

using anchorages C and D. This is not an ISOFIX

position in your vehicle.

(fig. 151)

Tether Strap Anchorage Locations

226

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

You can install up to two child seats using the ISOFIX

system at the same time . If you are installing three child

restraints, you must use the seat belt to install the

center child restraint. You can use either the ISOFIX

anchors for positions (1) and (3) or the vehicle’s seat

belt for installing the child seats in the outboard

positions.

(fig. 152)

Options for installing two child seats using the ISOFIX

anchorages in this vehicle:

1. Right and left outboard seating positions (1 and 3):

Install the child seats in the right and left outboard

seating positions using lower anchorages A and B,

and D and E. Do not use the center seat anchorage,

C. If the child seats do not block the center seat belt

webbing and buckle, the center seat belt can be

used to restraint an occupant or child restraint in

the center seating position.

2. Left outboard and center seating positions (3 and 2):

Install the first child seat in the left outboard seating

position using lower anchorages D and E. Install the

second child seat using the center anchorages, B and

C. Do not use the outer anchorage closest to the

opposite door, A. Do not use the remaining right

outboard seating position (1) for any occupant. The

center child restraint will block the seat belt buckle

for this position.

WARNING!

• Use anchorages B and C to install an

ISOFIX

child restraint in the center seat-

ing position (2). Do not install an ISOFIX child

restraint using anchorages C and D.This is not an

ISOFIX position in your vehicle.

• A child restraint installed in the center position

(2) will block the seat belt buckle for the empty

right outboard seating position (1). Do not use

this seat for another occupant.

• Never use the same lower anchorage to attach

more than one child restraint.

(Continued)

(fig. 152)

227

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

WARNING! (Continued)

• If you are installing three child restraints next

to each other, you must use the seat belt and the

center tether anchor for the center position.You

can then use either the ISOFIX anchors or the

vehicle’s seat belt for installing the child seats in

the outboard positions. Please refer to “Installing

the ISOFIX Child Restraint System” for typical

installation instructions.

SUITABILITY OF PASSENGER SEATS FOR

ISOFIX CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM USE

The table below shows the various installation possi-

bilities for ISOFIX child restraint systems on seats

fitted with ISOFIX anchorages in accordance with Eu-

ropean standard ECE 16.

Vehicle ISOFIX Positions Chart

Mass

Group

Size

Class

Fixture

Front

Passen-

ger

Rear

Out-

board

Rear

Center

Interme-

diate

Out-

board

Right /

Left

Interme-

diate

Center

Other

Sites

Carrycot

F ISO/L1 X X X **IUF / X **IUF X

G ISO/L2 X X X X / **IUF X X

(1)XXXXX X

0—upto

10 kg

E ISO/R1 X X X

*IUF /

*IUF

*IUF X

(1)XXXXX X

228

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Vehicle ISOFIX Positions Chart

Mass

Group

Size

Class

Fixture

Front

Passen-

ger

Rear

Out-

board

Rear

Center

Interme-

diate

Out-

board

Right /

Left

Interme-

diate

Center

Other

Sites

0+—up

to 13 kg

E ISO/R1 X X X

*IUF /

*IUF

*IUF X

D ISO/R2 X X X

*IUF /

*IUF

*IUF X

C ISO/R3 X X X

*IUF /

*IUF

*IUF X

(1)XXXXX X

I–9to

18 kg

D ISO/R2 X X X

*IUF /

*IUF

*IUF X

C ISO/R3 X X X

*IUF /

*IUF

*IUF X

B ISO/F2 X X X IUF / IUF IUF X

B1 ISO/F2X X X X IUF / IUF IUF X

A ISO/F3 X X X IUF / IUF IUF X

(1)XXXXX X

229

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Vehicle ISOFIX Positions Chart

Mass

Group

Size

Class

Fixture

Front

Passen-

ger

Rear

Out-

board

Rear

Center

Interme-

diate

Out-

board

Right /

Left

Interme-

diate

Center

Other

Sites

II–15to

25 kg

(1)XXXXX X

III–22to

36 kg

(1)XXXXX X

Key of letters used in the table above

(1) = For the CRS which do not carry the ISO/XX size

class identification (A to G), for the applicable mass

group, the car manufacturer shall indicate the vehicle

specific ISOFIX child restraint system(s) recommended

for each position.

IUF = Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraint sys-

tems of universal category approved for use in the mass

group.

X = ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child

restraint systems in this mass group and/or this size

class.

*IUF = With the seat in the mid-track position, seat

back must be adjusted so that it does not touch the

child seat.

**IUF = The Carr ycotF&Gcanonlybeinstalled with

the convertible top in the down position.

Always follow the directions of the child re-

straint manufacturer when installing your child

restraint. Not all child restraint systems will be

installed as described here. When using a Uni-

versal ISOFIX child restraint system, you can

only use approved child restraint systems with

the marking ECE R44 (release R44/03 or supe-

rior) “Universal ISOFIX”.

230

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

TO INSTALL AN ISOFIX CHILD

RESTRAINT:

1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower connectors and

on the tether strap of the child seat so that you can

more easily attach the connectors to the vehicle

anchorages.

2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages

for that seating position. For some second row

seats, you may need to recline the seat and / or raise

the head restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat

can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle,

you may wish to move it to its rear-most position to

make room for the child seat. You may also move

the front seat forward to allow more room for the

child seat.

3. Attach the connectors of the child restraint to the

lower anchorages in the selected seating position.

4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to

the top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing

Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage”

for directions to attach a tether anchor.

5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child

restraint rearward and downward into the seat.

Remove slack in the straps according to the child

restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by

pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt

path. It should not move more than 25 mm in any

direction.

WARNING!

• Improper installation of a child re-

raint to the ISOFIX anchorages can

lead to failure of the restraint.The child could be

badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint

manufacturer’s directions exactly when install-

ing an infant or child restraint.

• Child restraint anchorages are designed to

withstand only those loads imposed by correctly-

fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances

are they to be used for adult seat belts,harnesses,

or for attaching other items or equipment to the

vehicle.

• Install the child restraint system when the ve-

hicle is stationary. The ISOFIX child rest raint

system is correctly fixed to the brackets when

you hear the click .

231

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

INSTALLING CHILD RESTRAINTS USING

THE TOP TETHER ANCHORAGE:

1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to

install the child restraint to find the tether anchor-

age. You may need to move the seat forward to

provide better access to the tether anchorage. If

there is no top tether anchorage for that seating

position, move the child restraint to another posi-

tion in the vehicle if one is available. (fig. 153)

2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct

path for the strap between the anchor and the child

seat. If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear

head restraints, raise the head restraint, and where

possible, route the tether strap under the head

restraint and between the two posts. If not possible,

lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap

around the outboard side of the head restraint.

3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint

to the top tether anchorage as shown in the dia-

gram. (fig. 154)

4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the

child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

(fig. 153)

Seat Track Release Lever

(fig. 154)

Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting

232

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

WARNING!

• An incorrectly anchored tether strap

could

lead to increased head motion and

possible injury to the child. Use only the anchor-

age position directly behind the child seat to

secure a child restraint top tether strap.

• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear

seat,make sure the tether strap does not slip into

the opening between the seatbacks as you re-

move slack in the strap.

WARNING!

The child restraint owner’s manual pro-

vides ins

tructions for installing the child

restraint using the seat belt. Read and follow

these instructions to install the child seat

properly.

Transporting Pets

Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your

pet. An unrestrained pet could be thrown about and

possibly injured, or injure a passenger during panic

braking or in a collision.

Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet har-

nesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.

SAFETY TIPS

Transporting Passengers

NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO

AREA.

WARNING!

• Do not leave children or animals inside

park

ed vehicles in hot weather. Interior

heat build-up may cause serious injury or death.

• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo

area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,

people riding in these areas are more likely to be

seriously injured or killed.

• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your

vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat

belts.

• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and

using a seat belt properly.

• On seven passenger models, do not drive the

vehicle with the second row passenger seat in the

easy entry/exit position (seat cushion flipped up-

ward and seat moved forward), as this position is

only intended for entering and exiting the third

row seats. Failure to follow this warning may

result in personal injury.

(Continued)

233

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

WARNING! (Continued)

• On seven passenger models, do not allow a

passenger to sit in a third row seat with the

second row seatback(s) folded flat. In a collision,

the passenger could slide underneath the seat

belt and be seriously or even fatally injured.

Exhaust Gas

WARNING!

Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They

contain

carbon monoxide (CO), which is

colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you

unconscious and can eventually poison you. To

avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips:

• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in

confined areas any longer than needed to move

your vehicle in or out of the area.

• If you are required to drive with the trunk/

liftgate/rear doors open, make sure that all win-

dows are closed and the climate control

BLOWER switch is set at high speed.DO NOT use

t he recirculation mode.

• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with

the engine running,adjust your heating or cooling

controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set

the blower at high speed.

The best protection against carbon monoxide entry

into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine

exhaust system.

Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the

exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected

inside the vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the

vehicle is damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect

the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas

for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned

parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit

exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compart-

ment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each time

the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change.

Replace as required.

Safety ChecksYou Should Make Inside The

Vehicle

Seat Belts

Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for

cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be

replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify

the system.

Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a

collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced

after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent

retractor, torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question

regarding belt or retractor condition, replace the seat

belt.

234

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Air Bag Warning Light

The light should turn on and remain on for

four to six seconds as a bulb check when the

ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light

is not lit during starting, or if the light stays

on, flickers, or turns on while driving, have the system

checked by an authorized dealer.

Defroster

Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and

place the blower control on high speed. You should be

able to feel the air directed against the windshield. See

your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is

inoperable.

Floor Mat Safety Information

Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of

your vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal

area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that

they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the

pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other

ways.

WARNING!

Pedals that cannot move freely can

cause loss of

vehicle control and increase

the risk of serious personal injury.

• Always make sure that floor mats are properly

attached to the floor mat fasteners.

• Never place or install floor mats or other floor

coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly

secured to prevent them from moving and inter-

fering with the pedals or the ability to control the

vehicle.

• Never put floor mats or other floor cover ings

on top of already installed floor mats.Additional

floor mats and other coverings will reduce the

size of the pedal area and interfere with the

pedals.

• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis.

Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats

that have been removed for cleaning.

• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into

the driver footwell while the vehicle is moving.

Objects can become trapped under t he brake

pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss of

vehicle control.

(Continued)

235

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

WARNING! (Continued)

• If required, mounting posts must be properly

installed, if not equipped from the factory. Fail-

ure to properly follow floor mat installation or

mounting can cause interference with the brake

pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing

loss of control of the vehicle.

Periodic Safety ChecksYou Should Make

Outside The Vehicle

Tires

Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven

wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other

objects lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the

tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts,

cracks and bulges. Check the wheel nuts for tightness.

Check the tires (including spare) for proper cold infla-

tion pressure.

Lights

Have someone obser ve the operation of brake lights

and exterior lights while you work the controls. Check

turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instru-

ment panel.

Door Latches

Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.

Fluid Leaks

Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for

fuel, engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if

gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering

fluid (for versions/markets, where provided), or brake

fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be located

and corrected immediately.

236

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

STARTING AND DRIVING

ENGINE BREAK-IN

RECOMMENDATIONS

A long break-in period is not required for the engine

and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.

Drive moderately during the first 500 km. After the

initial 100 km, speeds up to 80 or 90 km/h are desirable.

While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration, within

the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good

break-in. Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear

can be detrimental and should be avoided.

The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a

high-quality energy-conserving type lubricant. Oil

changes should be consistent with anticipated climate

conditions under which vehicle operations will occur.

For the recommended viscosity and quality grades,

refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Servicing And

Care”. NON-DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL

OILS MUST NEVER BE USED.

A new engine may consume some oil during its first few

thousand kilometers of operation. This should be con-

sidered a normal part of the break-in and not inter-

preted as an indication of difficulty.

STARTING PROCEDURES

Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the

inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if

present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their

seat belts.

WARNING!

• Before exiting a vehicle, always apply

e par king brake, shift the transmission

into PARK, and remove the Key Fob from the

ignition. When leaving the vehicle, always lock

your vehicle.

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with

access to an unlocked vehicle.

• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended

is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or

others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-

dren should be warned not to touch the parking

brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.

(Continued)

237

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENC

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle

(or in a location accessible to children), and do

not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with

Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN

mode. A child could operate power windows,

other controls, or move t he vehicle.

• Do not leave animals or children inside parked

vehicles in hot weather; interior heat buildup

may cause serious injury or death.

KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™

This feature allows the driver to op-

erate the ignition switch with the

push of a button, as long as the Re-

mote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmit-

ter is in the passenger compartment.

NORMAL STARTING — GASOLINE ENGINE

UsingThe ENGINE START/STOP Button

1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.

2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the

ENGINE START/STOP button once.

3. The system takes over and attempts to start the

vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will

disengage automatically after 10 seconds.

4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior

to the engine starting, push the button again.

NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm

engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the

accelerator pedal.

To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE

START/STOP Button

1. Place the shift lever in PARK, then press and release

the ENGINE START/STOP button.

2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.

3. If the shift lever is not in PARK and the vehicle speed

is above 8 km/h, the ENGINE START/STOP button

must be held for two seconds before the engine

shuts off. The ignition switch position will remain in

the ACC position until the shift lever is in PARK and

the button is pressed twice to the OFF position. If

the shift lever is not in PARK and the ENGINE

START/STOP button is pressed once, the EVIC will

display a “Vehicle Not In Park” message and the

engine will remain running. Never leave a vehicle out

of the PARK position, or it could roll.

238

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENC

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN

(engine not running) position and the transmission is in

PARK, the system will automatically time out after 30

minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the

OFF position.

ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions –

With Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In

PARK Or NEUTRAL Position)

The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to

an ignition switch. It has four positions, OFF, ACC,

RUN and START. To change the ignition switch posi-

tions without starting the vehicle and use the accesso-

ries follow these steps.

• Starting with the ignition switch in the OFF position:

• Press the ENGINE START/STOP button once to

change the ignition switch to the ACC position,

• Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a second

time to change the ignition switch to the RUN

position,

• Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time

to return the ignition switch to the OFF position.

EXTREME COLD WEATHER

(BELOW −29°C)

To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use

of an externally powered electric engine block heater is

recommended.

IF ENGINE FAILS TO START

WARNING!

• Never pour fuel or other flammable

liqui

ds into the throttle body air inlet

opening in an attempt to start the vehicle. This

could result in a flash fire causing serious per-

sonal injury.

• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to

get it started. Unburned fuel could enter the

catalytic converter and once the engine has

started, ignite and damage the converter and

vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery,

booster cables may be used to obtain a start from

a booster battery or the battery in another ve-

hicle.This type of start can be dangerous if done

improperly. Refer to “Jump Starting” in “In An

Emergency” for further information.

239

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENC

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE

START/STOP Button)

If the engine fails to start after you have followed the

“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather" proce-

dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel:

1. Press and hold the brake pedal.

2. Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor

and hold it.

3. Push and release the ENGINE START/STOP button

once.

The starter motor will engage automatically, run for 10

seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs, release

the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15

seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” proce-

dure.

AFTER STARTING

The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will

decrease as the engine warms up.

NORMAL STARTING — DIESEL ENGINE

UsingThe ENGINE START/STOP Button

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position by

pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button twice.

2. Watch the “Wait To St art Indicator Light” in the

instrument cluster. Refer to “Instrument Cluster” in

“Warning Lights And Messages” for further infor-

mation. It will illuminate for two to ten seconds or

more, depending on engine temperature. When the

“Wait To Start Indicator Light” goes out, the engine

isreadytostart.

3. DO NOT press the accelerator. To start the engine,

the transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.

Press the brake pedal (automatic transmission only)

or press and hold the clutch pedal (manual transmis-

sion only) while pressing and holding the ENGINE

START/STOP button. Release the button when the

engine starts.

NOTE: The starter motor may need to remain

engaged for up to 30 seconds in very cold conditions

until the engine is started. If the vehicle does not star t,

release the button. Wait for 25-30 seconds and then

try to start again.

4. After the engine starts, allow it to idle for approxi-

mately 30 seconds before driving. This allows oil to

circulate and lubricate the turbocharger.

240

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENC

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE

START/STOP Button

1. With the vehicle stopped, place the shift lever in

NEUTRAL/PARK, then press and release the EN-

GINE START/STOP button.

2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.

NOTE:

• If the ignition switch is left in the ACC position, the

system will automatically time out after 30 minutes

of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the OFF

position.

• If the ignition switch is left in the RUN position, the

system will automatically time out after 30 minutes

of inactivity if the vehicle speed is 0 km/h and the

engine is not running.

• If the shift lever is not in PARK and the vehicle speed

is above 8 km/h, the ENGINE START/STOP button

must be held for two seconds before the engine

shuts off. The ignition switch position will remain in

the ACC position until the vehicle is stopped and the

button is pressed twice to the OFF position.

Turbocharger “Cool Down”

NOTE: Letting the engine idle after extended opera-

tion allows the turbine housing to cool to normal

operating temperature.

The following chart should be used as a guide in

determining the amount of engine idle time required to

sufficiently cool down the turbocharger before shut

down, depending upon the type of driving and the

amount of cargo.

TurboCharger “Cool Down” Chart

Driving Conditions Load

Turbocharger

Temperature

Idle Time (In Minutes)

Before Shut Down

Stop & Go Empty Cool Less than 1

Stop & Go Medium Warm 1

Highway Speeds Medium Warm 2

City Traffic

Maximum Gross Combina-

tion Weight Rating

Warm 3

241

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENC

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

TurboCharger “Cool Down” Chart

Driving Conditions Load

Turbocharger

Temperature

Idle Time (In Minutes)

Before Shut Down

Highway Speeds

Maximum Gross Combina-

tion Weight Rating

Warm 4

Uphill Grade

Maximum Gross Combina-

tion Weight Rating

Hot 5

PARKING BRAKE

Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking

brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave an

automatic transmission in PARK, or manual transmis-

sion in REVERSE or first gear.

Manual Transmission

The parking brake lever is located in the center con-

sole. To apply the parking brake, pull the lever up as

firmly as possible. To release the parking brake, pull the

lever up slightly, press the center button, then lower

the lever completely.

(fig. 155)

Parking Brake

242

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENC

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Automatic Transmission

The foot operated parking brake is located below the

lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the

park brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To

release the parking brake, press the park brake pedal a

second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake

disengage.

(fig. 156)

When the parking brake is applied with the ignition

switch ON, the “Brake Warning Light” in the instru-

ment cluster will illuminate.

NOTE:

• When the parking brake is applied and the automatic

transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning

Light” will flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime

will sound to alert the driver. Fully release the park-

ing brake before attempting to move the vehicle.

• This light only shows that the parking brake is ap-

plied. It does not show the degree of brake applica-

tion.

When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front

wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away

from the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped

with an automatic transmission, apply the parking

brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise

the load on the transmission locking mechanism may

make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK.

The parking brake should always be applied whenever

the driver is not in the vehicle.

(fig. 156)

Parking Brake

243

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENC

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

WARNING!

• Never use PARK position on an auto-

mat

ic transmission as a substitute for

the parking brake. Always apply the parking

brake fully when parked to guard agains t vehicle

movement and possible injury or damage.

• Before exiting a vehicle,always apply the park-

ing brake, shift the automatic transmission into

PARK and first gear or REVERSE for a manual

transmission, and remove t he Key Fob. When

leaving the vehicle, always lock your vehicle.

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with

access to an unlocked vehicle.

• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended

is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or

others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-

dren should be warned not to touch the parking

brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.

• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle

(or in a location accessible to children), and do

not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with

Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN

mode. A child could operate power windows,

other controls, or move t he vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged

before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake

failure and an accident.

• Always fully apply the parking brake when

leaving your vehicle or it may roll and cause

damage or injury. Also, be certain to leave an

automatic transmission in PARK , and a manual

transmission in REVERSE. Failure to do so may

cause the vehicle to roll and cause damage or

injury.

If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on

with the parking brake released, a brake

system malfunction is indicated. Have

the brake sys tem serviced by an authorized dealer

immediately.

244

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENC

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

MANUAL TRANSMISSION (for

versions/markets, where

provided)

WARNING!

You or others could be injured if you

leave t

he vehicle unattended without

having the parking brake fully applied.The park-

ing brake should always be applied when the

driver is not in the vehicle, especially on an

incline.

Fully press the clutch pedal before you shift gears. As

you release the clutch pedal, lightly press the accelera-

tor pedal.

(fig. 157)

Use each gear in numerical order, do not skip a gear. Be

sure the transmission is in first gear, (not third), when

starting from a standing position. Damage to the clutch

can result from starting in third.

For most city driving you will find it easier to use only

the lower gears. For steady highway driving with light

accelerations, sixth gear is recommended.

Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal,

or try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal

partially engaged. This will cause abnormal wear on the

clutch.

To shift into REVERSE, pull up on the ring just below

the gear shift knob and then move into the REVERSE

(R) position.

Never shift into REVERSE until the vehicle has come to

a complete stop.

NOTE: During cold weather, until the transmission

lubricant is warm, you may experience slightly higher

shift efforts. This is normal and not harmful to the

transmission.

(fig. 157)

Shift Pattern (Six-Speed)

245

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENC

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

DOWNSHIFTING

Proper downshifting will improve fuel economy and

prolong engine life.

If you skip a gear while downshifting or

downshift at too high of a vehicle speed,

these conditions may cause the engine to

overspeed if too low of a gear is selected and the

clutch pedal is released.Damage to the clutch and

the transmission can result from skipping a gear

while downshifting or downshifting at too high of

a vehicle speed even if the clutch pedal is held

pressed (i.e., not released).

To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life, shift

down to second or first when descending a steep

grade.

When turning a corner, or driving up a steep grade,

downshift early so that the engine will not be overbur-

dened.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (for

versions/markets, where

provided)

Damage to the transmission may occur if

the following precautions are not ob-

served:

• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after

the vehicle has come to a complete stop.

• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEU-

TRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle

speed.

• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your

foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while

shifting out of PARK.

246

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENC

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

WARNING!

• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or

NEUTRAL

if the engine speed is higher

than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing

the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate

quickly for ward or in reverse.You could lose con-

trol of the vehicle and hit someone or something.

Only shift into gear when the engine is idling

normally and your foot is firmly pressing the

brake pedal.

• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure

those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,

you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is

running. Before exit ing a vehicle, always apply

the parking brake, shift the transmission into

PARK, turn the engine OFF, and remove the Key

Fob.When the ignition is in the OFF position, the

transmission is locked in PARK, securing the ve-

hicle against unwanted movement.

• When leaving the vehicle,always make sure the

ignition is in the OFF position,remove the key fob

from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with

access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children

to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a

number of reasons. A child or others could be

seriously or fatally injured. Children should be

warned not to touch the parking brake, brake

pedal or the transmission gear selector.

• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle

(or in a location accessible to children), and do

not leave the ignit ion in the ACC or ON/RUN

position. A child could operate power windows,

other controls, or move t he vehicle.

KEY IGNITION PARK INTERLOCK

This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter-

lock which requires the transmission to be in PARK

before the engine can be turned off. This helps the

driver avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without

placing the transmission in PARK.

This system also locks the transmission in PARK when-

ever the ignition switch is in the OFF position.

247

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENC

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System

This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift

Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in

PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift the trans-

mission out of PARK, the ignition switch must be

turned to the ON/RUN position (engine running or

not) and the brake pedal must be pressed.

Four-Speed Or Six-Speed Automatic

Transmission

The transmission gear position display (located in the

instrument cluster) indicates the transmission gear

range. You must press the brake pedal to move the shift

lever out of PARK (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift

Interlock System” in this section). To drive, move the

shift lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE

position.

The electronically-controlled transmission provides a

precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are

self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new

vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal

condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few

hundred kilometers.

The electronically-controlled transmission provides a

precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are

self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new

vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal

condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few

hundred kilometers.

Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the

accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.

Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when

shifting between these gears.

248

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENC

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

The transmission shift lever has PARK, REVERSE,

NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick® (-/+) shift posi-

tions. Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick®

shift control (refer to “AutoStick®” in this section for

further information). Moving the shift lever into the

AutoStick® (-/+) position (below the Drive position)

activates Autostick® mode, providing manual shift

control and displaying the current gear in the instru-

ment cluster. In AutoStick® mode, tapping the shift

lever left (-) or right (+) will manually select the

transmission gear.

(fig. 158)

Gear Ranges

DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or

NEUTRAL into another gear range.

NOTE: After selecting any gear range , wait a moment

to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerat-

ing. This is especially important when the engine is

cold.

PARK (P)

This range supplements the parking brake by locking

the transmission. The engine can be started in this

range. Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is

in motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the

vehicle in this range.

When parking on a level surface, you may shift the

transmission into PARK first, and then apply the park-

ing brake.

When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before

shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load

on the transmission locking mechanism may make it

difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As an

added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the

curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an

uphill grade.

(fig. 158)

Shift Lever

249

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENC

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

WARNING!

• Never use the PARK position as a sub-

itute for the parking brake.Always ap-

ply the parking brake fully when parked to guard

against vehicle movement and possible injury or

damage.

• Your vehicle could move and injure you and

others if it is not completely in PARK. Check by

trying to move the shift lever out of PARK wi th

the brake pedal released. Make sure the trans-

mission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle.

• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEU-

TRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle

speed.If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake

pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly for-

ward or in reverse.You could lose control of the

vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift

into gear when the engine is idling normally and

your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure

those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,

you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is

running. Before exit ing a vehicle, always apply

the parking brake, shift the transmission into

PARK, turn the engine OFF, and remove the Key

Fob.When the ignition is in the OFF position, the

transmission is locked in the PARK, secur ing the

vehicle against unwanted movement.

• When leaving the vehicle,always make sure the

ignition is in the OFF position,remove the key fob

from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with

access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children

to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a

number of reasons. A child or others could be

seriously or fatally injured. Children should be

warned not to touch the parking brake, brake

pedal or the shift lever.

• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle

(or in a location accessible to children), and do

not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN

position. A child could operate power windows,

other controls, or move t he vehicle.

250

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENC

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

• Before moving the shift lever out of

PARK, you must turn the ignition switch

from the LOCK/OFF position to the ON/

RUN position, and also press the brake pedal.

Otherwise, damage to the shift lever could result.

• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from

PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as

this can damage the drivetrain.

The following indicators should be used to ensure that

you have engaged the transmission into the PARK

position:

• When shifting into PARK, firmly move the shift lever

all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is

fully seated.

• Look at the transmission gear position display and

verify that it indicates the PARK position.

• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever

will not move out of PARK.

REVERSE (R)

This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into

REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete

stop.

NEUTRAL (N)

Use this range when the vehicle is standing for pro-

longed periods with the engine running. The engine

may be st arted in this range. Apply the parking brake

and shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave

the vehicle.

WARNING!

Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never

turn of

f the ignition to coast down a hill.

These are unsafe practices that limit your re-

sponse to changing traffic or road conditions.You

might lose control of the vehicle and have a

collision.

Towing the vehicle , coasting, or driving

for any other reason with the transmis-

sion in NEUTRAL can cause severe trans-

mission damage. Refer to “Recreational Towing”

in “Starting and Driving” and “Towing A Disabled

Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for fur-

ther information.

DRIVE (D)

This range should be used for most city and highway

driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down-

shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission

automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The

DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris-

tics under all normal operating conditions.

251

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENC

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as

when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi-

tions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds,

or while towing heavy trailers), use the AutoStick®

shift control (refer to “AutoStick®” in this section for

further information) to select a lower gear. Under

these conditions, using a lower gear will improve per-

formance and extend transmission life by reducing

excessive shifting and heat buildup.

If the transmission temperature exceeds normal oper-

ating limits, the powertrain controller will modify the

transmission shift schedule and expand the range of

torque converter clutch engagement. This is done to

prevent transmission damage due to overheating.

During cold temperatures, transmission operation may

be modified depending on engine and transmission

temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature

improves warm up time of the engine and transmission

to achieve maximum efficiency.

Engagement of the torque converter clutch is inhibited

until the transmission fluid is warm (refer to the "Note"

under "Torque Converter Clutch" in this section).

During extremely cold temperatures (-27°C or below),

operation may briefly be limited to only second gear

(for four-speed transmission) or third gear (for six-

speed transmission).

Transmission Limp Home Mode

Transmission function is monitored electronically for

abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that

could result in transmission damage, Transmission

Limp Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the trans-

mission remains in second gear (for four-speed trans-

mission) or third gear (for six-speed transmission)

regardless of which forward gear is selected. PARK,

REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate.

The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illumi-

nated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be

driven to an authorized dealer for service without

damaging the transmission.

In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission

can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing

the following steps:

1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Shift the transmission into PARK.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF position.

4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.

5. Restart the engine.

6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no

longer detected, the transmission will return to

normal operation.

252

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENC

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we

recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at

your earliest possible convenience. Your authorized

dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the

problem could recur.

If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer

service is required.

Overdrive Operation

The automatic transmission includes an electronically

controlled Overdrive (top gear). The transmission will

automatically shift into Overdrive if the following con-

ditions are present:

• The shift lever is in the DRIVE position.

• The transmission fluid has reached an adequate tem-

perature.

• The engine coolant has reached an adequate tem-

perature.

• The vehicle speed is sufficiently high.

• The driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator.

Torque Converter Clutch

A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been

included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.

A clutch within the torque converter engages auto-

matically at calibrated speeds. This may result in a

slightly different feeling or response during normal

operation in the upper gears. When the vehicle speed

drops or during some accelerations, the clutch auto-

matically disengages.

NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage

until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are

warm (usually after 2 to 5 km of driving). Because the

engine speed is higher when the torque converter

clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the transmission

is not shifting into Overdrive when cold. This is normal.

Using the AutoStick® shift control, when the transmis-

sion is sufficiently warm, will demonstrate that the

transmission is able to shift into and out of Overdrive.

253

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENC

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

AUTOSTICK

AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature

providing manual shift control, giving you more control

of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize en-

gine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and down-

shifts, and improve overall vehicle performance.

This system can also provide you with more control

during passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions,

mountain driving, trailer towing, and many other situ-

ations.

OPERATION

When the shif t lever is in the AutoStick position

(below the DRIVE position), it can be moved from side

to side. This allows the driver to manually select the

transmission gear being used. Moving the shift lever to

the left (-) triggers a downshift and to the right (+) an

upshift. The current gear will be displayed in the instru-

ment cluster.

In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up or

down when the driver moves the shift lever to the right

(+) or left (-), unless an engine lugging or overspeed

condition would result. It will remain in the selected

gear until another upshift or downshift is chosen,

except as described below.

• The transmission will automatically upshift when

necessary to prevent engine over-speed.

• The transmission will automatically downshift as the

vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will

display the current gear.

• The transmission will automatically downshift to first

gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver

should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the

vehicle is accelerated.

• You can start out, from a stop, in first or second gear.

Tapping (+) (at a stop) will allow starting in second

gear. Starting out in second gear is helpful in snow or

icy conditions.

254

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENC

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

• If a requested downshift would cause the engine to

over-speed, that shift will not occur.

• Avoid using speed control when AutoStick is en-

gaged.

• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when

AutoStick is engaged.

• The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a

fault or overheat condition is detected.

To disengage AutoStick mode, return the shift lever to

the DRIVE position. You can shift in or out of the

AutoStick position at any time without taking your foot

off the accelerator pedal.

WARNING!

Do not downshift for additional engine

braking

on a slippery surface.The drive

wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could

skid, causing a collision or personal injury.

ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) (for

versions/markets, where

provided)

This feature provides on-demand All-Wheel Drive

(AWD). The system is automatic with no driver inputs

or additional driving skills required. Under normal

driving conditions, the front wheels provide most of

the traction. If the front wheels begin to lose traction,

power is shifted automatically to the rear wheels. The

greater the front wheel traction loss, the greater the

power transfer to the rear wheels.

Additionally, on dry pavement under heavy throttle

input (where one may have no wheel spin), torque will

be sent to the rear in a pre-emptive effort to improve

vehicle launch and performance characteristics.

All wheels must have the same size and

type tires. Unequal tire sizes must not be

used. Unequal tire size may cause failure

of the power transfer unit.

255

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENC

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES

ACCELERATION

Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other

slippery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull

erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs

when there is a difference in the surface traction under

the front (driving) wheels.

WARNING!

Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces

is dangerous

. Unequal traction can

cause sudden pulling of the front wheels. You

could lose control of the vehicle and possibly

have a collision. Accelerate slowly and carefully

whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice,

snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).

TRACTION

When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for

a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road

surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or

complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To

reduce this possibility, the following precautions should

be observed:

1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are

slushy.

2. Slow down if the road has standing water or

puddles.

3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first

become visible.

4. Keep tires properly inflated.

5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle

and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in

a sudden stop.

256

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENC

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

DRIVING THROUGH WATER

Driving through water more than a few centimeters

deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and

prevent damage to your vehicle.

FLOWING/RISING WATER

WARNING!

Do not drive on, or cross, a road or a

path w

here water is flowing and/or rising

(as in storm run-off). Flowing water can wear

away the road or path's surface and cause your

vehicle to sink into deeper water. Furthermore,

flowing and/or rising water can carry your vehicle

away swiftly. Failure to follow this warning may

result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you,

your passengers, and others around you.

Shallow Standing Water

Although your vehicle is capable of driving through

shallow standing water, consider the following Caution

and Warning before doing so.

• Always check the depth of the standing

water before driving through i t. Never

drive through standing water that is

deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted

on the vehicle.

• Determine the condition of the road or the path

that is under water and if there are any obstacles

in the way before driving through the standing

water.

• Do not exceed 8 km/h when driving through

standing water.This will minimize wave effect s.

• Driving through standing water may cause

damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain components.

Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine

oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contami-

nation (i.e.,fluid that is milky or foamy in appear-

ance) after driving through standing water.Do not

continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid ap-

pears contaminated, as this may result in further

damage. Such damage is not covered by the New

Vehicle Limited Warranty.

• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can

cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious

internal damage to the engine. Such damage is

not covered by the NewVehicle LimitedWarranty.

257

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENC

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

WARNING!

• Driving through standing water limits

your

vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do

not exceed 8 km/h when driving through standing

water.

• Driving through standing water limits your ve-

hicle’s braking capabilities, which increases stop-

ping distances. Therefore, after driving through

standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on

the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.

• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can

cause it to lock up and s tall out, and leave you

stranded.

• Failure to follow these warnings may result in

injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your

passengers, and others around you.

TRAILER TOWING

In this section you will find safety tips and information

on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do

with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully

review this information to tow your load as efficiently

and safely as possible.

To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty cover-

age, follow the requirements and recommendations in

this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.

COMMON TOWING DEFINITIONS

The following trailer towing related definitions will

assist you in understanding the following information:

GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your

vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo, and

tongue weight. The total load must be limited so that

you do not exceed the GVWR.

258

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENC

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

GrossTrailer Weight (GTW)

The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of

all cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or

temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its "loaded and

ready for operation" condition. The recommended way

to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on

a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be

supported by the scale.

Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)

The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your

vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination.

NOTE: The GCWR rating includes a 68 kg allowance

for the presence of a driver.

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and

rear axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear

axles evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either

front or rear GAWR.

WARNING!

It is important that you do not exceed

the

maximum front or rear GAWR. A

dangerous driving condition can result if either

rating is exceeded.You could lose control of the

vehicle and have an accident.

Tongue Weight (TW)

The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on

the hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases, it should not

be less than 7% or more than 10% of the trailer load.

Tongue weight must not exceed the lesser of either the

hitch certification rating, or the trailer tongue chassis

rating. It should never be less than 4% of the trailer

load, and not less than 25 kg. You must consider tongue

load as part of the load on your vehicle and its’ GAWR.

WARNING!

An improperly adjusted hitch system

may redu

ce handling, stability and brak-

ing performance and could result in an accident.

Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer

or a reputable trailer/dealer for additional infor-

mation.

Frontal Area

The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by

the maximum width of the front of a trailer.

Trailer Sway Control

Refer to “TSC (Trailer Sway Control)” under “Knowing

Your Vehicle/Electronic Brake Control System” for

further information.

259

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENC

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

BREAKAWAY CABLE ATTACHMENT

European braking regulations for braked trailers up to

3,500 kg require trailers to be fitted with either a

secondary coupling or breakaway cable.

The recommended location for attaching the normal

trailer's breakaway cable is in the stamped slot located

on the sidewall of the hitch receiver.

With Attachment Point

•

For detachable tow bar, pass the cable through the

attachment point and clip it back onto itself.

(fig. 159)

• For fixed ball tow bar, attach the clip directly to the

designated point. This alternative must be specifically

permitted by the trailer manufacturer since the clip

may not be sufficiently strong for use in the way.

(fig. 160)

(fig. 159)

Detachable Ball Clip Loop Method

(fig. 160)

Fixed Ball Clip Loop Method

260

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENC

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Without Attachment Points

• For detachable ball tow bar, you must follow the

recommended manufacturer or supplier procedure.

(fig. 161)

• For fixed ball tow bar, loop the cable around the neck

of the tow ball. If you fit the cable like this, use a single

loop only. (fig. 162)

(fig. 161)

Detachable Ball Neck Loop Method

(fig. 162)

Fixed Ball Neck Loop Method

261

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENC

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (MAXIMUM

TRAILER WEIGHT RATINGS)

The following chart provides the maximum trailer

weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.

Engine/Transmission Frontal Area Max. GTW (Gross

Trailer Wt.) (5 and 7

Passenger Model

Max.Trailer Tongue

Weight ♦ (5 and 7

Passenger Model)

2.4L/Automatic

2.0 sq m 454 kg 25 kg

3.6L/Automatic

3.7 sq m 1,100 kg 55 kg

2.0L Diesel/Manual

3.7 sq m 1,250 kg 62 kg

2.0L Diesel/Automatic

3.7 sq m 1,100 kg 44 kg

When towing a trailer the technically permissible laden weight may be exceeded by not more than 10% or 100 kg,

whichever is lower provided that the operating speed is restricted to 100 km/h or less.

Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds

♦ The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and it should

never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard.

TRAILER AND TONGUE WEIGHT

Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear

can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side

which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and

trailer. Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the

cause of many trailer accidents.

Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped

on your trailer hitch.

Consider the following items when computing the

weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:

• The tongue weight of the trailer.

• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment

put in or on your vehicle.

• The weight of the driver and all passengers.

262

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENC

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the

trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional

factory-installed options or dealer-installed options

must be considered as part of the total load on your

vehicle. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information

placard, located on the face of the driver's door or on

the driver's side “B” pillar, for the maximum combined

weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle.

TOWING REQUIREMENTS

To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive-

train components the following guidelines are recom-

mended:

• Do not tow a trailer at all during the

first 805 km the new vehicle is driven.The

engine, axle or other parts could be dam-

aged.

• Then, during the first 805 km that a trailer is

towed, do not drive over 80 km/h and do not make

starts at full throttle. This helps the engine and

other parts of t he vehicle wear in at the heavier

loads.

Perform the maintenance listed in the Maintenance

Schedule. When towing a trailer, never exceed the

GAWR ratings.

WARNING!

Improper towing can lead to an injury

acciden

t. Follow these guidelines to

make your trailer towing as safe as possible:

• Make certain that the load is secured in the

trailer and t hat it will not shift during travel.

When trailering cargo that is not fully secured,

dynamic load shifts can occur that may be diffi-

cult for the driver to control.You could lose con-

trol of your vehicle and have an accident.

• All trailer hitches should be professionally in-

stalled on your vehicle.

• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not

overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can

cause a loss of control, poor performance, or

damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission,

steering, suspension, chassis structure, or tires.

• Safety chains must always be used between

your vehicle and trailer. Always connect the

chains to the frame or hook retainers of the

vehicle hitch. Cross the chains under the trailer

tongue and allow enough slack for turning cor-

ners.

(Continued)

263

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENC

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

WARNING! (Continued)

• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a

grade.When parking, apply the parking brake on

the tow vehicle. Always, block or "chock" the

trailer wheels.

• GCWR must not be exceeded.

• Total weight must be distributed between

the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the

following four ratings are not exceeded:1.

GVWR 2. GTW 3. GAWR 4.Tongue weight rating

for the trailer hitch utilized.

Towing Requirements — Tires

• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a com-

pact spare tire.

• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential for the

safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer

to “Tires – General Information” in “Technical Speci-

fications” for proper tire inflation procedures.

• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres-

sures before trailer usage.

• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage

before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General

Information” in “Technical Specifications” for the

proper tire inspection procedures.

• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General

Information” in “Technical Specifications” for proper

tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a

higher load carrying capacity will not increase the

vehicle's GVWR and GAWR limits.

Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes

•Donot interconnect the hydraulic brake system or

vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the

trailer. This could cause inadequate braking and pos-

sible personal injury.

• When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic

surge actuated brake system, an electronic brake

controller is not required.

• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over

450 kg and required for trailers in excess of 750 kg.

If the trailer weighs more than 450 kg

loaded,it should have its own brakes,and

they should be of adequate capacity.Fail-

ure to do this could lead to accelerated brake

lining wear, higher brake pedal effort, and longer

stopping distances.

264

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENC

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

WARNING!

• Do not connect trailer brakes to your

vehi

cle's hydraulic brake lines. It can

overload your brake system and cause it to fail.

You might not have brakes when you need them

and could have an accident.

• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping

distance.When towing, you should allow for ad-

ditional space between your vehicle and the ve-

hicle in front of you. Failure to do so could result

in an accident.

Towing Requirements — Trailer Light s And

Wiring

Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer

size, stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are

required for motoring safety.

The Trailer Tow Package may include a seven-pin or a

thirteen-pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved

trailer harness and connector.

NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles

wiring harness.

The electrical connections are all complete to the

vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer

connector.

(fig. 163)

Pin Number Function Wire Color

1 Left Turn Signal Yellow

2 Rear Fog Light Blue

3 Ground/Common

Return

White

4 Right Turn Signal Green

(fig. 163)

Seven-Pin Connector

265

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENC

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Pin Number Function Wire Color

5 Right Rear Position,

Side Marker Lights,

and Rear

Registration Plate

Illumination

Device. b

Brown

6 Stoplights Red

7 Left Rear Position,

Side Marker Lights,

and Rear Registra-

tion Plate Illumina-

tion Device. b

Black

b The rear position registration plate illumination device

shall be connected such that no light of the device has a

common connection with both pins 5 and 7.

(fig. 164)

Pin Number Function Wire Color

1 Left Turn Signal Yellow

2 Rear Fog Light Blue

3 a Ground/Common

Return for Contacts

(Pins) 1 and 2 and 4

to 8

White

4 Right Turn Signal Green

(fig. 164)

Thirteen-Pin Connector

266

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENC

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Pin Number Function Wire Color

5 Right Rear Position,

Side Marker Lights,

and Rear Registra-

tion Plate Illumina-

tion Device. b

Brown

6 Stoplights Red

7 Left Rear Position,

Side Marker Lights,

and Rear Registra-

tion Plate Illumina-

tion Device. b

Black

8 Reverse lights Red/Black

9 Permanent Power

Supply (+12V)

Brown/White

10 Power Supply Con-

trolled by Ignition

Switch (+12V)

Red

Pin Number Function Wire Color

11 a Return for Cont act

(Pin) 10

White

12 Reserve for Future

Allocation

Red/Blue

13 a Return for Cont act

(Pin) 9

White

Note: The allocation pin 12 has been changed from

“Coding for coupled Trailer” to “Reserve for Future Al-

location.”

a The three return circuits shall not be connected elec-

trically in the trailer.

b The rear position registration plate illumination device

shall be connected such that no light of the device has a

common connection with both pins 5 and 7.

267

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENC

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

TOWING TIPS

Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping,

and backing up the trailer in an area located away from

heavy traffic.

Manual Transmission (for versions/markets,

where provided)

If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer towing,

all starts must be in FIRST gear to avoid clutch slippage.

Automatic Transmission (for versions/

markets,where provided)

The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. How-

ever, if frequent shifting occurs while in DRIVE, use the

AutoStick® shift control to manually select a lower

gear.

NOTE: Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle

under heavy loading conditions will improve perfor-

mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces-

sive shifting and heat build up. This action will also

provide better engine braking.

If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45

minutes of continuous operation, then change the

transmission fluid and filter as specified for “police,

taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.” Refer to the

“Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance

intervals.

NOTE: Check the transmission fluid level (four-speed

transmission only) before towing. The six-speed trans-

mission does not require a fluid level check before

towing. If, however, you notice fluid leakage or trans-

mission malfunction, see your authorized dealer imme-

diately for assistance.

Electronic Speed Control

• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.

• When using the speed control, if you experience

speed drops greater than 16 km/h, disengage until

you can get back to cruising speed.

• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads

to maximize fuel efficiency.

AutoStick®

• When using the AutoStick® shift control, select the

highest gear that allows for adequate performance

and avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose

“4” if the desired speed can be maintained. Choose

“3” or “2” if needed to maintain the desired speed.

• To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous

driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as neces-

sary to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return

to a higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and

road conditions allow.

268

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENC

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Cooling System

To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-

heating, take the following actions:

City Driving

When stopped for short periods, shif t the transmission

into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.

Highway Driving

Reduce speed.

Air Conditioning

Turn off temporarily.

TRAILER HITCH ATTACHING POINTS

Your vehicle will require extra equipment to tow a

trailer safely and efficiently. The trailer tow hitch must

be attached to your vehicle using the provided attach-

ing points on the vehicle's frame. Refer to the following

chart to determine the accurate attaching points.

Other equipment, such as trailer sway controls and

braking equipment, trailer equalizing (leveling) equip-

ment and low profile mirrors, may also be required or

strongly recommended.

(fig. 165)

TrailerTow Hitch Attaching Points And Overhang

Dimensions

A N/A

B 366.71 mm

C 501.62 mm

D 628.69 mm

E (maximum overhang) 1051.93 mm

F 472.00 mm

(fig. 165)

269

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENC

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)

TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE

Towing

Condition

Wheels OFF

the Ground

FWD MODELS MANUAL

TRANSMISSION

FWD MODELS

AUTOMATIC

TRANSMISSION

AWD MODELS

Flat Tow NONE

• Transmission in NEUTRAL

• Ignition in ACC or ON/RUN

position

NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED

Dolly Tow

Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED

Front OK OK NOT ALLOWED

On Trailer ALL OK OK OK

NOTE: When recreationally towing your vehicle, al-

ways follow applicable state and provincial laws. Con-

tact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for

additional details.

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Models

Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the

ground, or using a towing dolly) is NOT ALLOWED.

The only acceptable method for towing this vehicle

(behind another vehicle) is on a vehicle trailer with all

four wheels OFF the ground.

Towing this vehicle with ANY of its

wheels on the ground can cause severe

transmission and/or power transfer unit

damage. Damage from improper towing is not

covered under the NewVehicle Limited Warranty.

270

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENC

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models - Manual

Transmission

Front-wheel drive vehicles with manual transmis-

sions may be flat towed (with all four wheels on the

ground) at any legal highway speed, for any distance, if

the manual transmission is in NEUTRAL and the

ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position.

These vehicles may also be towed using a tow dolly

(with the front wheels OFF the ground), or on a flatbed

or vehicle trailer (with all four wheels OFF the ground).

Towing this vehicle in violation of the

above requirements can cause severe en-

gine and/or transmission damage. Dam-

age from improper towing is not covered under

the NewVehicle Limited Warranty.

Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models - Automatic

Transmission

This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle

trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the ground.

This vehicle may also be towed using a tow dolly (with

the front wheels OFF the ground).

• DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped

with an automatic transmission.Damage

to the drivetrain will result. If these ve-

hicles require towing, make sure all drive wheels

are OFF the ground.

• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above

requirements can cause severe transmission dam-

age.Damage from improper towing is not covered

under the NewVehicle Limited Warranty.

271

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENC

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

(fig. 166)

272

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENC

SERVICING

AND

CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

DESCRIPTIONS

1. Air Bag Warning Light

This light will turn on for four to eight sec-

onds as a bulb check when the ignition switch

is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is

either not on during starting, stays on, or

turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an

authorized dealer as soon as possible . Refer to “Occu-

pant Restraints” in “Safety” for further information.

2. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of

an onboard diagnostic system, called OBD, that

monitors engine and transmission control sys-

tems. The light will illuminate when the key is in the

ON/RUN position, before engine start. If the bulb does

not come on when turning the key from OFF to

ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.

Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,

poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the MIL after

engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the MIL

stays on through several of your typical driving cycles.

In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and

will not require towing.

Prolonged dr iving with the Malfunction

Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause

damage to the engine control system. It

also could affect fuel economy and driveability. If

the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter

damage and power loss will soon occur. Immedi-

ate service is required.

WARNING!

A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as

referenc

ed above, can reach higher tem-

peratures than in normal operating conditions.

This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park

over flammable substances such as dry plants,

wood,cardboard,etc.This could result in death or

serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.

273

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENC

SERVICING

AND

CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

3. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/

Malfunction Indicator Light (for versions/markets,

where provided)

The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator

Light” in the instrument cluster will come on

when the ignition switch is turned to the

ON/RUN position. It should go out with the

engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction In-

dicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine

running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC

system. If this light remains on after several ignition

cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several kilome-

ters at speeds greater than 48 km/h, see your autho-

rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem

diagnosed and corrected.

NOTE:

The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC

Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on mo-

mentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to

ON/RUN.

Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC

system will be ON, even if it was turned off previously.

The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds

when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop

when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver

that caused the ESC activation.

4. Turn Signal Indicator Light

The left or right arrow will flash in unison

with the corresponding front and rear turn

signal lights when the turn signal switch is

operated. (Refer to “Lights” in “Knowing

Your Vehicle” for further information).

NOTE:

A chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than

1.6 km with either turn signal on.

Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either

indicator flashes at a rapid rate.

5. High Beam Indicator

This light shows that the high beam headlights

are on. Pull the multifunction lever on the left

side of the steering column toward you to switch to

low beam. (Refer to “Lights” in “Knowing Your Vehicle”

for further information).

6. Front Fog Light Indicator (for versions/markets,

where provided)

This indicator will illuminate when the front fog

lights are on. (Refer to “Lights” in “Knowing

Your Vehicle” for further information).

274

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENC

SERVICING

AND

CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

7. Odometer Display / Electronic Vehicle Informa-

tion Center (EVIC) Display

Odometer

The odometer display shows the total distance the

vehicle has been driven.

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Dis-

play

The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-

tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the

instrument cluster. For further information, refer to

“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in

“Knowing Your Vehicle”.

8. Park/Headlight ON Indicator

This indicator will illuminate when the park

lights or headlights are turned on. (Refer to

“Lights” in “Knowing Your Vehicle” for fur-

ther information).

9. Tire Pressure MonitoringTelltale Light

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),

should be checked monthly when cold and

inflated to the inflation pressure recom-

mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the

vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been

equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system

(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale

when one or more of your tires is significantly under-

inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure tell-

tale light illuminates, you should stop and check your

tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper

pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire

causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.

Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire

tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and

stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for

proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s respon-

sibility to maintain correct tire pressure , even if under-

inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumina-

tion of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale .

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS

malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is

not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indica-

tor is combined with the low tire pressure telltale.

When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale

will flash for approximately one minute and then re-

main continuously illuminated. This sequence will con-

tinue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the

malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is

illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or

275

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENC

SERVICING

AND

CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions

may occur for a variety of reasons, including the inst al-

lation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on

the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning

properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale

light after replacing one or more tires or wheels on

your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alter-

nate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to

function properly.

The TPMS has been optimized for the

original equipment tires and wheels.

TPMS pressures and warning have been

established for the tire size equipped on your

vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor

damage may result when using replacement

equipment that is not of the same size, type,

and/or style .Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor

damage. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or

balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a

TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result. (Re-

fer to “Tire Inflation Pressures” under “Tires —

General Informat ion”and to“Tire Pressure Moni-

tor System (TPMS)” in “Knowing Your Vehicle” for

further information).

10. Seat Belt Reminder Light

When the ignition switch is first turned to

ON/RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight

seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check,

if the driver's seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound.

After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver seat

belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Warning Light

will flash or remain on continuously. Refer to “Occu-

pant Restraints” in “Safety” for further information.

11. Brake Warning Light

This light monitors various brake functions,

including brake fluid level and parking brake

application. If the brake light turns on it may

indicate that the parking brake is applied, that

the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem

with the anti-lock brake system reservoir.

If the light remains on when the parking brake has been

disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the

master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake

hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with

the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock

Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Program

(ESP) system. In this case, the light will remain on until

the condition has been corrected. If the problem is

related to the brake booster, the ABS pump will run

when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation

may be felt during each stop.

276

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENC

SERVICING

AND

CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

The dual brake system provides a reserve braking

capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the

hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual brake

system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which

will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master

cylinder has dropped below a specified level.

The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.

NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp

cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi-

tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and

the brake fluid level checked.

If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is

necessary.

WARNING!

Driving a vehicle with the red brake light

on is dan

gerous. Part of the brake sys-

tem may have failed. It will take longer to stop

the vehicle.You could have a collision. Have the

vehicle checked immediately.

Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System

(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force

Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the

Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS

Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.

Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked

by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to

the ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for

approximately two seconds. The light should then turn

off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault

is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the

light inspected by an authorized dealer.

The light also will turn on when the parking brake is

applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi-

tion.

NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is

applied. It does not show the degree of brake

application.

277

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENC

SERVICING

AND

CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

12. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light

This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake Sys-

tem (ABS). The light will turn on when the

ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN

position and may stay on for as long as four

seconds.

If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it

indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake sys-

tem is not functioning and that service is required.

However, the conventional brake system will continue

to operate normally if the Brake System Warning Light

is not on.

If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be

serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefit of

Anti-Lock brakes. Furthermore, the ABS light should

be checked frequently to assure that it is operating

properly. If the light does not turn on, have the system

checked by an authorized dealer. (Refer to “Electronic

Brake Control System” in “Knowing Your Vehicle” for

further information).

13. Fuel Cap Indicator

This symbol indicates the side of the vehicle

where the fuel filler cap is located.

14. Rear Fog Light Indicator

This indicator will illuminate when the rear fog

lights are on. (Refer to “Rear Fog Lights” in

“Knowing Your Vehicle” for further

information).

15. Vehicle Security Light

This light will flash rapidly for approximately

16 seconds when the vehicle security system

is arming and then flash slowly when the

system is armed. The light will also turn on

for about three seconds when the ignition switch is

first turned to ON/RUN. (Refer to “Vehicle Security

Alarm” or “Premium Security System” in “Knowing

Your Vehicle” for further information).

278

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENC

SERVICING

AND

CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

IN AN EMERGENCY

JUMP-STARTING

If your vehicle has a discharged batter y it can be

jump-started using a set of jumper cables and a battery

in another vehicle or by using a portable battery

booster pack. Jump-star ting can be dangerous if done

improperly so please follow the procedures in this

section carefully.

WARNING!

Do not attempt jump-starting if the bat-

tery is

frozen.It could rupture or explode

and cause personal injury.

Do not use a portable battery booster

pack or any other booster source with a

system voltage greater than 12 Volts or

damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator

or electrical system may occur.

NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack

follow the manufacturer's operating instructions and

precautions.

PREPARATIONS FOR JUMP-START

The battery in your vehicle is located between the left

front headlight assembly and the left front wheel splash

shield. To allow jump-starting, there are remote bat-

tery posts located on the left side of the engine com-

partment.

(fig. 167)

Remote Battery Posts

1 — Remote Positive (+) Post (Covered With Protective

Cap)

2 — Remote Negative (-) Post

279

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND

CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

WARNING!

• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling

fan

whenever the hood is raised. It can

start anytime the ignition switch is ON.You can

be injured by moving fan blades.

• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch

bands and bracelets that could make an inadver-

tent electrical contact. You could be seriously

injured.

• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn

your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas

which is flammable and explosive . Keep open

flames or sparks away from the battery.

1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmis-

sion into PARK and the manual transmission into

gear and turn the ignition to LOCK.

2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary elec-

trical accessories.

3. Remove the protective cover over the remote posi-

tive (+) battery post. To remove the cover, press

the locking tab and pull upward on the cover.

4. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery,

park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set

the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.

WARNING!

Do not allow vehicles to touch each

other

as this could establish a ground

connection and personal injury could result.

JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURE

WARNING!

Failure to follow this jump-starting pro-

cedure c

ould result in personal injury or

property damage due to battery explosion.

Failure to follow these procedures could

result in damage to the charging system

of the booster vehicle or the discharged

vehicle.

Connecting The Jumper Cables

1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to

the remote positive (+) post of the discharged

vehicle.

2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+)

jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the booster

battery.

3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to

the negative (-) post of the booster battery.

280

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND

CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-)

jumper cable to the remote negative (-) post of the

vehicle with the discharged battery.

WARNING!

Do not connect the jumper cable to the

negat

ive (-) post of the discharged bat-

tery. The resulting electrical spark could cause

the battery to explode and could result in per-

sonal injury. Only use the specific ground point,

do not use any other exposed metal parts.

5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster

battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then

start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged

battery.

6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper

cables in the reverse sequence:

Disconnecting The Jumper Cables

1. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the

remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with the

discharged battery.

2. Disconnect the neg ative end (-) of the jumper cable

from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.

3. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+)

jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the

booster battery.

4. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable

from the remote positive (+) post of the discharged

vehicle.

5. Reinstall the protective cover over the remote posi-

tive (+) battery post of the discharged vehicle.

If frequent jump-starting is required to star t your

vehicle, you should have the battery and charging

system inspected at your authorized dealer.

Accessories plugged into the vehicle

power outlets draw power from the vehi-

cle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e.,

cellular phones,etc.).Eventually,if plugged in long

enough without engine operation, the vehicle’s

battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade bat-

tery life and/or prevent t he engine from starting.

281

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND

CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE

SPECIFICATIONS

Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure

that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any

time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the

vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a

properly calibrated torque wrench.

TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS

Lug Nut/Bolt Torque **Lug

Nut/Bolt

Size

Lug

Nut/

Bolt

Socket

Size

135 N·m M12 x 1.25 19 mm

**Use only FIAT recommended lug nuts/bolts and clean

or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.

Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting

the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.

(fig. 168)

Wheel Mounting Surface

282

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND

CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each

nut/bolt has been tightened twice.

(fig. 169)

After 40 km check the lug nut/bolt torque to be sure

that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated against

the wheel.

WARNING!

To avoid the risk of forcing t he vehicle

off t

he jack, do not tighten the lug nuts

fully until the vehicle has been lowered.Failure to

follow this warning may result in personal injury.

JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING (for

versions/markets, where

provided)

WARNING!

• Do not attempt to change a tire on the

side

of the vehicle close to moving traf-

fic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the

danger of being hit when operating the jack or

changing the wheel.

• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.

The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you.

You could be crushed. Never put any part of your

body under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need

to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service

center where it can be raised on a lift.

• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle

is on a jack.

• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for

changing tires only.The jack should not be used to

lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle

should be jacked on a firm level surface only.

Avoid ice or slippery areas.

(fig. 169)

Torque Patterns

283

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND

CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

JACK LOCATION

The jack and jack-handle are stowed underneath a

cover in the rear storage bin in the cargo area.

(fig. 170)

SPARE TIRE LOCATION

The spare tire is stowed underneath the rear of the

vehicle and is held in place by means of a cable winch

mechanism.

PREPARATIONS FOR JACKING

1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface as far from

the edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or

slippery areas.

WARNING!

Do not attempt to change a tire on the

side of

the vehicle close to moving traf-

fic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the

danger of being hit when operating the jack or

changing the wheel.

2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers.

3. Set the parking brake.

4. Place the shift lever in PARK (automatic transmis-

sion) or in GEAR (manual transmission).

5. Turn OFF the ignition.

6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diago-

nally opposite of the jacking posi-

tion. For example, if changing the

right front tire, block the left rear

wheel.

NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle

when the vehicle is being jacked.

(fig. 170)

Jack Storage Location

284

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND

CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

SPARE TIRE REMOVAL

NOTE: On seven-passenger models, fold the third-

row passenger seats flat. This will provide more space

when accessing the jacking tools and when operating

the winch mechanism.

1. Remove the jack-handle components 1, 2 and 3

from storage and assemble them. (fig. 171)

NOTE: Assemble components 2 and 3 by seating the

small ball at the end of component 2 in the small hole at

the end of component 3. This will lock these compo-

nents together. Assemble components 1 and 2 so that

the wheel nut socket at the end of component 1 faces

upward when seated on component 2. This will make it

easier to rotate the assembly when operating the

winch mechanism.

2. Fit the assembled jack-handle over the winch drive

nut located in the jack storage area. Rotate the

jack-handle assembly counterclockwise until the

spare tire is on the ground with enough cable slack

to allow you to pull the spare tire out from under-

neath the vehicle.

The winch mechanism is designed for use

with the jack-handle only. Use of an air

wrench or other power tools is not rec-

ommended and it can damage the winch.

3. Pull the spare tire out from underneath the vehicle

and raise it upright so the tire's tread is on the

ground.

(fig. 171)

Lowering/Raising SpareTire

1 — Spare Tire Jack Handle

2 — Extension 1

3 — Extension 2

285

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND

CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

4. Tilt the retainer at the end of the winch cable and

remove it from the center of the wheel. (fig. 172)

SPARE TIRE STOWAGE

NOTE: Refer to “Spare Tire Removal” for information

on assembling the winch tools.

1. Place the spare tire near to the winch cable. Hold

the spare upright so that the tire's tread is on the

ground and the valve stem is at the top of the wheel

facing away from the rear of the vehicle.

2. Tilt the retainer at the end of the winch cable and

drop it through the center of the wheel. Then place

the spare tire with the cable and retainer under-

neath the vehicle.

3. Fit the assembled jack-handle over the winch drive

nut. Rotate the jack-handle assembly clockwise to

raise the spare tire into the storage area. Continue

to rotate the jack-handle assembly until you hear

the winch mechanism click three times. It cannot be

over tightened. Push against the tire several times to

be sure it is held securely in place.

JACKING INSTRUCTIONS

WARNING!

Carefully follow these tire changing

warnings

to help prevent personal injury

or damage to your vehicle:

• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from

the edge of the roadway as possible before rais-

ing the vehicle.

• Turn on the HazardWarning flashers.

• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel

to be raised.

• Set the parking brake firmly and set an auto-

matic transmission in PARK; a manual transmis-

sion in REVERSE.

• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle

on a jack.

• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on

a jack.

(Continued)

(fig. 172)

SpareTire Retainer

286

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND

CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a

jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle,

take it to a service center where it can be raised

on a lift.

• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and

for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.

• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely

careful of motor traffic.

• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are

securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the

valve stem facing the ground.

(fig. 173)

Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by

jacking on locations other than those

indicated in the Jacking Instructions for

this vehicle.

(fig. 174)

1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and jack-handle from

stowage.

2. Loosen, but do not remove, the wheel nuts on the

wheel with the flat tire. Turn the wheel nuts coun-

terclockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the

ground.

(fig. 173)

Jack Warning Label

(fig. 174)

Jacking Locations

287

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND

CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

3. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest

to the flat tire. Center the jack saddle between the

drain flute formations on the sill flange. Turn the

jack screw clockwise to firmly engage the jack saddle

with the lift area of the sill flange.

(fig. 175) (fig. 176) (fig. 177) (fig. 178)

4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clock-

wise with the jack handle. Raise the vehicle until the

tire just clears the road surface and enough clear-

ance is obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum

tire lift provides maximum stability.

(fig. 175)

Front Jacking Location

(fig. 176)

Front Jack Engaged With Jack Handle

(fig. 177)

Rear Jacking Location

288

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND

CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

WARNING!

Raising the vehicle higher than neces-

sary

can make the vehicle less stable. It

could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it.

Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire.

5. Remove the wheel nuts. For vehicles so equipped,

remove the wheel cover from the wheel by hand.

Do not pry the wheel cover off. Then pull the wheel

off the hub.

WARNING!

To avoid possible personal injury,handle

the

wheel covers with care to avoid con-

tact with any sharp edges.

6. Install the spare tire.

Be sure to mount the spare tire with the

valve stem facing outward. The vehicle

could be damaged if the spare tire is

mounted incorrectly.

(fig. 179)

(fig. 178)

Rear Jack Engaged With Jack Handle

(fig. 179)

Mounting Spare Tire

289

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND

CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

NOTE:

• For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a

center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare.

• Refer to “Compact Spare Tire” and to “Limited-Use

Spare” under “Tires — General Information” in

“Technical Specifications” for additional warnings,

cautions, and information about the spare tire, its

use, and operation.

7. Install the wheel nuts with the cone-shaped end of

the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the wheel

nuts.

WARNING!

To avoid the risk of forcing t he vehicle

off t

he jack, do not tighten the wheel

nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered.

Failure to follow this warning may result in per-

sonal injury.

8. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw coun-

terclockwise with the jack handle.

9. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the

wrench while at the end of the handle for increased

leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until

each nut has been tightened twice. Refer to “Torque

Specifications” in this section for proper lug nut

torque. If in doubt about the correct tightness, have

them checked with a torque wrench by your autho-

rized dealer or service station.

10. Lower the jack to its fully closed position.

11. Place the deflated (flat) tire in the cargo area. Do

not stow the deflated tire in the spare tire

stowage location. Have the deflated (flat) tire

repaired or replaced as soon as possible.

12. To stow the winch cable and retainer, fit the

assembled jack-handle over the winch drive nut.

Rotate the jack-handle assembly clockwise until

you hear the winch mechanism click three times. It

cannot be over tightened.

13. Stow the jack-handle and jack. Remove the wheel

blocks from the vehicle and release the park brake.

14. Check the tire pressure as soon as possible. Adjust

the tire pressure as required.

290

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND

CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

ROAD TIRE INSTALLATION

Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers

1. Mount the road tire on the axle.

2. To ease the installation process for steel wheels

with wheel covers, install two lug nuts on the

mounting studs which are on each side of the valve

stem. Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end

of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug

nuts.

WARNING!

To avoid the risk of forcing t he vehicle

off t

he jack, do not tighten the lug nuts

fully until the vehicle has been lowered.Failure to

follow this warning may result in personal injury.

(fig. 180)

3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the

valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand,

snapping the cover over the two lug nuts. Do not

use a hammer or excessive force to install the cover.

4. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped

end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the

lug nuts.

WARNING!

To avoid the risk of forcing t he vehicle

off t

he jack, do not tighten the lug nuts

fully until the vehicle has been lowered.Failure to

follow this warning may result in personal injury.

5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack

handle counterclockwise.

(fig. 180)

Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap

1 — Valve Stem 4 — Wheel Cover

2 — Valve Notch 5 — Mounting Stud

3 — Wheel Lug Nut

291

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND

CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

6. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the

wrench while at the end of the handle for increased

leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until

each nut has been tightened twice. For the correct

lug nut torque refer to Torque Specifications in this

section. If in doubt about the correct tightness, have

them checked with a torque wrench by your autho-

rized dealer or service station.

7. After 40 km check the lug nut torque with a torque

wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly

seated against the wheel.

Vehicles Without Wheel Covers

1. Mount the road tire on the axle.

2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped

end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the

lug nuts.

WARNING!

To avoid the risk of forcing t he vehicle

off t

he jack, do not tighten the lug nuts

fully until the vehicle has been lowered.Failure to

follow this warning may result in personal injury.

3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack

handle counterclockwise.

4. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the

wrench while at the end of the handle for increased

leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until

each nut has been tightened twice. For proper lug

nut torque refer to Torque Specifications in this

secton. If in doubt about the correct tightness, have

them checked with a torque wrench by your autho-

rized dealer or service station.

5. After 40 km check the lug nut torque with a torque

wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly

seated against the wheel.

292

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND

CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

TIRE SERVICE KIT (for versions/

markets, where provided)

Small punctures up to 6 mm in the tire tread can be

sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects (e .g.,

screws or nails) should not be removed from the tire.

Tire Service Kit can be used in outside temperatures

down to approximately -20°C.

This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you

to drive your vehicle up to 160 km with a maximum

speed of 88 km/hr.

TIRE SERVICE KIT STORAGE

The Tire Service Kit is stowed underneath a cover in

the rear storage bin in the cargo area.

TIRE SERVICE KIT COMPONENTS AND

OPERATION

(fig. 181)

UsingThe Mode Select Knob And Hoses

Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following

symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.

(fig. 181)

Tire Service Kit Components

1 — Sealant Bottle 5 — Mode Select Knob

2 — Deflation Button 6 — Sealant Hose (Clear)

3 — Pressure Gauge 7 — Air Pump Hose (Black)

4 — Power Button 8 — Power Plug (located on

bottom side of Tire Service Kit)

293

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND

CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

• Selecting Air Mode

Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to

this position for air pump operation only. Use

the Black Air Pump Hose (7) when selecting

this mode.

• Selecting Sealant Mode

Push in the Mode Select Knob (5)

and turn to this position to inject the

Tire Service Kit Sealant and to inflate

the tire. Use the Sealant Hose (clear

hose) (6) when selecting this mode.

• Using The Power Button

Push and release the Power Button (4) once

to turn On the Tire Service Kit. Push and

release the Power Button (4) again to turn

Off the Tire Service Kit.

• Using The Deflation Button

Press the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the

air pressure in the tire if it becomes over-

inflated.

TIRE SERVICE KIT USAGE PRECAUTIONS

• Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle (1) and

Sealant Hose (6) prior to the expiration date

(printed at the lower right hand corner on the bottle

label) to assure optimum operation of the system.

Refer to “Sealing a Tire with Tire Service Kit” section

(F) “Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement”.

(fig. 182)

• The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one

tire application use and need to be replaced after

each use. Always replace these components immedi-

ately at your original equipment vehicle dealer.

(fig. 182)

Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location

294

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND

CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

• When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form,

clean water, and a damp cloth will remove the mate-

rial from the vehicle or tire and wheel components.

Once the sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and

properly discarded.

• For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem

on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the

Tire Service Kit.

• You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate

bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles,

located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on

the bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls,

rafts, or similar inflatable items. However, use only

the Air Pump Hose (7) and make sure the Mode

Select Knob (5) is in the Air Mode when inflating

such items to avoid injecting sealant into them. The

Tire Service Kit Sealant is only intended to seal

punctures less than 6 mm diameter in the tread of

your vehicle.

• Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses.

WARNING!

• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the

side

of the vehicle closest to traffic. Pull

far enough off the road to avoid the danger of

being hit when using theTire Service Kit.

• Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle

under the following circumstances:

– If the puncture in the tire tread is approxi-

mately 6 mm or larger.

– If the tire has any sidewall damage.

– If the tire has any damage from driving with

extremely low tire pressure.

– If the tire has any damage from driving on a

flat tire.

– If the wheel has any damage.

– If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or

the wheel.

• KeepTire Ser vice Kit away from open flames or

heat source.

• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a

collision or hard stop could endanger the occu-

pants of the vehicle.Always stow theTire Service

Kit in the place provided. Failure to follow these

warnings can result in injuries that are serious or

fatal to you, your passengers, and others around

you.

(Continued)

295

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND

CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

WARNING! (Continued)

• Take care not to allow the contents of Tire

Service Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or

clothing. Tire Service Kit is harmful if inhaled,

swallowed, or absorbed through the skin. It

causes skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush

immediately with plenty of water if there is any

contact with eyes or skin. Change clothing as

soon as possible, if there is any contact wit h

clothing.

• Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex.

In case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a

physician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out

of reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth

immediately with plenty of water and drink

plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult

a physician immediately.

SEALING A TIRE WITH TIRE SERVICE KIT

(A) Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service

Kit:

1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s

Hazard Warning flashers.

2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the

deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the

ground. This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hoses

(6) and (7) to reach the valve stem and keep the Tire

Service Kit flat on the ground. This will provide the

best positioning of the kit when injecting the sealant

into the deflated tire and running the air pump.

Move the vehicle as necessary to place the valve

stem in this position before proceeding.

3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission)

or in Gear (manual transmission) and turn Off the

ignition.

4. Set the parking brake.

(B) Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:

1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the

Sealant Mode position.

2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the

cap from the fitting at the end of the hose.

3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to

the deflated tire.

4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw

the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto

the valve stem.

5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into

the vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.

296

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND

CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or

nails) from the tire.

Deflated Tire:

• Always start the engine before turning ON the Tire

Service Kit.

NOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the

parking brake engaged and the shift lever in NEUTRAL.

• After pressing the Power Button (4), the sealant

(white fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1)

through the Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire.

NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in

the tire.

If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0

– 10 seconds through the Sealant Hose (6):

1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn Off the Tire

Service Kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from

the valve stem. Make sure the valve stem is free of

debris. Reconnect the Sealant Hose (6) to the valve

stem. Check that the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the

Sealant Mode position and not Air Mode. Press the

Power Button (4) to turn On the Tire Service Kit.

2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt

power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if

available. Make sure the engine is running before

turning ON the Tire Service Kit.

3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previ-

ous use. Call for assistance.

NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode

and the pump is operating, air will dispense from the

Air Pump Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6).

If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the

Sealant Hose (6):

1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no

longer flowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70

seconds). As the sealant flows through the Sealant

Hose (6), the Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as

4.8 Bar. The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease

quickly from approximately 4.8 Bar to the actual tire

pressure when the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty.

2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire

immediately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty.

Continue to operate the pump and inflate the tire

to the pressure indicated on the tire pressure label

on the driver-side latch pillar (recommended pres-

sure). Check the tire pressure by looking at the

Pressure Gauge (3).

297

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND

CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

If the tire does not inflate to at least 1.8 Bar

pressure within 15 minutes:

• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to

drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance.

NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, press the

Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the

recommended inflation pressure before continuing.

If the tire inflates to the recommended pres-

sure or is at least 1.8 Bar pressure within 15

minutes:

1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn off the Tire

Service Kit.

2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the

Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the

instrument panel.

3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from

the valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the

end of the hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in the

vehicle storage location. Quickly proceed to (D)

“Drive Vehicle”.

• The metal end fitting from Power Plug

(8) may get hot after use, so it should be

handled carefully.

• Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the

end of the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant

contacting your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s

interior. It can also result in sealant contacting

internal Tire Service Kit components which may

cause permanent damage to the kit.

(D) Drive Vehicle:

Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire,

drive the vehicle 8 km or 10 minutes to ensure distri-

bution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire.

Do not exceed 88 km/h.

WARNING!

Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat

tire re

pair. Have the tire inspected and

repaired or replaced after using Tire Ser vice Kit.

Do not exceed 88 km/h until the tire is repaired

or replaced. Failure to follow this warning can

result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you,

your passengers, and others around you.

298

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND

CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

(E) After Driving:

Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You

Stop to Use Tire Service Kit” before continuing.

1. Turn the Mode Select Knob (5) to the Air Mode

position.

2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the

vehicle's 12 Volt power outlet.

3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and

screw the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the

valve stem.

4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pres-

sure Gauge (3).

If tire pressure is less than 1.3 Bar, the tire is too

badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle

further. Call for assistance.

If the tire pressure is 1.3 bar or higher:

1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn on Tire Service

Kit and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on

the tire and loading information label on the driver-

side door opening.

NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, press the

Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the

recommended inflation pressure before continuing.

2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve

stem, reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug

from 12 Volt outlet.

3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area

in the vehicle.

4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at

the earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or

tire service center.

5. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6)

assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as pos-

sible. Refer to “(F) Sealant Bottle and Hose Replace-

ment.”

NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the

authorized dealer or service center that the tire has

been sealed using the Tire Service Kit.

299

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND

CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:

1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color).

2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in

the recessed area under the sealant bottle.

3. Press the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant

Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and

dispose of it accordingly.

4. Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire Service

Kit housing.

5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so

that the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in

the front of the housing. Press the bottle into the

housing. An audible click will be heard indicating the

bottle is locked into place.

6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the

end of the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to

its storage area (located on the bottom of the air

pump).

7. Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage location in

the vehicle.

REPLACEMENT BULBS

All the inside bulbs are brass or glass wedge base.

Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not

be used for replacement.

LIGHT BULBS – Interior Bulb Number

Courtesy/Reading Lamps (Incandescent) .......578

Courtesy/Reading Lamps (Optional LED) ......LED

(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)

Glove Box Lamp ........................194

Cargo Lamp ...........................579

Optional Door Map Pocket/Cupholder .......LED

(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)

NOTE: For lighted switches, see your authorized

dealer for replacement instructions.

300

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND

CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

LIGHTS BULBS – Outside Bulb No.

Low Beam Headlamp ....................H11

High Beam Headlamp ................HB3/9005

Front Turn Signal ..............PY27W/3757AK

Front Position Lamp ...................W5W

Front Fog Lamp .....................PSX24W

Rear Fog Lamp .......................PS19W

Side Repeater Lamp ...................WY5W

Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)....LED

(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)

Rear Tail/Stop

..........................LED

(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)

RearTailLiftgate........................LED

(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)

Rear Turn Signal .....................WY21W

Backup Lamp ........................W21W

License Lamp .........................W5W

BULB REPLACEMENT

NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo-

spheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmo-

spheric conditions change to allow the condensation to

change back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will

usually accelerate the clearing process.

Where possible, it is advisable to have

bulbs changed at a FIAT Dealership.

Proper operation and orientation of the

external lights are essential for driving safety and

complying with the law.

LOW BEAM/HIGH BEAM/FRONT TURN

SIGNAL AND FRONT POSITION LAMP

1. Open the hood.

NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the air cleaner

filter housing and position the Tot ally Integrated Power

Module (TIPM) aside to replace certain lamps in the left

headlamp housing.

301

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND

CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Rotate the applicable bulb and connector assembly ¼

turn counterclockwise and remove the assembly

from the headlamp housing.

(fig. 183)

3. Disconnect the bulb from the harness connector

and then connect the replacement bulb.

Do not touch the new bulb with your

fingers. Oil contamination will severely

shorten bulb life. If the bulb comes in

contact with any oily surface, clean the bulb with

rubbing alcohol.

4. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the

headlamp housing and rotate it ¼ turn clockwise to

lock it in place.

FRONT FOG LAMP

NOTE: Turn the steering wheel to the right if replac-

ing the left front fog lamp or to the left if replacing the

right front fog lamp to allow for easier access to the

front of the wheel well.

1. Remove the fasteners retaining the front lower

wheel well access panel and remove the access

panel.

2. Remove the electrical connector from the fog lamp

housing. (fig. 184)

(fig. 183)

1 — Front Turn Signal Lamp Bulb

2 — Low Beam Headlamp Bulb

3 — Front Position Bulb

4 — High Beam Headlamp Bulb

(fig. 184)

Front Fog Lamp Electrical Connector

302

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND

CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

3. Firmly grasp the bulb by the two side latches and

squeeze them together to unlock the bulb from the

back of the front fog lamp housing.

4. Pull the bulb straight out from the keyed opening in

the housing.

5. Align the index tabs of the replacement front fog

lamp bulb with the slots in the collar of the bulb

opening on the back of the front fog lamp housing.

Do not touch the new bulb with your

fingers. Oil contamination will severely

shorten bulb life. If the bulb comes in

contact wi th an oily surface, clean the bulb wit h

rubbing alcohol.

6. Insert bulb into the lamp housing until the index

tabs are engaged in the slots of the collar.

7. Firmly and evenly push the bulb straight into the

lamp housing until both side latches lock firmly into

place.

REAR FOG LAMP

1. Reach behind the bumper above the bumper rein-

forcement and press the release tabs on the fog

lamp housing. (fig. 185)

2. Separate the fog lamp housing from the bumper

fascia.

3. Disconnect the electrical harness connector.

(fig. 186)

(fig. 185)

Release Tabs

(fig. 186)

Electrical Connector

303

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND

CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

4. Firmly grasp the bulb by the two side latches and

squeeze them together to unlock the bulb from the

back of the lamp housing.

5. Pull the bulb straight out from the keyed opening in

the housing.

6. Remove the bulb from the connector socket and

install the replacement bulb.

7. Align the index tabs of the replacement rear fog

lamp bulb/socket assembly with the slots in the

collar of the bulb opening on the back of the lamp

housing.

8. Insert bulb into the lamp housing until the index

tabs are engaged in the slots of the collar.

9. Firmly and evenly push the bulb straight into the

lamp housing until both side latches lock firmly into

place.

10. Reinstall the fog lamp housing.

SIDE REPEATER LAMP

The side repeater lamps are located in both front

fender panels.

1. Push the side repeater lens to left side to release the

spring tension and then pull it outward.

2. Disconnect the bulb from the harness connector

and then connect the replacement bulb. (fig. 187)

3. Engage the right hook of the side repeater lamp into

the sheet metal (note correct orientation of letter-

ing on lens).

4. Rotate the side repeater lamp in place until the left

side engages (you will hear a light click).

(fig. 187)

Side Repeater Bulb Removal

304

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND

CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

REAR TURN SIGNAL AND BACKUP LAMP

The taillamps are a two-piece design. The t ail/stop/rear

turn signal lamps are located in the rear corner body

panels. The tail and backup lamps are located in the

liftgate.

Changing The Rear Turn Signal Lamp

1. Open the liftgate.

2. Remove the two fasteners from the inboard side of

the taillamp housing. (fig. 188)

3. Carefully insert a trim stick (plastic flat-blade tool)

between the body panel and the outboard side of

the taillamp housing with one hand and grasp the

flange on the inboard side of the taillamp housing

with the other hand. Use the trim stick and hand

pressure together to diseng age the taillamp housing

from the vehicle.

4. Rotate the applicable bulb's electrical connector ¼

turn counterclockwise and remove it from the tail-

lamp housing.

5. Remove the bulb from the connector socket and

install the replacement bulb.

6. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the

taillamp housing and rotate the connector ¼ turn

clockwise to lock it in place.

7. Reinstall the taillamp housing and fasteners.

(fig. 188)

InboardTail Lamp Housing Fasteners

305

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND

CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Changing The Backup Lamp

1. Open the liftgate.

2. Remove the two fasteners retaining the taillamp

housing to the liftgate from the inboard face of the

liftgate. (fig. 189)

3. Carefully insert a trim stick (plastic flat-blade tool)

between the taillamp housing and the liftgate. Use

the trim stick and hand pressure together to disen-

gage the taillamp housing from the liftgate.

(fig. 190)

4. Rotate the applicable bulb's electrical connector ¼

turn counterclockwise and remove it from the

housing.

5. Remove the bulb from the connector socket and

install the replacement bulb.

6. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the

housing and rotate the connector ¼ turn clockwise

to lock it in place.

7. Reinstall the taillamp housing and fasteners.

(fig. 189)

Tail Lamp Housing Retainers

(fig. 190)

Tail Gate Lamp

306

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND

CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

LICENSE PLATE LAMP

1. Push the small locking tab sticking out of the end of

the lens toward the side of the vehicle and hold it in

that position.

2. Insert a small flat-blade tool between the end of the

lens with the locking tab and the surrounding hous-

ing and then pivot the tool to separate the lens from

the housing.

3. Hold the lens with one hand and rotate the bulb's

electrical connector ¼ turn counterclockwise with

the other hand and then separate the bulb and

connector assembly from the lens.

4. Remove the bulb from the connector socket and

install the replacement bulb.

5. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the

lens and rotate the connector ¼ turn clockwise to

lock it in place.

6. Insert the end of the lens without the locking tab

into the housing on the liftgate and then push the

opposite end of the lens into the housing, making

sure it locks in the housing.

FUSES

WARNING!

• When replacing a blown fuse, always

use an

appropriate replacement fuse

with the same amp rating as the original fuse.

Never replace a fuse with another fuse of higher

amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with

metal wires or any other material. Failure to use

proper fuses may result in serious personal in-

jury, fire and/or property damage .

• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the

ignition is off and that all the other services are

switched off and/or disengaged.

• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an

authorized dealer.

• If a general protection fuse for safety systems

(air bag system, braking system), power unit sys-

tems (engine system, gearbox system) or steering

system blows , contact an authorized dealer.

307

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND

CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

INTERIOR FUSES

The interior fuse panel is located on the passenger side

under the instrument panel.

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description

F100 30 Amp Pink

110V AC Inverter – For Versions/Markets,

Where Provided

F101 10 Amp Red Interior Lights

F102 20 Amp Yellow

Cigar Lighter in Instrument Panel/Left Rear

Power Outlet

F103 20 Amp Yellow

Power Outlet in Console Bin/Power Outlet

in Rear of Console

F105 20 Amp Yellow

Heated Seats – For Versions/Markets, Where

Provided

F106 20 Amp Yellow Rear Power Outlet

F107 10 Amp Red

Rear Camera – For Versions/Markets, Where

Provided

F108 15 Amp Blue Instrument Panel

F109 10 Amp Red Climate Control/HVAC

F110 10 Amp Red Occupant Restraint Controller

F112 10 Amp Red Spare

F114 20 Amp Yellow Rear HVAC Blower/Motor

F115 20 Amp Yellow Rear Wiper Motor

F116 30 Amp Pink Rear Defroster (EBL)

F117 10 Amp Red Heated Mirrors

F118 10 Amp Red Occupant Restraint Controller

308

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND

CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description

F119 10 Amp Red Steering Column Control Module

F120 10 Amp Red

All Wheel Drive – For Versions/Markets,

Where Provided

F121 15 Amp Blue Wireless Ignition Node

F122 25 Amp Clear Driver Door Module

F123 25 Amp Clear Passenger Door Module

F124 10 Amp Red Mirrors

F125 10 Amp Red Steering Column Control Module

F126 10 Amp Red Audio Amplifier

F127 20 Amp Yellow

Trailer Tow – For Versions/Markets, Where

Provided

F128 15 Amp Blue Radio

F129 15 Amp Blue

Video/DVD – For Versions/Markets, Where

Provided

F130 15 Amp Blue Climate Control/Instrument Panel

F131 10 Amp Red

Passenger Assistance/Hands Free System –

For Versions/Markets, Where Provided

F132 10 Amp Red Tire Pressure Module

F133 10 Amp Red Spare

309

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND

CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

UNDERHOOD FUSES (POWER

DISTRIBUTION CENTER)

The power distribution center is located in the engine

compartment.

(fig. 191)

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description

F101 60 Amp Yellow Interior Power Distribution Center Rail

F102 60 Amp Yellow Interior Power Distribution Center Rail

F103 60 Amp Yellow Interior Power Distribution Center Rail

F105 60 Amp Yellow

Interior Power Distribution Center Rail

Ignition Run Relay

F106 60 Amp Yellow

Interior Power Distribution Center Rail Run/

Accessory Relays

F139 40 Amp Green Climate Control System Blower

F140 30 Amp Pink Power Locks

F141 40 Amp Green Anti-Lock Brake System

F142 40 Amp Green

Glow Plugs – For Versions/Markets, Where

Provided

F143 40 Amp Green Exterior Lights 1

(fig. 191)

Power Distribution Center (Fuses)

310

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND

CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description

F144 40 Amp Green Exterior Lights 2

F145 30 Amp Pink To Body Computer – Lamp

F146 30 Amp Pink Spare

F147 30 Amp Pink Spare

F148 40 Amp Green Radiator Fan Motor

F149 30 Amp Pink Starter Solenoid

F150 25 Amp Clear Powertrain Control Modules

F151 30 Amp Pink

Headlamp Washer Motor – For Versions/

Markets, Where Provided

F152 25 Amp Clear

Diesel Fuel Heater – For Versions/Markets,

Where Provided

F153 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump

F156 10 Amp Red Brake/Electronic Stability Control Module

F157 10 Amp Red

Transfer Case Module – For Versions/

Markets, Where Provided

F158 10 Amp Red

Active Hood Module – For Versions/Markets,

Where Provided

F159 10 Amp Red Spare

F160 20 Amp Yellow Interior Lights

F161 20 Amp Yellow Horn

F162 50 Amp Red

Cabin Heater #1/Vacuum Pump – For

Versions/Markets, Where Provided

F163 50 Amp Red

Cabin Heater #2 – For Versions/Markets,

Where Provided

F164 25 Amp Clear Powertrain Auto Shutdown

311

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND

CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description

F165 20 Amp Yellow Powertrain Shutdown

F166 20 Amp Yellow Spare

F167 30 Amp Green Powertrain Shutdown

F168 10 Amp Red Air Conditioner Clutch

F169 40 Amp Green

Emissions – Partial Zero Emissions Vehicle

Motor

F170 15 Amp Blue

Emissions – Partial Zero Emissions Vehicle

Actuators

F172 20 Amp Yellow Spare

F173 25 Amp Clear Anti Lock Brake Valves

F174 20 Amp Yellow

Siren – For Versions/Markets, Where

Provided

F175 30 Amp Green Spare

F176 10 Amp Red Powertrain Control Modules

F177 20 Amp Yellow

All Wheel Drive Module – For Versions/

Markets, Where Provided

F178 25 Amp Clear

Sunroof – For Versions/Markets, Where

Provided

F179 10 Amp Red Battery Sensor

F181 100 Amp Blue

Electrohydraulic Steering (EHPS) – For

Versions/Markets, Where Provided

F182 50 Amp Red

Cabin Heater #3 – For Versions/Markets,

Where Provided

F184 30 Amp Pink Front Wiper Motor

312

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND

CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE

If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be

moved out of the PARK position, you can use the

following procedure to temporarily move the shift

lever:

1. Turn the engine OFF.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake.

3. Open the center console and remove the shift lever

override access cover (located in the front lower

right corner of the console storage bin). (fig. 192)

4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.

5. Insert a screwdriver or similar small tool into the

access port, and push and hold the override release

lever forward.

6. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position.

7. The vehicle may then be star ted in NEUTRAL.

8. Reinstall the shift lever override access cover.

(fig. 192)

Shift Lever Override Access Cover

313

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND

CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE

If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it

can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the

steering wheel right and left to clear the area around

the front wheels. Then shift back and forth between

DRIVE and REVERSE (with automatic transmission) or

2nd gear and REVERSE (with manual transmission),

while gently pressing the accelerator. Use the least

amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain

the rocking motion, without spinning the wheels or

racing the engine.

NOTE: Press the "ESC Off" switch, to place the

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system in

"Partial Off" mode, before rocking the ve-

hicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control” in

“Knowing Your Vehicle” for further informa-

tion. Once the vehicle has been freed, press the "ESC

Off" switch again to restore "ESC On" mode.

• Racing the engine or spinning t he

wheels may lead to transmission over-

heating and failure. Allow the engine to

idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at

least one minute after every five rocking-mot ion

cycles.This will minimize overheating and reduce

the risk of clutch or transmission failure during

prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.

• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting be-

tween DRIVE/2nd gear and REVERSE, do not spin

the wheels faster than 24 km/h, or drivetrain

damage may result.

• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too

fast may lead to transmission overheating and

failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not spin

the wheels above 48 km/h while in gear (no trans-

mission shifting occurring).

314

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND

CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

WARNING!

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous.

Forces

generated by excessive wheel

speeds may cause damage, or even failure, of the

axle and tires. A tire could explode and injure

someone.Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster

than 48 km/h or for longer than 30 seconds

continuously without stopping when you are

stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning

wheel, no matter what the speed.

TOW EYE USAGE

Your vehicle is equipped with a tow eye that can be

used to tow a disabled vehicle.

When using a tow eye be sure to follow the “Tow Eye

Usage Precautions” and the “Towing A Disabled Ve-

hicle” instructions in this section.

(fig. 193)

Tow E y e

315

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND

CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Tow Eye Usage Precautions

NOTE:

• Ensure that the tow eye is properly seated and

secure in the mounting receptacle.

• The tow eye is recommended for use with an ap-

proved tow bar and or rope.

• Do not use the tow eye to pull the vehicle onto a

flatbed truck.

• Do not use the tow eye to free a stuck vehicle. Refer

to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in this section for

further information.

WARNING!

Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with

tow e

yes.

• Do not use a chain with a tow eye. Chains may

break, causing serious injury or death.

• Donotuseatowstrapwithatoweye.Tow

straps may break or become disengaged, causing

serious injury or death.

• Failure to follow proper tow eye usage may

cause components to break resulting in serious

injury or death.

(fig. 194)

• The tow eye must be used exclusively

for roadside assistance operations. Only

use the tow eye with an appropriate

device in accordance with the highway code (a

rigid bar or rope) to flat tow the vehicle for a short

distance to the nearest service location.

• Tow eyes MUST NOT be used to tow vehicles

off the road or where there are obstacles.

• In compliance with the above conditions, tow-

ing with a tow eye must take place with two

vehicles (one towing, the other towed) aligned as

much as possible along the same center line.

Damage to your vehicle may occur if these guide-

lines are not followed.

(fig. 194)

Tow Eye Warning Label

316

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND

CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

FRONTTOW EYE INSTALLATION

The front tow eye receptacle is located behind a door,

located on the right front bumper fascia. To install the

tow eye, open the door using the vehicle key or a small

screwdriver, and thread the tow eye into the recep-

tacle.

Insert the flat end of the jack handle through the eye

and tighten, refer to “Jacking and Tire Changing” for

further information. The tow eye must be fully seated

to the attaching bracket through the lower front fascia

as shown. If the tow eye is not fully seated to the

attaching bracket, the vehicle should not be towed.

(fig. 195)

REAR TOW EYE INSTALLATION

The rear tow eye receptacle is located behind a door,

located on the left rear bumper fascia.

To install the tow eye, open the door using the vehicle

key or a small screwdriver, and thread the tow eye into

the receptacle.

Insert the flat end of the jack handle through the eye

and tighten, refer to “Jacking and Tire Changing” for

further information. The tow eye must be fully seated

to the attaching bracket through the lower rear fascia

as shown. If the tow eye is not fully seated to the

attaching bracket, the vehicle should not be towed.

(fig. 196)

(fig. 195)

Front Tow Eye Installed

(fig. 196)

Rear Tow Eye Installed

317

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND

CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE

This section describes procedures for towing a dis-

abled vehicle using a commercial towing service.

Towing

Condi-

tion

Wheels

OFF the

Ground

FWD MODELS MANUAL

TRANSMISSION

FWD MODELS

AUTOMATIC

TRANSMISSION

AWD MODELS

Flat Tow NONE

• Transmission in NEUTRAL

• Ignition in ACC or ON/RUN

position

If transmission is oper-

able:

• Transmission in NEUTRAL

• Ignition in ACC or

ON/RUN position

• 40 km/h max speed

• 24 kilometers max distance

NOT ALLOWED

Wheel Lift

or Dolly

Tow

Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED

Front OK OK NOT ALLOWED

Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD OK

Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to pre-

vent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and

other equipment designed for this purpose, following

equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety

chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing

device to main structural members of the vehicle, not

to bumpers or associated brackets. State and local laws

regarding vehicles under tow must be observed.

If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters,

etc.) while being towed, the ignition must be in the

ON/RUN position, not the ACC position.

If the vehicle's battery is discharged, refer to "Shift

Lever Override" in this section for instructions on

shifting the automatic transmission out of PARK for

towing.

318

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND

CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

• Do not use sling type equipment when

towing.Vehicle damage may occur.

• When securing the vehicle to a flat bed

truck, do not attach to front or rear suspension

components. Damage to your vehicle may result

from improper towing.

• Do not push or tow this vehicle with another

vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and trans-

mission may result.

• If the vehicle being towed requires steering, the

ignition switch must be in the ACC or ON/RUN

position, not in the LOCK/OFF position.

WITHOUT THE KEY FOB

Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed

with the ignition in the OFF position. Flatbed towing is

the preferred towing method. However, if a flatbed

towing vehicle is not available, wheel lift towing equip-

ment may be used. Rear towing (with the front wheels

on the ground) is not allowed, as transmission damage

will occur. If rear towing is the only alternative, the

front wheels must be placed on a towing dolly. Proper

towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to

the vehicle.

ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) MODELS

The manufacturer requires towing with all four wheels

OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the

vehicle on a flatbed, or with one end of vehicle raised

and the opposite end on a towing dolly.

Towing this vehicle in violation of the

above requirements can cause severe

transmission and/or power transfer unit

damage. Damage from improper towing is not

covered under the NewVehicle Limited Warranty.

FRONT WHEEL DRIVE (FWD) MODELS —

MANUAL TRANSMISSION

The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle

with all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.

Your vehicle may also be towed in the forward direc-

tion, with all four wheels on the ground, the transmis-

sion in NEUTRAL, and the ignition in the ACC or

ON/RUN position. If the transmission is not operative,

the vehicle must be towed with the front wheels OFF

the ground (using a flatbed truck, towing dolly, or

wheel lift equipment with the front wheels raised).

319

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND

CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Towing this vehicle in violation of the

above requirements can cause severe en-

gine and/or transmission damage. Dam-

age from improper towing is not covered under

the NewVehicle Limited Warranty.

FRONT WHEEL DRIVE (FWD) MODELS —

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle

with all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.

If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmis-

sion is operable, the vehicle may be flat towed (with all

four wheels on the ground) under the following condi-

tions:

• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL.

• The towing distance must not exceed 24 km.

• The towing speed must not exceed 40 km/h.

If the transmission is not operable, or the ve-

hicle must be towed faster than 40 km/h or

farther than 24 km, it must be towed with the

front wheels OFF the ground (using a flatbed

truck, towing dolly, or wheel lift equipment with

the front wheels raised).

• Towing this vehicle in violation of the

above requirements can cause severe

transmission damage. Damage from im-

proper towing is not covered under the New Ve-

hicle Limi ted Warranty.

320

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND

CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

SERVICING AND CARE

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE – GASOLINE

ENGINE

The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this

manual must be done at the times or mileages specified

to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best

vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent

maintenance may be needed for vehicles in severe

operating conditions, such as dusty areas and very

short trip driving. Inspection and ser vice should also be

done anytime a malfunction is suspected.

The oil change indicator system will remind you that it

is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled mainte-

nance.

On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)

equipped vehicles “Oil Change Required ” will be dis-

played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,

indicating that an oil change is necessary.

NOTE:

• The oil change indicator message will not

monitor the time since the last oil change.

Change your vehicles oil if it has been 1 year

since your last oil change even if the oil change

indicator message is NOT illuminated.

• Under no circumstances should oil change

intervals exceed 15,000 km or 1 year, which-

ever comes first.

• Rotate the tires at the first sign of irregular

wear.

Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indica-

tor message after completing the scheduled oil change.

Failure to perform the required mainte-

nance items may result in damage to the

vehicle.

321

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Thousands Of Kilometers 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150

Years 1 2 3 4 5678910

Check tire condition/wear and adjust pressure, if

necessary, check TIREKIT expiration date (if

provided).

••••••••••

Check operation of lighting system (headlamps,

direction indicators, hazard warning lights,

luggage compartment, passenger compartment,

glove compartment, instrument panel warning

lights, etc.).

••••••••••

Check and, if necessary, top up fluid levels

(brakes/hydraulic clutch, windshield washer,

battery, engine coolant, etc.).

••••••••••

Check exhaust gas emissions/smokiness. • • • • ••••••

Using diagnosis socket, check operation of engine

management systems, emissions and (where

provided) engine oil deterioration.

••••••••••

Check windshield/rear window wiper blade

position/wear.

•••••

Check operation of windshield washer system

and adjust jets if necessary.

•••••

Check cleanliness of hood and tailgate locks and

cleanliness and lubrication of linkages.

•••••

Check the parking brake lever stroke and adjust

it, if necessary. (Manual Transmission Only)

••••••••••

322

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Thousands Of Kilometers 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150

Years 1 2 3 4 5678910

Visually inspect condition of: exterior bodywork,

underbody protection, pipes and hoses (exhaust

- fuel system - brakes), rubber elements (boots,

sleeves, bushes, etc.).

••••••••••

Check the front suspension, tie rods, CV joints

and replace if necessar y

•••••

Visually check the condition and wear of the

front disc brake pads.

••••••••••

Visually check the condition and wear of the rear

disc brake pads.

••••••••••

Visually inspect the condition of accessory drive

belt(s).

••

Replace auxiliary drive belt(s). (##) •

Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. •

Change engine oil and replace oil filter (*).

Change the automatic transmission fluid and

filter(s). (***)

•

Replace spark plugs (2.4L engine). (**) • • • • •

Replace spark plugs (3.6L engine). (**) •

Replace air cleaner cartridge. (#) • • • • •

Change brake fluid. • • • • •

323

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Thousands Of Kilometers 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150

Years 1 2 3 4 5678910

Replace rear drive assembly (RDA) fluid (for

versions/markets, where provided).

•

Replace power transfer unit (PTU) fluid (for

versions/markets, where provided).

•

Replace cabin filter. (#) ◦ • ◦ • ◦ • ◦ • ◦ •

Flush and replace the engine coolant. •

◦ Recommend replacement.

(#) The air cleaner cartridge must be changed every

15,000 km if used in dusty areas.

(##)

Non-dusty/normal areas: advised maximum mileage

120,000 km. Regardless of the mileage, the belt must be

replaced every 6 years. Dusty areas and/or demanding use

(cold climates, town use, long periods of idling): advised

maximum mileage 60,000 km. Regardless of the mileage ,

the belt must be replaced every 4 years.

(*)

The oil and oil filter replacement must be carried out

when indicated by a warning light or message on the

instrument panel, or in any case should not exceed 1 year.

(**) The spark plug change is km based only, yearly

intervals do not apply.

(***) Change the automatic transmission fluid and

filter(s) at 75,000 km or 5 years if using your vehicle for

police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.

Periodic Checks

Every 1,000 km or before long journeys, check and, if

necessary, restore:

• engine coolant;

• brake fluid;

• power steering fluid;

• windshield washer fluid level;

• tire inflation pressure and condition;

• operation of lighting system (headlights, direction

indicators, hazard warning lights, etc.);

• operation of windshield washer/wiper system and

positioning/wear of windshield/rear window wiper

blades.

324

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Every 3,000 km, check and top up, if required, the

engine oil level and automatic transmission fluid level

(four-speed automatic only).

Heavy-Duty Use Of The Car

If the car is used mainly under one of the following

conditions:

• towing a trailer or caravan;

• dusty roads;

• short, repeated journeys (less than 7-8 km) at sub-

zero outside temperatures;

• engine often idling or driving long distances at low

speeds or long periods of idleness.

You should perform the following inspections more

frequently than shown on the Scheduled Servicing Plan:

• check front disc brake pad conditions and wear;

• check cleanliness of hood and trunk locks, cleanli-

ness and lubrication of linkage;

• visually inspect conditions of: engine, transmission,

pipes and hoses (exhaust - fuel system - brakes) and

rubber elements (boots - sleeves - bushes - etc.);

• check battery charge and battery fluid level (electro-

lyte);

• visually inspect condition of the accessory drive

belts;

• check and, if necessary, change engine oil and replace

oil filter;

• check and, if necessary, replace pollen filter;

• check and, if necessary, replace air cleaner.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE — DIESEL

ENGINE

To help you have the best driving experience possible,

the manufacturer has identified the specific vehicle

maintenance service intervals that are required to keep

your vehicle operating properly and safely.

The manufacturer recommends that these mainte-

nance intervals be performed at your selling dealer. The

technicians at your dealership know your vehicle best,

and have access to factory trained information, genuine

FIAT parts, and specially designed electronic and me-

chanical tools that can help prevent future costly re-

pairs.

The maintenance intervals shown should be performed

as indicated in this section.

325

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

The vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change

indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message

will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10

seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate

the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil

change indicator system is duty cycle based, which

means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate

dependent upon your personal driving style.

Unless reset, this message will continue to display each

time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN

position. To turn off the message temporarily, press

and release the Menu button.

NOTE:

• Under no circumstances should oil change intervals

exceed 2 years.

• Rotate the tires at the first sign of irregular

wear.

Failure to perform the required mainte-

nance items may result in damage to the

vehicle.

326

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Thousands Of Kilome-

ters

20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Check tire condition/wear

and adjust pressure, if

necessary; check TIREKIT

expiration date (if provided).

••••••••••

Check operation of lighting

system (headlights, direction

indicators, hazard lights,

passenger compartment

lights, instrument panel

warning lights, etc.).

••••••••••

Check and, if necessary,

top-up fluid levels (engine

coolant, brake/hydraulic

clutch fluid, windshield

washer fluid, battery fluid,

etc.)

••••••••••

Check exhaust gas

emissions/smokiness.

••••••••••

Use the diagnosis socket to

check engine management

system operation; emissions

and (where provided) engine

oil deterioration.

••••••••••

Check windshield/rear

window wiper blade

position/wear.

•••••

327

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Years

Thousands Of Kilome-

ters

20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Check operation of

windshield washer system

and adjust jets if necessary.

•••••

Check cleanliness of the

hood and tailgate locks and

cleanliness and lubrication of

linkages.

•••••

Visually inspect condition of:

exterior bodywork,

underbody protection, pipes

and hoses (exhaust - fuel

system - brakes), rubber

elements (boots, sleeves,

bushes, etc.)

••••••••••

Inspect front suspensions, tie

rod ends and rubber

elements (boots and bushes)

and replace if necessar y.

•••••

Check parking brake lever

travel and adjust it, if

necessary.

••••••••••

Visual check condition and

wear of front disc brake

pads.

••••••••••

Visual check condition and

wear of rear disc brake pads.

••••••••••

328

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Years

Thousands Of Kilome-

ters

20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Visually inspect the

condition of timing belt.

••

Visually inspect the

condition of accessory drive

belt(s).

••

Replace the timing belt (#).

Replace auxiliary drive belts

(#).

Change engine oil and

replace oil filter (*).

Change the automatic

transmission fluid and filter

(for versions/markets, where

provided) (**).

•

Replace fuel filter (***). • • •

Replace engine air filter (or

at least change every 2

years) (##).

•••

Change brake fluid. • • • • •

Replace rear drive assembly

(RDA) fluid (for

versions/markets, where

provided).

••

329

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Years

Thousands Of Kilome-

ters

20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Replace power transfer unit

(PTU) fluid (for

versions/markets, where

provided).

••

Flush and replace the engine

coolant.

•

Replace cabin air filter (##). ○ • ○ • ○ • ○ • ○ •

(*) The oil and oil filter replacement must be carried

out when indicated by a warning light or message on

the instrument panel, or in any case every 2 years. If the

car is used for less than 10.000 km per year, it is

necessary to replace engine oil and car tridge every 1

year.

(**) Change the automatic transmission fluid and fil-

ter(s) at 80.000 km or 4 years if using vehicle for police,

taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.

(***) In case of refuel with a lower fuel quality than

standard, you are advised to change this filter every

20.000 km.

○ Replacement advised.

(#) Areas that are not dusty: advised maximum mileage

120.000 km. Regardless of the mileage, the belt must

be replaced ever y 6 years. Dusty areas and/or demand-

ing use (cold climates, town use, long periods of idling):

advised maximum mileage 60.000 km. Regardless of the

mileage, the belt must be replaced every 4 years.

(##) If the vehicle is used in dusty areas, you are

advised to change this filter every 20.000 km.

330

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Years

Failure to perform the required mainte-

nance items may result in damage to the

vehicle.

Periodic Checks

Every 1,000 km or before long journeys, check and, if

necessary, restore:

• engine coolant;

• brake fluid;

• power steering fluid;

• windshield washer fluid level;

• tire inflation pressure and condition;

• operation of lighting system (headlights, direction

indicators, hazard warning lights, etc.);

• operation of windshield washer/wiper system and

positioning/wear of windshield/rear window wiper

blades.

Every 3,000 km, check and top up, if required, the

engine oil level.

Heavy-Duty Use Of The Car

If the car is used mainly under one of the following

conditions:

• towing a trailer or caravan;

• dusty roads;

• short, repeated journeys (less than 7-8 km) at sub-

zero outside temperatures;

• engine often idling or driving long distances at low

speeds or long periods of idleness.

You should perform the following inspections more

frequently than shown on the Scheduled Servicing Plan:

• check front disc brake pad conditions and wear;

• check cleanliness of hood and trunk locks, cleanli-

ness and lubrication of linkage;

• visually inspect conditions of: engine, transmission,

pipes and hoses (exhaust - fuel system - brakes) and

rubber elements (boots - sleeves - bushes - etc.);

• check battery charge and battery fluid level (electro-

lyte);

• visually inspect condition of the accessory drive

belts;

• check and, if necessary, change engine oil and replace

oil filter;

• check and, if necessary, replace pollen filter;

• check and, if necessary, replace air cleaner.

331

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L

(fig. 197)

1 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 7 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)

2 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 8 — Air Cleaner Filter

3 — Engine Oil Fill 9 — Automatic Transmission Dipstick (4–Speed Only)

4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir

5 — Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post) 11 — Coolant Reservoir Cap

6 — Remote Jump Start (Negative Battery Post) 12 — Engine Oil Dipstick

332

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L

(fig. 198)

1 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 5 — Air Cleaner Filter

2 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 6 — Washer Fluid Reservoir

3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 7 — Engine Oil Dipstick

4 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 8 — Engine Oil Fill

333

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.0L DIESEL

(fig. 199)

1 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir

2 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 6 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)

3 — Engine Oil Fill 7 — Air Cleaner Filter

4 — Engine Oil Dipstick 8 — Washer Fluid Reservoir

334

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

The pages that follow contain the required mainte-

nance services determined by the engineers who de-

signed your vehicle.

Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed

maintenance schedule, there are other components

which may require servicing or replacement in the

future.

• Failure to properly maintain your ve-

hicle or perform repairs and service when

necessary could result in more costly re-

pairs, damage to other components or negatively

impact vehicle performance. Immediately have

potential malfunctions examined by an autho-

rized dealership or qualified repair center.

• Car maintenance should be done at a FIAT

Dealership. For routine and minor maintenance

operations you wish to carry out yourself, we do

recommend you have t he proper equipment,

genuine FIAT parts and the necessary fluids; do

not however carry out these o perations if you

have no experience.

• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids

that protect the performance and durability of

your vehicle and also allow extended mainte-

nance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in

these components as the chemicals can damage

your engine, transmission, power steering or air

conditioning. Such damage is not covered by the

NewVehicle LimitedWarranty. If a flush is needed

because of component malfunct ion, use only the

specified fluid for the flushing procedure.

335

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

ENGINE OIL

Checking Oil Level — Gasoline Engine

To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil

must be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil

level at regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.

The best time to check the engine oil level is about five

minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off. Do not

check oil level before starting the engine after it has sat

overnight. Checking engine oil level when the engine is

cold will give you an incorrect reading.

Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground

and only when the engine is hot, will improve the

accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain the oil level

between the range markings on the dipstick. Either the

range markings consist of a crosshatch zone marked

SAFE or a crosshatch zone marked with MIN at the low

end of the range and MAX at the high end of the range .

Adding 1 Liter of oil when the reading is at the low end

of the range marking will raise the oil level to the high

end of the range marking.

Do not overfill t he engine. Overfilling the

engine will cause oil aeration, which can

lead to loss of oil pressure and an in-

crease in oil temperature.This could damage your

engine.Also, be sure the oil fill cap is replaced and

tightened after adding oil.

Checking Oil Level — Diesel Engine

To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil

must be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil

level at regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.

The best time to check the engine oil level is about five

minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off or

before starting the engine after it has sat overnight.

Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will

improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain

the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on

the dipstick. Adding 1 Liter of oil when the reading is at

the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these

engines.

336

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Car maintenance should be done at a

FIAT Dealership. For routine and minor

maintenance operations you wish to

carry out yourself, we do recommend you have

the proper equipment, genuine FIAT spare parts

and the necessary fluids;do not however carry out

these operations if you have no experience.

Change Engine Oil — Gasoline Engine

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper

maintenance intervals.

Change Engine Oil — Diesel Engine

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper

maintenance intervals.

Engine Oil Viscosity — 2.4L And 3.6L Gasoline

Engine

SAE Grade 5W-20 SELENIA K POWER fully synthetic

engine oil that meets FIAT Qualification 9.55535-CR1

API SN, ILSAC GF-5 or equivalent.

The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended

engine oil viscosity for your vehicle. For information on

engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart-

ment” in “Servicing And Care” for further information.

NOTE: SAE Grade 5W-30 SELENIA K POWER fully

synthetic engine oil that meets FIAT Qualification

9.55535-CR1 API SN, ILSAC GF-5 may be used when

SAE 5W-20 engine oil meeting Fiat 9.55535-CR1 is not

available.

Engine Oil Viscosity — 2.0L Diesel Engine

SAE Grade 5W-30 SELENIA WR P.E. fully synthetic

engine oil that meets FIAT Qualification 9.55535–S1,

ACEA C2 or equivalent.

The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended

engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on

engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart-

ment” in “Servicing and Care” for further information.

Change Engine Oil — Diesel Engine

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper

maintenance intervals.

Materials AddedTo Engine Oil

Do not add any supplemental materials, other than leak

detection dyes, to the engine oil. Engine oil is an

engineered product and its performance may be im-

paired by supplemental additives.

337

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters

Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and

oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,

indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to

the environment. Contact your authorized dealer, ser-

vice station or governmental agency for advice on how

and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded

in your area.

ENGINE AIR CLEANER FILTER

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper

maintenance intervals.

WARNING!

The air induction system (air cleaner,

hoses,

etc.) can provide a measure of

protection in the case of engine backfire. Do not

remove the air induction system (air cleaner,

hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary for

repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is

near the engine compartment before starting the

vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,

hoses,etc.) removed.Failure to do so can result in

serious personal injury.

Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection

The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters

varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be

used to assure most efficient service.

MAINTENANCE-FREE BATTERY

You will never have to add water, and periodic mainte-

nance is not required.

NOTE: The battery is stored in a compartment that is

located behind the left front fender and is accessible

through the wheel well. The wheel and tire assemble

do not need to be removed to access the compart-

ment. Remote battery terminals are located in the

engine compartment for jump-starting.

To access the battery, turn the steering wheel fully to

the right and remove the access panel from the inner

fender shield.

WARNING!

• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solu-

on and can burn or even blind you. Do

not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin,

or clothing. Do not lean over a battery when

attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or on

skin, flush the area immediately with large

amounts of water.

(Continued)

338

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

WARNING! (Continued)

• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep

flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not

use a booster battery or any other booster source

with an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not

allow cable clamps to touch each other.

• Battery posts, terminals, and related accesso-

ries contain lead and lead compounds. Wash

hands after handling.

• It is essential when replacing the cables

on the battery that the positive cable is

attached to the positive post and the

negat ive cable is attached to the negative post.

Battery posts are marked positive (+) and nega-

tive (-) and identified on the battery case. Cable

clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and

free of corrosion.

• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in

the vehicle,disconnect both vehicle battery cables

before connecting the charger to the battery. Do

not use a “fast charger” to provide starting volt-

age as battery damage can result.

AIR CONDITIONER MAINTENANCE

For best possible performance, your air conditioner

should be checked and ser viced by an authorized

dealer at the start of each warm season. This service

should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a

performance test. Drive belt tension should also be

checked at this time.

Do not use chemical flushes in your air

conditioning system as the chemicals can

damage your air conditioning compo-

nents. Such damage is not covered by the New

Vehicle Limited Warranty.

WARNING!

• Use only refrigerants and compressor

lubri

cants approved by the manufac-

turer for your air conditioning system. Some un-

approved refrigerants are flammable and can

explode, injuring you. Other unapproved refrig-

erants or lubricants can cause the system to fail,

requiring costly repairs.

•

The air condit ioning system contains refrigerant

under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal

injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant

or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected

should be done by an experienced technician.

339

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling

R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-

carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental

Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product.

However, the manufacturer recommends that air con-

ditioning service be performed by authorized dealer or

other service facilities using recovery and recycling

equipment.

NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system

PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.

A/C AIR FILTER

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper

maintenance intervals.

Car maintenance should be done at a

FIAT Dealership. For routine and minor

maintenance operations you wish to

carry out yourself, we do recommend you have

the proper equipment, genuine FIAT spare parts

and the necessary fluids;do not however carry out

these operations if you have no experience.

WARNING!

Do not remove the A/C air filter while

the

blower is operating or personal in-

jury may result.

The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind

the glove box. Perform the following steps to replace

the filter:

1. Open the glove box and remove all contents.

2. Push the retaining tab on each side of the glove box

inward while gently pulling the glove box door

outward until both tabs clear the door opening in

the instrument panel. (fig. 200)

3. Pivot the glove box downward.

(fig. 200)

Glove Box Removal

340

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

4. Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the

filter cover to the HVAC housing and remove the

cover. (fig. 201)

5. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of

the housing.

6. Install the A/C air filter with the arrow on the filter

pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter

cover, make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the

cover.

The A/C air filter is identified with an

arrow to indicate airflow direction

through the filter. Failure to install the

filter properly will result in the need to replace it

more often.

7. Reinstall the glove box door. Make sure that the

hinges are seated fully as you raise the door. Other-

wise, the door latch will not align properly.

BODY LUBRICATION

Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as

seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,

tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be

lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease to

assure quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust

and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the

parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust

and grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should

be removed. Particular attention should also be given

to hood latching components to ensure proper func-

tion. When performing other underhood services, the

hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should

be cleaned and lubricated.

The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice

a year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small

amount of a high quality lubricant directly into the lock

cylinder.

(fig. 201)

A/C Air Filter Replacement

341

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Car maintenance should be done at a

FIAT Dealership. For routine and minor

maintenance operations you wish to

carry out yourself, we do recommend you have

the proper equipment, genuine FIAT spare parts

and the necessary fluids;do not however carry out

these operations if you have no experience.

WIPER BLADES

Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the

windshield and rear window periodically with a sponge

or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will

remove accumulations of salt, waxes, or road film, and

help reduce streaking and smearing.

Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods

may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always

use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt

or dirt from a dry windshield or rear window.

Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice

from the windshield or rear window. Make sure that

they are not frozen to the glass before turning them on

to avoid damaging the blade. Keep the blade rubber out

of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil,

gasoline, etc.

NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend-

ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor

performance of blades may be present with chattering,

marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these condi-

tions are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as

necessary.

Rear Wiper Removal/Installation

1. Lift the pivot cap on the rear wiper arm upward, this

will allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the

liftgate glass. (fig. 202)

NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be raised fully

upward unless the pivot cap is raised first.

(fig. 202)

1 — Wiper Arm

2 — Pivot Cap

342

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

2. Lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the wiper

blade off of the liftgate glass.

3. Grab the bottom of the wiper blade and rotate it

forward to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the

wiper blade holder. (fig. 203)

4. Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade

holder at the end of the wiper arm, and firmly press

the wiper blade until it snaps into place.

5. Lower the wiper blade and snap the pivot cap into

place.

ADDING WASHER FLUID

The windshield washer and the rear window washer

share the same fluid reservoir. The fluid reservoir is

located in the engine compartment. Be sure to check

the fluid level in the reservoir at regular intervals. Fill

the reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not

radiator antifreeze) and operate the system for a few

seconds to flush out the residual water.

When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, apply some

washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper

blades clean. This will help blade performance.

To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system

in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets

or exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This

rating information can be found on most washer fluid

containers.

The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 4 Liters of washer

fluid when the “Washer Fluid Low” message appears in

the EVIC display.

WARNING!

Commercially available windshield

washer

solvents are flammable. They

could ignite and burn you. Care must be exer-

cised when filling or working around t he washer

solution.

(fig. 203)

1 — Wiper Blade

2 — Blade Pivot Pin

3 — Wiper Arm

4 — Wiper Blade Holder

343

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Car maintenance should be done at a

FIAT Dealership. For routine and minor

maintenance operations you wish to

carry out yourself, we do recommend you have

the proper equipment, genuine FIAT spare parts

and the necessary fluids;do not however carry out

these operations if you have no experience.

INTERVENTION REGENERATION

STRATEGY – 2.0L DIESEL ENGINE

This vehicle is equipped with a state-of-the-art engine

and exhaust system containing a diesel particulate

filter. The engine and exhaust after-treatment system

work together to meet the Emission standards. The

system manages engine combustion to allow the ex-

haust system’s catalyst to trap and burn Particulate

Matter (PM) pollutants with no input or interaction on

your part.

Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC)” in “Knowing Your Vehicle” for further informa-

tion.

EXHAUST SYSTEM

The best protection against carbon monoxide entry

into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine

exhaust system.

Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the

exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected

inside the vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the

vehicle is damaged, have a competent technician in-

spect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body

areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or misposi-

tioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could

permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger com-

partment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each

time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change.

Replace as required.

WARNING!

Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They

contain

carbon monoxide (CO), which is

colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you

unconscious and can eventually poison you. To

avoid breathing CO,refer to “SafetyTips/Exhaust

Gas” in “Safety” for further information.

344

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control

systems can result in civil penalties being assessed

against you.

WARNING!

A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you

park over materials that can burn. Such

materials might be grass or leaves coming into

contact with your exhaust system. Do not park or

operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust

system can contact anything that can burn.

In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning

engine operation, a scorching odor may indicate severe

and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, safely

bring the vehicle to a complete stop, shut the engine

OFF, and allow the vehicle to cool. Thereafter, obtain

service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifi-

cations immediately.

To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage:

• Do not shut OFF the engine or interrupt the ignition

when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in

motion.

• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing

the vehicle.

• Do not idle the engine with any ignition coil connec-

tors disconnected for prolonged periods.

COOLING SYSTEM

WARNING!

• When working near the radiator cool-

ing

fan,disconnect the fan motor lead or

turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.The

fan is temperature controlled and can start at

any time the ignition switch is in the ON position.

• You or others can be badly burned by hot

engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your

radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from

under the hood, do not open the hood until the

radiator has had time to cool.Never try to open a

cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is

hot.

Car maintenance should be done at a

FIAT Dealership. For routine and minor

maintenance operations you wish to

carry out yourself, we do recommend you have

the proper equipment, genuine FIAT spare parts

and the necessary fluids;do not however carry out

these operations if you have no experience.

345

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Coolant Checks

Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 1

year (before the onset of freezing weather, where

applicable). If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance,

the system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with

fresh coolant. Check the front of the A/C condenser

for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean

by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically

down the face of the condenser.

Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle

rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the con-

nection at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire

system for leaks.

Cooling System — Drain, Flush,And Refill

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper

maintenance intervals.

If the solution is dirty or contains a considerable

amount of sediment, clean and flush with a reliable

cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough rinsing

to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly dispose

of the old engine coolant (antifreeze) solution.

Selection Of Coolant — Gasoline Engine

Use only the manufacturer's recommended coolant.

Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in

“Technical Specifications” for further information.

• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze)

other than specified engine coolant (an-

tifreeze), may result in engine damage

and may decrease corrosion protection. If a non-

specified engine coolant (antifreeze) is intro-

duced into the cooling system in an emergency, it

should be replaced with the specified engine cool-

ant (antifreeze) as soon as possible.

• Do not use plain water alone or alcohol-based

engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use

additional rust inhibitors or antirust products , as

they may not be compatible with the radiator

engine coolant (antifreeze) and may plug the

radiator.

• This vehicle has not been designed for use with

Propylene Glycol based engine coolant (anti-

freeze). Use of Propylene Glycol based engine

coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.

346

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Selection Of Coolant — Diesel Engine

Use only the manufacturer's recommended coolant

(antifreeze). Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine

Parts” in “Technical Specifications” for further informa-

tion.

• Do not use HOAT (Hybrid Organic Ad-

ditiveTechnology) products in the Diesel

Engine.

• Do not use OAT (Organic Additive Technology)

products containing 2-EH (2–ethyl hexanol).

• Do not use plain water alone or alcohol base

engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use

additional rust inhibitors or antirust products , as

they may not be compatible with the radiator

engine coolant and may plug the radiator.

• This vehicle has not been designed for use with

Propylene Glycol based coolants. Use of Propyl-

ene Glycol based coolants is not recommended.

Adding Coolant — Gasoline Engine

Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine

coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance

intervals. This coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to 10

years or 240 000 km before replacement. To prevent

reducing this extended maintenance period, it is impor-

tant that you use the same coolant throughout the life

of your vehicle.

Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-

ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant (an-

tifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water will

reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the

engine cooling system.

Please note that it is the owner's responsibility to

maintain the proper level of protection against freezing

according to the temperatures occurring in the area

where the vehicle is operated.

NOTE: Mixing coolant types will decrease the life of

the engine coolant (antifreeze) and will require more

frequent coolant changes.

Adding Coolant — Diesel Engine

Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine

coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance

intervals. To prevent reducing this extended mainte-

nance period, it is important that you use the same

coolant throughout the life of your vehicle.

Please note that it is the owner's responsibility to

maintain the proper level of protection against freezing

according to the temperatures occurring in the area

where the vehicle is operated.

347

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

NOTE: Mixing coolant types will decrease the life of

the engine coolant (antifreeze) and will require more

frequent coolant changes.

Cooling System Pressure Cap

The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of

engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine

coolant (antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the

coolant recovery tank.

The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any

accumulation of foreign material on the sealing sur-

faces.

WARNING!

• Do not open hot engine cooling sys-

tem. N

ever add engine coolant (anti-

freeze) when the engine is overheated. Do not

loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated

engine . Heat causes pressure to build up in the

cooling system.To prevent scalding or injury, do

not remove the pressure cap while the system is

hot or under pressure.

• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one

specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-

gine damage may result.

Disposal Of Used Coolant

Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant is a regu-

lated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with

your local authorities to determine the disposal rules

for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or

children, do not store ethylene glycol-based engine

coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in

puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child, contact a

physician immediately. Clean up any ground spills im-

mediately.

Coolant Level

The radiator normally remains completely full, so there

is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking

for coolant freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise

your service attendant of this. As long as the engine

operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant

bottle need only be checked once a month. When

additional coolant is needed to maintain the proper

level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not

overfill.

348

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Points To Remember

NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few

kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor com-

ing from the front of the engine compartment. This is

normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high

humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-

ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot coolant

to enter the radiator.

If an examination of your engine compartment shows

no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may

be safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.

• Do not overfill the coolant recover y bottle.

• Check coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the

coolant recovery bottle. If antifreeze needs to be

added, contents of coolant recovery bottle must also

be protected against freezing.

• If frequent coolant additions are required, or if the

level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop

when the engine cools, the cooling system should be

pressure tested for leaks.

• Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery

bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.

• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is

equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the

condenser clean.

• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Win-

ter operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install

ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs

may result in unsatisfactory coolant performance,

poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.

BRAKE SYSTEM

In order to assure brake system performance, all brake

system components should be inspected periodically.

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper

maintenance intervals.

WARNING!

Riding the brakes can lead to brake fail-

ure and

possibly an accident. Driving

with your foot resting or riding on the brake

pedal can result in abnormally high brake tem-

peratures, excessive lining wear, and possible

brake damage.You would not have your full brak-

ing capacity in an emergency.

Car maintenance should be done at a

FIAT Dealership. For routine and minor

maintenance operations you wish to

carry out yourself, we do recommend you have

the proper equipment, genuine FIAT spare parts

and the necessary fluids;do not however carry out

these operations if you have no experience.

349

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Master Cylinder — Brake Fluid Level Check

Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately

if the “Brake Warning Light” indicates system failure .

Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when

performing underhood services.

Clean the top of the master cylinder area before

removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the

fluid level up to the requirements described on the

brake fluid reservoir.

Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may

cause leaking in the system.

Fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads

wear. Brake fluid level should be checked when pads are

replaced. However, low fluid level may be caused by a

leak and a checkup may be needed.

NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a manual

transmission, the brake fluid reservoir supplies fluid

to both the brake system and the clutch release sys-

tem. The two systems are separated in the reservoir,

and a leak in one system will not affect the other

system. The manual transmission clutch release

system should not require fluid replacement during the

life of the vehicle. If the brake fluid reservoir is low and

the brake system does not indicate any leaks or other

problems, it may be a result of a leak in the hydraulic

clutch release system. See your local authorized dealer

for service.

Use only manufacturer's recommended brake fluid.

Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in

“Technical Specifications” for further information.

WARNING!

• Use only manufacturer's recom-

men

ded brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lu-

bricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Technical Speci-

fications” for further information. Using the

wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage

your brake system and/or impair its perfor-

mance. The proper type of brake fluid for your

vehicle is also identified on the original factory

installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.

(Continued)

350

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

WARNING! (Continued)

• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or

moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that

has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the

master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all

times. Brake fluid in a open container absorbs

moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling

point. This may cause it to boil unexpectedly

during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in

sudden brake failure.This could result in a acci-

dent.

• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result

in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts,causing

the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also

damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should

be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.

• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to con-

taminate the brake fluid. Brake seal components

could be damaged, causing partial or complete

brake failure.This could result in an accident.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (for

versions/markets, where provided)

Selection Of Lubricant

It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to

ensure optimum transmission performance and life.

Use only the manufacturer’s specified transmission

fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts”

in “Technical Specifications” for fluid specifications. It is

important to maintain the transmission fluid at the

correct level using the recommended fluid. No chemi-

cal flushes should be used in any transmission; only the

approved lubricant should be used.

Using a transmission fluid other than the

manufacturer’s recommended fluid may

cause deterioration in transmission shift

quality and/or torque converter shudder, and will

require more frequent fluid and filter changes.

Refer to“Fluids,Lubricants,and Genuine Parts”in

"Technical Specifications" for fluid specifica-

tions.

351

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Special Additives

The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any

special additives in the transmission. Automatic Transmis-

sion Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its perfor-

mance may be impaired by supplemental additives. There-

fore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission.

The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes

for diagnosing fluid leaks. Avoid using transmission sealers

as they may adversely affect seals.

Do not use chemical flushes in your

transmission as the chemicals can dam-

age your transmission components. Such

damage is not covered by the NewVehicle Limited

Warranty.

Fluid Level Check - Six-Speed Transmission

The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not

require adjustment under normal operating conditions.

Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore

the transmission filler tube is capped and no dipstick is

provided. Your authorized dealer can check your trans-

mission fluid level using a special service dipstick. If you

notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, visit

your authorized dealer immediately to have the trans-

mission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle with

an improper fluid level can cause severe transmission

damage.

If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit

your authorized dealer immediately. Se-

vere transmission damage may occur.

Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to

adjust the fluid level accurately.

Car maintenance should be done at a

FIAT Dealership. For routine and minor

maintenance operations you wish to

carry out yourself, we do recommend you have

the proper equipment, genuine FIAT spare parts

and the necessary fluids;do not however carry out

these operations if you have no experience.

Fluid Level Check — Four-Speed Automatic

Use the following procedure to check the transmission

fluid level properly:

1. Park the vehicle on level ground.

2. Run the engine at normal idle speed for at least 60

seconds, and leave the engine running for the rest of

this procedure.

3. Fully apply the parking brake, and press the brake

pedal.

352

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

4. Place the shift lever momentarily into each gear

position (allowing time for the transmission to fully

engage in each position), ending with the transmis-

sion in PARK.

5. Wipe the area around the dipstick clean to prevent

dirt from entering the transmission.

6. Remove the dipstick and determine if the fluid is

hot or cold. Hot fluid is approximately 82° C, which

is the normal operating temperature after the ve-

hicle is driven at least 24 km. Hot fluid cannot be

held comfortably between the finger tips. Cold fluid

is at a temperature of approximately 27° C.

7. Wipe the dipstick clean and reinsert it until seated.

Then, remove the dipstick and note the fluid level

on both sides. The fluid level reading is only valid if

there is a solid coating of oil on both sides of the

dipstick. Note that the holes in the dipstick will be

full of fluid if the actual level is at or above the hole.

• If the fluid is hot, the fluid level should be in the

crosshatched area marked “HOT” (between the up-

per two holes in the dipstick).

• If the fluid is cold, the fluid level should be between

the lower two holes in the area marked “COLD.”

• If the fluid level is low, add fluid through the dipstick

tube to bring it to the proper level. Do not overfill.

After adding any quantity of oil through the dipstick

tube, wait at least two minutes for the oil to fully

drain into the transmission before rechecking the

fluid level.

8. Check for leaks. Release the parking brake.

To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmis-

sion after checking or replenishing fluid, make sure that

the dipstick cap is properly re-seated.

• Using a transmission fluid other than

the manufacturer’s recommended fluid

may cause deter ioration in transmission

shift quality and/or torque converter shudder, and

will require more frequent fluid and filter

changes. Refer to“Fluids,Lubricants, and Genuine

Parts” in "Technical Specifications" for fluid

specifications.

• Dirt and water in the transmission can cause

serious damage. To prevent dirt and water from

entering the transmission after checking or re-

plenishing fluid, make sure that the dipstick cap is

re-seated properly.

353

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Fluid And Filter Changes

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper

maintenance intervals.

In addition, change the fluid and filter if the fluid

becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the

transmission is disassembled for any reason.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION (for versions/

markets, where provided)

Lubricant Selection

Use only manufacturers recommended transmission

fluid. Do not add any materials (other than leak detec-

tion dyes). Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine

Parts” in “Technical Specifications” for further informa-

tion.

Frequency Of Fluid Change

Change the manual transmission fluid at the intervals

shown in the “Maintenance Schedule” in this manual.

REAR DRIVE ASSEMBLY (RDA) – AWD

MODELS ONLY

Lubricant Selection

Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluid. Refer

to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Technical

Specifications” for further information.

Fluid Level Check

Visually inspect the unit at each oil change for leakage.

If leakage is detected, check the fluid level by removing

the fill plug. The fluid level should be maintained be-

tween the bottom of the fill hole to 4 mm below the fill

hole.

Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.

Frequency Of Fluid Change

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper

maintenance intervals.

POWER TRANSFER UNIT (PTU) – AWD

MODELS ONLY

Lubricant Selection

Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluid. Refer

to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Technical

Specifications” for further information.

Fluid Level Check

Visually inspect the unit at each oil change for leakage.

If leakage is detected, Check the fluid level by removing

the fill plug. The fluid level should be maintained be-

tween the bottom of the fill hole to 4 mm below the fill

hole.

Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.

354

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Frequency Of Fluid Change

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper

maintenance intervals.

APPEARANCE CARE AND PROTECTION

FROM CORROSION

Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion

Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-

graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads

passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on

trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly

corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,

which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,

road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, ex-

treme hot or cold weather and other extreme condi-

tions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim,

and underbody protection.

The following maintenance recommendations will en-

able you to obtain maximum benefit from the corro-

sion resistance built into your vehicle.

What Causes Corrosion?

Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of

paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.

The most common causes are:

• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.

• Stone and gravel impact.

• Insects, tree sap and tar.

• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.

• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.

Washing

• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-

hicle in the shade using a mild car wash soap, and

rinse the panels completely with clear water.

• Use a high quality cleaner wax to protect your paint

finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.

• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing

that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint

finish.

Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning

materials such as steel wool or scouring

powder that will scratch metal and

painted surfaces.

355

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Special Care

• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive

near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least

once a month.

• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges

of the doors, rocker panels, and cargo area be kept

clear and open.

• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the

paint, touch them up immediately. The cost of such

repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.

• If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or

similar cause, which destroys the paint and protec-

tive coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as

possible. The cost of such repairs is considered the

responsibility of the owner.

• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertiliz-

ers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are

well packaged and sealed.

• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider

mud or stone shields behind each wheel.

• Use Touch Up Paint or equivalent on scratches as

soon as possible. Your authorized dealer has touch

up paint to match the color of your vehicle.

Wheel And Wheel Trim Care

All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and

chrome-plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with

a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove

heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use a nonabra-

sive, non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring pads, steel

wool, a bristle brush, or metal polishes. Do not use

oven cleaner. Avoid automatic car washes that use

acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the

wheels’ protective finish.

Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure (for

versions/markets, where provided)

Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following

manner:

• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting

with a clean, dry towel.

• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.

• For tough stains, apply a mild soap solution to a

clean, damp cloth and remove the stain. Use a fresh,

damp towel to remove soap residue.

•

For grease stains, apply a Multi-Purpose Cleaner or

equivalent to a clean, damp cloth and remove the stain.

Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.

• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of

protectants on Stain Repel products.

356

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Interior Care

Instrument Panel Cover

The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface,

which minimizes reflections in the windshield. Do not

use protectants or other products, which may cause

undesirable reflections. Use soap and warm water to

restore the low glare surface.

Cleaning Interior Trim

Interior trim should be cleaned starting with a damp

cloth. Do not use harsh cleaners.

Cleaning Leather Upholstery

Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by

regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles

of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather

upholstery and should be removed promptly with a

damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easily with

a soft cloth. Care should be t aken to avoid soaking your

leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use

polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or

ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather uphol-

stery. Application of a leather conditioner is not re-

quired to maintain the original condition.

WARNING!

Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning

purposes.

Many are potentially flam-

mable, and if used in closed areas they may cause

respiratory harm.

Cleaning Headlights

Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and

less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.

Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore

different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.

To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and

reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To

remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution

followed by rinsing.

Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents,

steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the

lenses.

357

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Glass Surfaces

All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis

with any commercial household-type glass cleaner.

Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when

cleaning the inside rear window equipped with an

electric defroster. Do not use scrapers or other sharp

instruments that may scratch the elements.

When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on

the towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray

cleaner directly on the mirror.

Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses

The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are

molded in clear plastic . When cleaning the lenses, care

must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.

1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may

be used, but do not use high alcohol content or

abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a

clean damp rag.

2. Dry with a soft cloth.

Seat Belt Maintenance

Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical

solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the

fabric. Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.

If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or

lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car

to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.

Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the

buckles do not work properly.

WARNING!

A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a

collision

and leave you with no protec-

tion. Inspect the belt system periodically, check-

ing for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts

must be replaced immediately. Do not disas-

semble or modify the system. Seat belt assem-

blies must be replaced after a collision if t hey

have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn

webbing, etc.).

CLEANING THE CUP HOLDERS

Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild deter-

gent.

358

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

VEHICLE STORAGE

If you will not be using your vehicle for more than 21

days you may want to take steps to preserve your

battery. You may:

• Disconnect the battery negative cable.

• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of

service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run

the air conditioning system at idle for about five

minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting. This

will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize

the possibility of compressor damage when the sys-

tem is started again.

TIRE ROTATION

RECOMMENDATIONS

Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at

different loads and perform different steering, driving,

and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at

unequal rates.

These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of

tires. The benefits of rotation are especially worth-

while with aggressive tread designs such as those on all

season type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help

to maintain mud, snow and wet traction levels, and

contribute to a smooth, quiet ride.

NOTE: Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular

wear.

359

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left

front corner of the instrument panel and is visible from

outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This

number also appears stamped on the right front door

sill under the sill moulding and printed on the Automo-

bile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window

on your vehicle, the vehicle registration and title.

The VIN is also stamped on either right or left hand

side of the engine block.

(fig. 204) (fig. 205)

NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.

(fig. 204)

VIN Location

(fig. 205)

Stamped VIN Location

360

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION

TIRE MARKINGS

(fig. 206)

NOTE:

• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.

design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”

molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-

tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.

• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European

design standards. Tires designed to this standard

have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning

with the section width. The letter "P" is absent from

this tire size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.

• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.

design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric

tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the

letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall pre-

ceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.

• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary

emergency use only. Temporary high pressure com-

pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded

into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Ex-

ample: T145/80D18 103M.

• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design

standards and it begins with the tire diameter

molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.

(fig. 206)

1 — U.S. DOT Safety Stan-

dards Code (TIN)

4 — Maximum Load

2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure

3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction

and Temperature Grades

361

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Tire Sizing Chart

EXAMPLE:

Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C,T145/80D18 103M,

31x10.5 R15 LT

P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or

"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or

LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or

TorS= Temporary spare tire or

31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)

215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)

65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)

– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or

10.5 = Section width in inches (in)

R = Construction code

– "R" means radial construction, or

– "D" means diagonal or bias construction

15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)

362

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

EXAMPLE:

Service Description:

95 = Load Index

– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry

H = Speed Symbol

– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load

index under certain operating conditions

– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under speci-

fied operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed

limits)

Load Identification:

Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:

•XL

= Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or

•LL

= Light load tire or

•C,D,E,F,G

= Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carr y at a specified pressure

Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry

Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire

363

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

TIRE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (TIN)

The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,

however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires

with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the

date code, located on the white sidewall side of the

tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black

sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is

not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on

the inboard side of the tire.

EXAMPLE:

DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301

DOT = Department of Transportation

– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety

standards and is approved for highway use

MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)

L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)

ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)

03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)

– 03 means the 3rd week

01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)

– 01 means the year 2001

– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in

which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991

364

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

TIRE TERMINOLOGY AND DEFINITIONS

Term Definition

B-Pillar

The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located be-

hind the front door.

Cold Tire Inflation Pressure

Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the

vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less

than 1.6 km after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pres-

sure is measured in units of kPa (kilopascals).

Maximum Inflation Pressure

The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire

inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is

molded into the sidewall.

Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pres-

sure

Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as

shown on the tire placard.

Tire Placard

A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s

loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recom-

mended cold tire inflation pressures.

365

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

TIRE LOADING AND TIRE PRESSURE

Tire And Loading Information Placard

Location

NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed

on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the

driver's side door.

(fig. 207) (fig. 208)

Tire And Loading Information Placard

This placard tells you important information about the:

1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.

2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.

3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.

4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and

spare tires.

The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed

the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle.

You will not exceed the tire's load carrying capacity if

you adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold

tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Load-

ing Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading”

section of this manual.

(fig. 207)

Example Tire Placard Location (Door)

(fig. 208)

Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)

366

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,

gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and

rear axles must not be exceeded. For further informa-

tion on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing,

refer to “Vehicle Loading” in this section.

To determine the maximum loading conditions of your

vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of

occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or

XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.

The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and

trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never ex-

ceed the weight referenced here.

Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit

1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of

occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs

or XXX kg” on your vehicle's placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and

passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and

passengers from XXX kg.

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of

cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if

“XXX” amount equals 635 kg and there will be five

68 kg passengers in your vehicle , the amount of

available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg

(since5x68kg=340kg,and635kg–340kg=

295 kg).

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and

cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may

not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage

load capacity calculated in step 4.

NOTE:

• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your

trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The follow-

ing table shows examples on how to calculate total

load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your

vehicle with varying seating configurations and num-

ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration

purposes only and may not be accurate for the

seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.

367

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

• For the following example, the combined weight of

occupants and cargo should never exceed 392 kg.

(fig. 209)

368

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

WARNING!

Overloading of your tires is dangerous.

Overloadin

g can cause tire failure, af-

fect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping

distance. Use tires of the recommended load

capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.

TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION

TIRE PRESSURE

Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and

satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary

areas are affected by improper tire pressure:

• Safety and Vehicle Stability

• Economy

• Tread Wear

• Ride Comfort

Safety

WARNING!

• Improperly inflated tires are danger-

ous an

d can cause collisions.

• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can

result in overheating and tire failure.

• Over-inflation reduces a tire's ability to cush-

ion shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes

can cause damage that result in tire failure.

• Overinflated or under-inflated tires can affect

vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting

in loss of vehicle control.

(Continued)

369

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

WARNING! (Continued)

• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering

problems.You could lose control of your vehicle.

• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the

vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift

to the right or left.

• Always drive with each tire inflated to the

recommended cold tire inflation pressure.

Both under-inflation and over-inflation af fect the st abil-

ity of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish

response or over responsiveness in the steering.

NOTE:

• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause

erratic and unpredictable steering response.

• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause

the vehicle to drift left or right.

Economy

Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance

resulting in higher fuel consumption.

Tread Wear

Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnor-

mal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in

the need for earlier tire replacement.

Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability

Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.

Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable

ride.

TIRE INFLATION PRESSURES

The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the

driver's side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver's side

door.

At least once a month:

• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality

pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual

judgement when determining proper inf lation. Tires

may look properly inflated even when they are under-

inflated.

• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage .

After inspecting or adjusting the tire

pressure, always reinstall the valve stem

cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt

from entering the valve stem,which could damage

the valve stem.

Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always

“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pres-

sure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has

not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less

than 1.6 km after sitting for a minimum of three hours.

370

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the

maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire side-

wall.

Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide

range of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary

with temperature changes.

Tire pressures change by approximately 0.07 bar per

7°C of air temperature change. Keep this in mind when

checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in the

winter.

Example: If garage temperature = 20°C and the outside

temperature = 0°C then the cold tire inf lation pressure

should be increased by 0.21 bar, which equals 0.07 bar

for every 7°C for this outside temperature condition.

Tire pressure may increase from 0.13 to 0.4 bar during

operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build

up or your tire pressure will be too low.

TIRE PRESSURES FOR HIGH SPEED

OPERATION

The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and

within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or

conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at

high speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure

is very important. Increased tire pressure and reduced

vehicle loading may be required for high-speed vehicle

operation. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or

original equipment vehicle dealer for recommended

safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation

pressures.

WARNING!

High speed driving with your vehicle un-

der maxim

um load is dangerous. The

added strain on your tires could cause them to

fail. You could have a serious collision. Do not

drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity

at continuous speeds above 120 km/h.

TIRE TYPES

All Season Tires (for versions/markets, where

provided)

All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (spring,

summer, fall and winter). Traction levels may var y

between different all season tires. All season tires can

be identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation

on the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of

four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and

handling of your vehicle.

371

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Summer Or Three Season Tires (for

versions/markets, where provided)

Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry

conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow

or on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires,

be aware these tires are not designed for winter or cold

driving conditions. Install winter tires on your vehicle

when ambient temperatures are less than 5°C or if

roads are covered with ice or snow. For more informa-

tion, contact an authorized dealer.

Summer tires do not contain the all season designation

or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall.

Use summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so

may adversely affect the safety and handling of your

vehicle.

WARNING!

Do not use summer tires in snow/ice

condi

tions.You could lose vehicle control,

resulting in severe injury or death. Driving too

fast for conditions also creates the possibility of

loss of vehicle control.

Snow Tires

Some areas of the country require the use of snow

tires during the winter. Snow tires can be identified by

a “mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.

If you need snow tires, select tires

equivalent in size and type to the

original equipment tires. Use snow

tires only in sets of four; failure to do

so may adversely affect the safety and

handling of your vehicle.

Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than

what was originally equipped with your vehicle and

should not be operated at sustained speeds over

120 km/h. For speeds above 120 km/h refer to original

equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recom-

mended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire

inflation pressures.

While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid

and traction capability on wet or dry sur faces may be

poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states

prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be

checked before using these tire types.

372

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

RUN FLAT TIRES (for versions/markets,

where provided)

Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 80 km at

80 km/h after a rapid loss of inflation pressure. This

rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat

mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation

pressure is of/or below 0.96 bar. Once a Run Flat tire

reaches the run flat mode it has limited driving capa-

bilities and needs to be replaced immediately. A Run

Flat tire is not repairable.

It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full

capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat

mode.

See the tire pressure monitoring section for more

information.

SPARE TIRES (for versions/markets, where

provided)

NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit

instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit”

in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further informa-

tion.

Because of the reduced ground clear-

ance,do not take your vehicle through an

automatic car wash with a compact, full

size or limited-use temporary spare installed.

Damage to the vehicle may result.

SpareTire Matching Original Equipped Tire

And Wheel (for versions/markets, where

provided)

Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and

wheel equivalent in look and function to the original

equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear

axle of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the

tire rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this

option, refer to an authorized tire dealer for the

recommended tire rotation pattern.

373

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Compact SpareTire (for versions/markets,

where provided)

The compact spare is for temporary emergency use

only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a

compact spare by looking at the spare tire description

on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on

the driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the

tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the

letter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation. Ex-

ample: T145/80D18 103M.

T,S=Temporary Spare Tire

Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equip-

ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein-

stalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity.

Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a

conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since

the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare

tire. Do not install more than one compact spare tire

and wheel on the vehicle at any given time.

WARNING!

Compact spares are for temporary

emergency

use only.With these spares,

do not drive more than 80 km/h.Temporary use

spares have limited tread life .When the tread is

worn to the tread wear indicators,the temporary

use spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to

follow the warnings, which apply to your spare.

Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure

and loss of vehicle control.

Full Size Spare (for versions/markets, where

provided)

The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.

This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on

the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This

spare tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is

worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use

full size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not

the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or

repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the

vehicle at the first opportunity.

374

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Limited-Use Spare (for versions/markets,

where provided)

The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency

use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the

limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving

limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the

original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your

vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use

spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the

same as your original equipment tire, replace (or re-

pair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the

vehicle at the first opportunity.

WARNING!

Limited-use spares are for emergency

use only.

Installation of this limited-use

spare tire affects vehicle handling.With this tire,

do not drive more than t he speed listed on t he

limit-use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the cold

tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire and

Loading Information Placard located on the driv-

er’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s

side door. Replace (or repair) the original equip-

ment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it

on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in

loss of vehicle control.

TIRE SPINNING

When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do

not spin your vehicle's wheels above 48 km/h or for

longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.

Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In an emer-

gency” for further information.

WARNING!

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous.

Forces

generated by excessive wheel

speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire

could explode and injure someone. Do not spin

your vehicle's wheels faster than 48 km/h for

more than 30 seconds cont inuously when you are

stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning

wheel, no matter what the speed.

375

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

TREAD WEAR INDICATORS

Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment

tires to help you in determining when your tires should

be replaced.

(fig. 210)

These indicators are molded into the bottom of the

tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the

tread depth becomes 2 mm. When the tread is worn to

the tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.

Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for further

information.

LIFE OF TIRE

The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying

factors including, but not limited to:

• Driving style

• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures

can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across

the tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will

reduce tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire

replacement.

• Distance driven

• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or

higher, and summer tires typically have a reduced

tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle

maintenance schedule is highly recommended.

WARNING!

Tires and the spare tire should be re-

placed af

ter six years, regardless of the

remaining tread. Failure to follow this warning

can result in sudden tire failure. You could lose

control and have a collision resulting in serious

injury or death.

Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little

exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from con-

tact with oil, grease, and gasoline.

(fig. 210)

1 — Worn Tire

2 — New Tire

376

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

REPLACEMENT TIRES

The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of

many characteristics. They should be inspected regu-

larly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures.

The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use

tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and

performance when replacement is needed. Refer to the

paragraph on “Tread Wear Indicator.” Refer to the Tire

and Loading Information placard or the Vehicle Certi-

fication Label for the size designation of your tire. The

Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be

found on the original equipment tire sidewall. See the

Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety

Information section of this manual for more informa-

tion relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a

tire.

It is recommended to replace the two front tires or

two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can

seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever

replace a wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifica-

tions match those of the original wheels.

It is recommended you contact your authorized tire

dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions

you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure

to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely af-

fect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.

WARNING!

• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating

oth

er than that specified for your ve-

hicle. Some combinations of unapproved tires

and wheels may change suspension dimensions

and performance characteristics, resulting in

changes to steering,handling,and braking of your

vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling

and stress to steering and suspension compo-

nents.You could lose control and have a collision

resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the

tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved

for your vehicle.

• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or

capacity, other than what was originally

equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a

smaller load index could result in tire overloading

and failure. You could lose control and have a

collision.

(Continued)

377

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

WARNING! (Continued)

• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having

adequate speed capability can result in sudden

tire failure and loss of vehicle control.

Replacing original tires with tires of a

different size may result in false speed-

ometer and odometer readings.

TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)

Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body

clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard

against damage.

• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as

recommended by the traction device manufacturer.

• Install on Front Tires Only.

• Due to limited clearance, on a 225/65R17 102H tire,

use reduced size snow chains or traction devices

with a maximum projection of 6 mm beyond the tire

profile.

WARNING!

Using tires of different size and type

(M+S, Sn

ow) between front and rear

axles can cause unpredictable handling.You could

lose control and have a collision.

378

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires,

observe the following precautions:

• Because of restricted traction device

clearance between tires and other suspension

components, it is important that only traction

devices in good condition are used.Broken devices

can cause serious damage.Stop the vehicle imme-

diately if noise occurs that could indicate device

breakage. Remove the damaged parts of the de-

vice before further use.

• Install device as tightly as possible and then

retighten after dr iving about 0.8 km.

• Do not exceed 48 km/h.

• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and

large bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.

• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry

pavement.

• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s in-

structions on the method of installation, operat-

ing speed, and conditions for use. Always use the

suggested o perating s peed of the device manufac-

turer’s if it is less than 48 km/h.

• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare

tire.

FUEL REQUIREMENTS — GASOLINE

ENGINE

All engines are designed to meet all emissions regula-

tions and provide excellent fuel economy and perfor-

mance when using high quality unleaded gasoline with a

minimum Research Octane Number (RON) of 91.

Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful

to your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock

at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service

is required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems

such as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you

experience these symptoms, try another brand of

gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.

Over 40 auto manufacturer's world wide have issued

and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the

Worldwide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel

properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions,

performance, and durability for your vehicle. The

manufacturer recommends the use of gasoline that

meets the WWFC specifications if they are available .

Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane

rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and

stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines

that have these additives may help improve fuel

economy, reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle per-

formance.

379

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard

starting, stalling and stumble. If you experience these

problems, try another brand of gasoline before consid-

ering service for the vehicle.

CLEAN AIR GASOLINE

Many gasolines are now being blended to contribute to

cleaner air, especially in those areas where air pollution

levels are high. These new blends provide a cleaner

burning fuel and some are referred to as “reformulated

gasoline.”

The manufacturer supports these efforts toward

cleaner air. You can help by using these blends as they

become available.

MMT IN GASOLINE

MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is

blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gaso-

line blended with MMT provides no performance ad-

vantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number

without MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces

spark plug life and reduces emission system perfor-

mance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recom-

mends that gasoline without MMT be used in your

vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline may not be

indicated on the gasoline pump; therefore, you should

ask your gasoline retailer whether or not his/her gaso-

line contains MMT.

MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL

Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane

rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and

stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines

that have these additives will help improve fuel

economy, reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle per-

formance.

Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should

be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum

and varnish removal may contain active solvents or

similar ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket

and diaphragm materials.

380

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

WARNING!

Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases

is deadly.

Follow the precautions below

to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning:

• Do not inhale exhaust gases.They contain car-

bon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which

can kill. Never run the engine in a closed area,

such as a garage,and never sit in a parked vehicle

with the engine running for an extended period.

If the vehicle is sto pped in an open area with the

engine running for more than a short period,

adjust the ventilation system to force fresh, out-

side air into the vehicle.

• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper

maintenance.Have the exhaust system inspected

every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnor-

mal conditions repaired promptly. Until re-

paired, drive with all side windows fully open.

• Keep the liftgate closed when driving your ve-

hicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poi-

sonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.

FLEXIBLE FUEL — 3.6L ENGINE

ONLY (for versions/markets where

provided)

E-85 GENERAL INFORMATION

The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel

vehicles only. These vehicles may be identified by a

unique fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85)

or Unleaded Gasoline Only. This section only cov-

ers those subjects that are unique to these vehicles.

Please refer to the other sections of this manual for

information on features that are common between

Flexible Fuel and gasoline-only powered vehicles.

(fig. 211) (fig. 212)

(fig. 211)

E-85 Fuel Cap

381

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

ETHANOL FUEL (E-85)

E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol

and 15% unleaded gasoline.

WARNING!

Ethanol vapors are extremely flam-

mable an

d could cause serious personal

injury. Never have any smoking materials lit in or

near the vehicle when removing the fuel filler

tube cap (gas cap) or filling the tank. Do not use

E-85 as a cleaning agent and never use it near an

open flame.

FUEL REQUIREMENTS

Your vehicle will operate on both unleaded gasoline

with a minimum Research Octane Number (RON) of

91, or E-85 fuel, or any mixture of these two. For best

results, a refueling pattern that alternates between

E-85 and unleaded gasoline should be avoided.

When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that:

• You do not add less than 19 Liters when refueling.

• You operate the vehicle immediately after refueling

for a period of at least 5 minutes.

Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard

starting and/or significant deterioration in driveability

during warm up.

NOTE:

• When the ambient temperature is above 32° C, you

may experience hard starting and rough idle follow-

ing start up even if the above recommendations are

followed.

• Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully

compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your

engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be

caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline

additive may be used.

(fig. 212)

E-85 Badge

382

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

SELECTION OF ENGINE OIL FOR FLEXIBLE

FUEL VEHICLES (E-85) AND GASOLINE

VEHICLES

FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formu-

lated engine oils. These special requirements are in-

cluded in SELENIA K POWER fully synthetic engine

oils, and in equivalent oils meeting FIAT Qualification

9.55535-CR1 API SN, ILSAC GF-5. The manufacturer

only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and

meet the requirements of FIAT Qualification 9.55535-

CR1 API SN, ILSAC GF-5 that contain additional re-

quirements, developed during extensive fleet testing,

to provide additional protection for your engine. Use

SELENIA K POWER fully synthetic engine oils or an

equivalent oil meeting the requirements of FIAT Quali-

fication 9.55535-CR1 API SN, ILSAC GF-5.

STARTING

The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for

use when ambient temperatures fall below -18°C. In

the range of -18°C to 0°C, you may experience an

increase in the time it t akes for your engine to start,

and a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesita-

tions) until the engine is fully warmed up.

NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) is

beneficial for E-85 startability when the ambient tem-

perature is less than 0°C.

CRUISING RANGE

Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per liter than

gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel con-

sumption. You can expect your kilometers per liter and

your driving range to decrease by about 30%, com-

pared to gasoline operation.

REPLACEMENT PARTS

Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV)

are designed to be compatible with ethanol. Always be

sure that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol

compatible parts.

Replacing fuel system components with

non-ethanol compatible components

can damage your vehicle.

MAINTENANCE

Do not use ethanol mixture greater than

85% in your vehicle. It will cause difficulty

in cold starting and may affect drivability.

383

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

FUEL REQUIREMENTS — DIESEL

ENGINE

Use Premium Quality Diesel fuels with a Cetane rating

of 50 or higher, and meeting the EN590 standard are

highly recommended. See your authorized dealer for

further information regarding fuels available in your area.

FLUID CAPACITIES

Metric

Fuel (Approximate)

Front Wheel Drive Models 77.6 Liters

All Wheel Drive Models 79.8 Liters

Engine Oil with Filter

2.4L Engine 4.3 Liters

3.6L Engine 5.6 Liters

2.0L Diesel Engine 5.2 Liters

Cooling System *

2.4L Engine and Single- or Dual-Zone Climate Control System 10.1 Liters

2.4L Engine and Three-Zone Climate Control System 11.0 Liters

3.6L Engine and Single- or Dual-Zone Climate Control System 12.4 Liters

3.6L Engine and Three-Zone Climate Control System 13.7 Liters

2.0L Diesel Engine and Single- or Dual-Zone Climate Control System 9.1 Liters

2.0L Diesel Engine and Three-Zone Climate Control System 9.9 Liters

* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.

384

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS

ENGINE

Component Fluids and Lubricants Specs (Genuine Parts)

Engine Coolant*

Red protective agent with antifreeze action, based on inhibited monoethyl

glycol with organic formula. Exceeds CUNA NC 956-16, ASTM D 3306 speci-

fications, FIAT Classification 9.55523 (PARAFLU UP Contractual Technical

Reference N° F101.M01. Cooling circuit usage percentage: 50% water 50%

PARAFLU UP **)

Engine Oil – 2.4L Engine***

SAE Grade 5W-20 fully synthetic engine oil that meets FIAT Classification

9.55535-CR1, API SN, ILSAC GF-5 (SELENIA K POWER, Contractual Techni-

cal Reference N°F102.F11).

SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to Fiat 9.55535-CR1 (SELENIA K POWER,

Contractual Technical Reference N°F042.F11) may be used when SAE 5W-20

engine oil is not available.

Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine***

SAE Grade 5W-20 fully synthetic engine oil that meets FIAT Classification

9.55535-CR1, API SN, ILSAC GF-5 (SELENIA K POWER, Contractual Techni-

cal Reference N°F102.F11).

SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to Fiat 9.55535-CR1 (SELENIA K POWER,

Contractual Technical Reference N°F042.F11) may be used when SAE 5W-20

engine oil is not available.

Engine Oil – 2.0L Diesel Engine***

SAE Grade 5W-30 fully synthetic engine oil that meets FIAT Classification

9.55535–S1, ACEA C2 (SELENIA WR P.E. Contractual Technical Reference

N°F510.D07)

Spark Plugs – 2.4L Engine We recommend you use OEM Original Equipment Spark Plugs

Spark Plugs – 3.6L Engine We recommend you use OEM Original Equipment Spark Plugs

385

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Component Fluids and Lubricants Specs (Genuine Parts)

Fuel Selection – 2.4L And 3.6L Engine Research Octane Number (RON) of 91 or higher

Fuel Selection – 2.0L Diesel Engine 50 Cetane or higher (Less than 15 ppm Sulfur)

Diesel Fuel Additive – 2.0L Diesel

Engine

Additive for diesel with antifreeze and protective action for diesel engines.

(TUTELA DIESEL ART, Contractual Technical Reference N° F601.L06. To be

mixed with the diesel fuel: 25 cc per 10 litres).

* IMPORTANT: Do not top up or mix with fluids with

different specifications.

** For particularly harsh climate conditions, a mixture

of 60% PARAFLU UP and 40% demineralized water

is recommended.

*** Lubricants with ACEA C2 performance as a mini-

mum may be used for Diesel engines in an emergency,

where no original products are available. In such event,

the engine may not provide optimal performance. We

recommend having the lubricant replaced as soon as

possible. Using products with specifications lower than

ILSAC GF-5 for gasoline engines or lower than ACEA

C2 for Diesel engines may cause engine damage not

covered by warranty.

386

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

CHASSIS

Component Fluids and Lubricants Specs (Genuine Parts)

Automatic Transmission (for

versions/markets, where provided)

Totally synthetic lubricant that meets FIAT Classification 9.55550-AV4

(TUTELA TRANSMISSION FORCE4, Contractual Technical Reference

No F108.F11).

Manual Transmission (for versions/

markets, where provided)

Grade SAE 75W synthetic lubricant that meets FIAT Classification 9.55550-

MZ6 (TUTELA TRANSMISSION GEARFORCE Contractual Technical Refer-

ence N° F002.F10)

Brake/Clutch Master Cylinder

Synthetic f luid that meets FIAT Classification 9.55597, FMVSS n° 116, DOT 4,

ISO 4925, SAE J-1704 (TUTELA TOP 4, Contractual Technical Reference

N° F001.A93)

Power Steering Reservoir

Totally synthetic lubricant that meets FIAT Classification 9.55550-AV4

(TUTELA TRANSMISSION FORCE4, Contractual Technical Reference

N° F108.F11)

Windshield/Rear Window Washer

Fluid

Mixture of alcohol, water and surfactants that meets FIAT Classification

9.55522, CUNA NC 956-11 (TUTELA PROFESSIONAL SC35, Contractual

Technical Reference N° F201.D02)

387

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

ARRANGEMENTS FOR DEALING WITH THE VEHICLE ATTHE END OF ITS LIFE

FIAT has been committed for many years to safeguarding the environment through the constant improvement of its

production processes and manufacturing products that are increasingly “eco-compatible”.

To give customers the best possible service in terms of respecting environmental laws and in response to European

Directive 2000/53/EC governing vehicles at the end of their life, FIAT is offering its customers the opportunity of handing

over their vehicle* at the end of its life without incurring any additional costs.

The European Directive sets out that when the vehicle is handed over the last keeper or owner should not incur any

expenses as a result of it having a zero or negative market value.

In all European Union countries, until 1st January 2007, only vehicles registered after 1st July 2002 were collected free of

charge, while since 2007 collection has been free of charge irrespective of the year of registration as long as the vehicle

contains its basic components (in particular, the engine and bodywork) and has no additional waste.

To hand your vehicle over at the end of its life without extra cost, go to one of our Dealerships or FIAT-authorized

collection and scrapping centres.

These centres have been carefully chosen to offer high quality service for the collection, treatment and recycling of unused

vehicles with respect to the environment.

You can find further information on these collection and scrapping centres either from a FIAT or FIAT Commercial Vehicle

Dealership or by calling the freephone number 00800 3428 0000 or by going on the FIAT website .

(*) Vehicle for transporting passengers with a maximum of nine seats and a total permitted weight of 3.5 t

388

389

390

CONTENTS

About Your Brakes......................140, 242

ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . .........141, 278

Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze). . ............347

Adding Fuel ..............................190

Adding Washer Fluid. . . .....................343

Additives, Fuel . ...........................380

Airbag.................................205

Air Bag

Advance Front Air Bag . ................205, 206

Air Bag Components . ....................205

Air bag Operation .......................207

Air Bag Warning Light . ....................213

Enhanced Accident Response . . . . ............212

Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . ............215

FrontAirBag ..........................205

If A Deployment Occurs . . . . . . .............211

Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . . .............207

Maintaining Your Air Bag System .............214

Side Air Bags . . . . . . . . ...................208

Air bag Light ......................213, 235, 273

Air bag Maintenance ........................214

Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) ......338

Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . ...........339

Air Conditioning Filter . . . .................90, 340

Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . ..........89, 91

Air Conditioning, Rear Zone. . . . . . . . .........76, 86

Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . ............339, 340

Air Conditioning System . ....................339

Air Pressure, Tires ......................275, 370

Alarm (Security Alarm)....................16, 278

Alarm System (Security Alarm) ...............16, 18

All Wheel Drive (AWD) .....................255

Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle .................5

Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ............346, 347, 384

Disposal .............................348

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................141

Anti-Lock War

ning Light ..............141, 143, 278

Arming System (Security Alarm) .................16

Auto Down Power Windows ..................128

Automatic Dimming Mirror ....................66

Automatic Door Locks ......................121

Automatic Headlights ........................92

Automatic Oil Change Indicator .................28

Automatic Transmission ..................246, 351

Adding Fluid ...........................352

Autostick .............................254

Fluid and Filter Changes ...................354

Fluid Level Check .......................352

Gear Ranges ...........................249

Autostick ...............................254

Auto Unlock, Doors ........................121

Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) .........112

Auxiliary Power Outlet ......................112

Back-Up Lights............................305

Battery .................................338

Gas Caution ...........................339

Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) .........14

Location .............................338

Belts, Seat...............................234

Body Mechanism Lubrication ..................341

B-Pillar Location...........................366

391

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Brake Assist System . . . . . . . .................143

Brake Control System, Electronic ...............141

Brake, Parking ............................242

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .............140, 349

Brake System . . . ......................140, 349

Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . .................141

Fluid Check . . . . . . . ....................350

Master Cylinder . .......................350

Parking ..............................242

Warning Light . . . . . . . . ..................276

Brake/Transmission Interlock . .................248

Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle ..........237

Brightness, Interior Lights . . . ..................96

Bulb Replacement . . ....................300, 301

Bulbs, Light...........................236, 300

Camera, Rear . . ..........................165

Capacities, Fluid ...........................384

Caps, Filler

Fuel ................................190

Oil (Engine) . . . . ................332, 334, 337

Power Steering . . . . .....................150

Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ................348

Carbon Monoxide Warning . . .................234

Cargo Area Cover . . . . .....................134

Cargo Area Features. . . . . ...................131

Cargo Compartment . . .....................131

Light ................................131

Luggage Carrier . . . . . ...................137

Cargo Load Floor. . ........................132

Cargo Management System . ..................132

Rollaway Tonneau Cover . .................134

Tri-Fold Load Floor . . . . . .................132

Cargo Tie-Downs..........................133

Cargo (Vehicle Loading)......................132

Cellular Phone............................190

Chains, Tire .............................378

Char

t, Tire Sizing ..........................362

Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ...............233

Checks, Safety ............................233

Child Safety Locks .........................121

Clean Air Gasoline .........................380

Cleaning

Wheels ..............................356

Windshield Wiper Blades ..................342

Climate Control ...........................70

Automatic .............................79

Manual................................70

Coin Holder .............................108

Cold Weather Operation ....................239

Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance ...............189

Compact Spare Tire ........................374

Computer, Trip/Travel........................30

Connector

UCI ................................189

Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) ...........189

Conserving Fuel............................29

Console, Floor ...........................108

Console, Overhead ........................105

Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ............348

Cooling System ...........................345

Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ................347

Coolant Capacity .......................384

Coolant Level ......................346, 348

Diesel Engine ..........................345

Disposal of Used Coolant ..................348

392

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . ............346

Inspection ............................348

Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . ............349

Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...........348

Radiator Cap ..........................348

Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . .346, 347, 384, 385

Temperature Gauge . ......................8

Corrosion Protection . . . ....................355

Cupholders ..............................115

Data Recorder, Event .......................215

Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights . ..............96

Defroster, Rear Window . . . . .................102

Defroster, Windshield ....................83, 235

Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . ..............98

Diagnostic System, Onboard ..................149

Diesel Fuel . . . . . . . . ...................384, 385

Diesel Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . ...........384

Dimmer Switch, Headlight .....................95

Dipsticks

Automatic Transmission . . . ................352

Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . ...................336

Power Steering . . . . . . . ..................150

Disabled Vehicle Towing . ....................318

Disposal

Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . ...........348

Door Locks

Door Locks ............................119

KeyFob ..............................119

Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...............119

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ................119

Door Locks, Automatic. . . . . . . . . . ............121

Downshifting. . . ..........................246

Driving

Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing Water

. .257

Driving to Achieve Maximum Fuel Economy .........29

DVD Player (Video Entertainment System™) .......168

E-85 Fuel ...............................381

Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) .........112

Electrical Power Outlets .....................112

Electric Remote Mirrors ......................67

Electronic Brake Control System ...............141

Anti-Lock Brake System ...................141

Brake Assist System ......................143

Electronic Roll Mitigation ..................144

Traction Control System ..................144

Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) ................144

Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control).........103

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ...............144

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC).....20, 165

Emergency, In Case of

Freeing Vehicle When Stuck ................314

Hazard Warning Flasher ...................107

Jump Starting ..........................279

Towing ..............................318

Engine...........................237, 332, 334

Air Cleaner ............................338

Break-In Recommendations .................237

Checking Oil Level .......................336

Compartment .......................332, 333

Compartment Identification .................333

Coolant (Antifreeze) ..................346, 385

Cooling ..............................345

Exhaust Gas Caution ..................131, 234

Fails to Start ...........................239

393

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Flooded, Starting . . . .....................239

Fuel Requirements . . . . ...................379

Jump Starting . . . . . . . ...................279

Oil ..........................336, 384, 385

Oil Change Interval . . . ................28, 337

Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . ...........332, 334, 337

Oil Selection . . . . ......................384

Operation . ...........................237

Starting . . . ...........................237

Temperature Gauge . . . . . ..................8

Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . ..................337

Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . ..................337

Enhanced Accident Response Feature ............212

Entry System, Illuminated . . . ..................97

Event Data Recorder . . . . . ..................215

Exhaust Gas Caution .................131, 234, 344

Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . .................234

Exterior Folding Mirrors ......................68

Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . ....................92

Exterior Lights. . . . . .......................236

Fabric Care . . . . . . . . . . . . ..................357

Filler Location Fuel . . . ......................190

Filters

Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . ..................338

Air Conditioning . . . . . . . ..............90, 340

Engine Oil . . . .........................385

Engine Oil Disposal ......................338

Flashers

Hazard Warning . .......................107

Turn Signal . .....................95, 236, 274

Flash-To-Pass . . ...........................95

Flexible Fuel Vehicles

Cruising Range .........................383

Engine Oil ............................383

Fuel Requirements ...................381, 382

Maintenance ...........................383

Replacement Parts .......................383

Starting ..............................383

Flooded Engine St

arting......................239

Floor Console ............................108

Fluid Capacities ...........................384

Fluid Leaks ..............................236

Fluid Level Checks

Automatic Transmission ...................352

Brake ...............................350

Cooling System .........................346

Engine Oil ............................336

Power Steering .........................150

Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts .............385

Fog Lights ......................94, 274, 302, 303

Fog Light Service .......................302, 303

Fog Lights, Rear........................278, 303

Folding Rear Seat ........................57, 62

Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ......................314

Fuel................................379, 384

Adding ..............................190

Additives .............................380

Conserving ............................29

Diesel ............................384, 385

Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .....................190

Gasoline .............................379

Gauge .................................7

Light .................................24

Octane Rating ......................379, 385

394

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Requirements ..........................379

Saver Mode ............................29

Specifications . . . . . .....................385

Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . ...............384

Fuel, Flexible . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................381

Fueling . . . . . . . . .........................190

Fuel Optimizer ............................29

Fuel Saver................................29

Fuel System Caution . .......................191

Fuses . .................................307

Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap).....................190

Gas Gauge (Fuel Gauge) .......................7

Gasoline, Clean Air ........................380

Gasoline (Fuel) ...........................379

Conserving ............................29

Gauges

Coolant Temperature . .....................8

Fuel . . ................................7

Speedometer ............................7

Tachometer .............................7

Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............249

Gear Select Lever Override . . . . . . . ............313

General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........12, 158

General Maintenance .......................335

Glass Cleaning . . ..........................358

Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . .............259

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . ...........258

Hazard

Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing

Water ...............................257

Hazard Warning Flasher . ....................107

Headlights

Automatic .............................92

Bulb Replacement .......................301

Cleaning .............................357

Delay ................................93

High Beam ............................301

High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ............95

Leveling ...............................92

Lights On Reminder ......................94

On With Wipers .....................93, 100

Passing ...............................95

Switch ................................92

Time Delay ............................

Washers .............................100

Headlight Washers .........................100

Head Restraints............................54

Heated Mirrors ............................69

Heated Seats..............................50

High Beam Indicator ........................274

High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch .......95

Hill Start Assist ...........................147

Holder, Coin .............................108

Holder, Cup .............................115

Hood Release ............................136

Ignition

Key ..................................8

Illuminated Entry ...........................97

Immobilizer (Sentry Key)......................11

Inflation Pressure Tires ......................275

Information Center, Vehicle ....................20

Inside Rearview Mirror .......................66

Instrument Cluster .........................273

395

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Instrument Panel and Controls ..................6

Instrument Panel Cover . . . ..................357

Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ................358

Interior Appearance Care . . . .................357

Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . ..................308

Interior Lights .............................96

Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ..............98

Intervention Regeneration Strategy ..............344

Introduction ...............................1

Jacking Instructions. . .......................286

Jack Location .........................283, 284

Jack Operation . . . . . . . . ...................286

Jump Starting. . . . . . . ......................279

Key Fob

Programming Additional Key Fobs ..............14

Programming Additional Transmitters ...........14

Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . ...................10

Keyless Enter-N-Go .....................123, 238

Keyless Entry System . . . . . . ..................13

Keyless Go ................................8

Key, Programming . . . . . . . ...................12

Key, Replacement. . . . . . . . . ..................12

Keys....................................8

Key, Sentr y (Immobilizer) . . ...................11

Lane Change and Turn Signals ..................95

Lane Change Assist . . . . . . ...................95

Lap/Shoulder Belts .........................194

Latches. ................................236

Hood ...............................136

Lead Free Gasoline .........................379

Leaks, Fluid ..............................236

Leveling, Headlight ..........................92

LifeofTires..............................376

Liftgate.................................130

Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer ................101

Light Bulbs ...........................236, 300

Lights ...............................92, 236

Airbag ........................213, 235, 273

Anti-Lock ............................143

Anti-Lock Warning ......................278

Automatic Headlights .....................92

Back-Up .............................305

Brake Assist

Warning .....................147

Brake Warning .........................276

Bulb Replacement .......................301

Courtesy/Reading ........................96

Dimmer Switch, Headlight ..................95

Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator ......147

Exterior ..............................236

Fog ...........................94, 274, 302

Hazard Warning Flasher ...................107

Headlight Leveling ........................92

Headlights ..........................92, 301

Headlights On Reminder ...................94

Headlights On With Wipers .............93, 100

Headlight Switch .........................92

High Beam ......................95, 274, 301

High Beam Indicator .....................274

High Beam/Low Beam Select .................95

Illuminated Entry ........................97

Instrument Cluster ....................92, 273

Intensity Control ........................96

Interior ...............................96

396

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

License . . . . . . . . . . . . . .................307

Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . ............94

Low Fuel ............................7,24

LowTire .............................275

Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ..........273

Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . ...............96

Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) ............96

Park ................................301

Passing ...............................95

Reading ...............................96

RearFog ..........................278, 303

Rear Servicing . .........................305

Rear Tail Lamps .........................305

Seat Belt Reminder ......................276

Service ...........................300, 301

Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) ......273

Side Marker ...........................301

Side Repeater . . . .......................304

Tire Pressure Monitoring ( TPMS) .........151, 275

Traction Control . . . .....................147

Turn Signal ...............95, 236, 274, 301, 305

Vanity Mirror ...........................69

Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) .......273

Load Floor, Cargo .........................132

Loading Vehicle

Tires ................................366

Locks . .................................119

Automatic Door . . . . . . . .................121

Auto Unlock ..........................121

Child Protection . . . . . . ..................121

Door ...............................119

Power Door . . . . . . . . . ..................120

Steering Wheel ..........................20

Low Tire Pressure System ....................151

Lubrication, Body ..........................341

LuggageRack(RoofRack)....................137

Lug Nuts ...............................282

Maintenance Free Battery ....................338

Maintenance, General .......................335

Maintenance Pr

ocedures .....................335

Maintenance Schedule . . . ....................321

Maintenance, Sunroof .......................119

Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) .........273

Manual Transaxle ..........................354

Fluid Level Check .......................354

Lubricant Selection ......................354

Manual Transmission........................245

Frequency of Fluid Change .................354

Lubricant Selection ......................354

Map/Reading Lights..........................96

Marker Lights, Side .........................301

Master Cylinder (Brakes) .....................350

Mini-Trip Computer .........................30

Mirrors..............................66, 106

Automatic Dimming ......................66

Electric Powered .........................67

Electric Remote .........................67

Exterior Folding .........................68

Heated ...............................69

Outside ...............................66

Rearview ..............................66

Vanity ................................69

Mode

Fuel Saver .............................29

Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle .................5

397

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Monitor, Tire Pressure System .................151

Multi-Function Control Lever...................95

Navigation System (Uconnect® gps) ..........165, 166

New Vehicle Break-In Period ..................237

Occupant Restraints ........................192

Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel)..............379, 385

Odometer . . . ...........................275

Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . ..............28, 275

Oil Change Indicator, Reset. . . ..............28, 275

Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..............336, 385

Capacity . . . . . ........................384

Change Interval ......................28, 337

Checking .............................336

Dipstick . . . . . . . . ......................336

Disposal .............................338

Filter ................................385

Filter Disposal . . . . . ....................338

Recommendation . . . . . ..................384

Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .............337, 384

Onboard Diagnostic System ...................149

Operating Precautions . . . . . .................149

Operator Manual (Owner's Manual) ...............3

Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . ..................66

Overhead Console .........................105

Owner's Manual (Operator Manual) ...............3

Paint Care. . . . . . . . . . . . ...................355

Parking Brake . ...........................242

Passenger Seat Back Tilt (Easy Entry System) ........60

Passing Light . . . ...........................95

Pets, Transporting . . . . .....................233

Placard, Tire and Loading Information ............366

Power

Brakes ...............................140

Distribution Center (Fuses) ................310

Door Locks ...........................120

Mirrors ...............................67

Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ...........112

Seats ................................48

Steering ..............................150

Sunroof ..............................117

ransfer Unit ..........................354

Windows .............................127

Power Transfer Unit ........................354

Preparation for Jacking ......................284

Pretensioners

Seat Belts .............................199

Programming Transmitters (Remote Keyless Entry) ....13

Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ............348

Radio Operation ..........................190

Radio Remote Controls......................167

Radio (Sound Systems) ......................167

Rear Air Conditioning .....................76, 86

Rear Axle (Differential) ......................354

Rear Camera .............................165

Rear Cupholder ...........................115

Rear Drive Assembly .......................354

Rear Fog Lights ...........................278

RearLiftgate.............................130

Rear Park Assist System .....................159

Rear Seat, Folding ........................57, 62

RearviewMirrors...........................66

Rear Window Defroster .....................102

398

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . ..............101

Rear Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...........101

Reclining Front Seats . . . .....................52

Reclining Rear Seats.......................59, 62

Recorder, Event Data .......................215

Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . ...............270

Refrigerant . . . ...........................340

Release, Hood ............................136

Reminder, Lights On.........................94

Reminder, Seat Belt ........................193

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . .............13

Programming Additional Key Fobs ..............14

Programming Additional Transmitters ...........14

Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls...........167

Repeater Lights, Side........................304

Replacement Bulbs .........................300

Replacement Keys . . . . ......................12

Replacement Tires .........................377

Resetting Oil Change Indicator . . . ...........28, 275

Restraint, Head . . ..........................54

Restraints, Occupant . . . ....................192

Retractable Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . ...........134

Reverse Lights ............................305

Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . .............314

Roof Rack (Luggage Rack) . . . . ................137

Rotation, Tires. . . . ........................359

Safety Checks Inside Vehicle. . . . . . . ............234

Safety Checks Outside Vehicle .................236

Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . .............131, 234

Safety Information, Tire. . ....................361

Safety Tips . . . . . .........................233

Schedule, Maintenance . .....................321

Seat Belt

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage ......198

BeltAlert .............................193

Energy Management Feature ................199

Lap/Shoulder Belts .......................194

Seat Belt Pr

etensioner ....................199

Seat Belt Reminder .......................193

Seat Belt System ........................192

Seat Belt Maintenance .......................358

Seat Belt Reminder.........................193

Seat Belts............................193, 234

Adjustable Shoulder Belt ..................198

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage .........198

Front Seat .....................193, 194, 196

Inspection ............................234

Operating Instructions ....................196

Pretensioners ..........................199

Rear Seat .............................194

Reminder .............................276

Untwisting Procedure ....................197

Seats ...................................48

Adjustment ............................48

Easy Entry .............................60

Heated ...............................50

Height Adjustment . . ...................48, 53

Power ................................48

Rear Folding .........................57, 62

Reclining ..............................52

Reclining Rear ........................59, 62

Seatback Release ....................53, 57, 62

Tilting ................................48

Security Alarm .........................16, 278

Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) ........346, 347, 385

399

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Sentry Key (Immobilizer). .....................11

Sentry Key Programming......................12

Sentry Key Replacement . . . ...................12

Service Engine Soon Light (Malfunction Indicator) . . . .273

Shift Lever Override . . . . . . ..................313

Shoulder Belts ............................194

Side Repeater Lights . . . . ....................304

Side View Mirror Adjustment...................66

Signals, Turn ....................95, 236, 274, 305

Snow Chains (Tire Chains). . ..................378

SnowTires..............................372

Sound Systems. . . . . . . . . ...................167

Sound Systems (Radio) . . ....................167

Spare Tire ........................284, 374, 375

Spark Plugs . . . . . . . .......................385

Specifications

Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . .....................385

Oil .................................385

Speed Control (Cruise Control) ................103

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . ...................7

Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...................237

Cold Weather . ........................239

Engine Fails to Start . . . ...................239

Starting and Operating ......................237

Starting Procedures . . . . ....................237

Steering

Column Controls . . . .....................95

Column Lock . . . . .......................64

Power ...............................150

Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . ..................64

Wheel, Heated . . ........................65

Wheel Lock . . . . ........................20

Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . ...................64

Steering Wheel Audio Controls ................167

Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . . .167

Storage.................................359

Storage, Vehicle ............................89

Stuck, Freeing ............................314

Sunglasses Storage .........................106

SunRoof................................117

Sunroof Maintenance .......................119

Sun Visor Extension .........................69

Supplement

al Restraint System - Airbag ...........205

Sway Control, Trailer .......................149

System, Navigation (Uconnect® gps) .............166

Tachometer ...............................7

Taillights ................................305

Telescoping Steering Column ...................64

Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant...............8

Tie Down Hooks, Cargo .....................133

Tilt Steering Column ........................64

Time Delay, Headlight........................93

Tire and Loading Information Placard .............366

Tire Markings ............................361

Tires...............................236, 369

Aging (Life of Tires) ......................376

Air Pressure ...........................369

Chains ...............................378

Compact Spare .........................374

General Information .....................369

High Speed ............................371

Inflation Pressures .......................370

LifeofTires ...........................376

Load Capacity ..........................366

Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) .............151

400

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Replacement . . . .......................377

Rotation . . . . . . . . . ....................359

Safety ............................361, 369

Sizes ................................362

SnowTires ............................372

Spare Tire ............................284

Spinning . . . . . . ........................375

Trailer Towing .........................264

Tread Wear Indicators ....................376

Tire Safety Information . .....................361

Tire Service Kit ...........................293

Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . ............262

To Open Hood ...........................136

Towing . ................................258

Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . .................318

Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...............262

Recreational ...........................270

Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . .................262

Towing Eyes .............................315

Towing Vehicle Behind a Motorhome . ............270

Traction . . . . . . ..........................256

Traction Control ..........................144

Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . ............149

Trailer Towing ............................258

Cooling System Tips . . . . .................269

Hitches ..............................269

Minimum Requirements . . . . ...............263

Tips ................................268

Trailer and Tongue Weight .................262

Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...............265

Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . .............262

Trailer Weight . . . .........................262

Transaxle

Manual ..............................354

Transmission

Automatic .........................246, 351

Filter ................................354

Fluid ................................354

Man

ual ..............................245

Transmitter Battery Ser vice (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .14

Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . .13, 14

Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ..........13

Transporting Pets ..........................233

Tread Wear Indicators.......................376

Trip Odometer ...........................275

Turn Signals ........................95, 274, 305

UCI Connector ...........................189

Uconnect®

Screen Activated Features ...................31

Underhood Fuses..........................310

Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector .....189

Unleaded Gasoline .........................379

Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ................197

Upholstery Care ..........................357

Vanity Mirrors .............................69

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............360

Vehicle Loading ...........................366

Vehicle Modifications/Alterations .................5

Vehicle Security Alarm (Security Alarm) ............16

Vehicle Storage .........................89, 359

Video Entertainment System™ (Rear Seat Video

System)...............................168

Viscosity, Engine Oil ........................337

401

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . ..................107

Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description).....273

Washer

Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . ..................343

Washers, Headlight. . .......................100

Washers, Windshield . . . . . . ............97, 99, 343

Water

Driving Through . . . . . ...................257

Wheel and Wheel Trim. . . . . .................356

Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . .................356

Wind Buffeting . . ......................118, 129

Window Fogging ...........................90

Windows . ..............................127

Power ...............................127

Windshield Defroster . . . . . . .................235

Windshield Washers . . . . ..................97, 99

Fluid ................................343

Windshield Wiper Blades . . . .................342

Windshield Wipers .........................97

Wiper Blade Replacement . . . .................342

Wiper, Delay. . . . ..........................98

Wiper, Rear . . . . . . .......................101

Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . ..................98

Wrecker Towing ..........................318

402

KNOWING

YOUR

VEHICLE

SAFETY

STARTING

AND

DRIVING

WARNING

LIGHTS

AND

MESSAGES

IN AN

EMERGENCY

SERVICING

AND CARE

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

Notes

Fiat Group Automobiles S.p.A. - Parts & Services - Technical Services - Service Engineering

Largo Senatore G. Agnelli, 3 - 10040 Volvera - Torino (Italia)

Print n. 530.02.337 - 09/2014 - Edition 1

Conosciamo realmente la sua vettura perché l’abbiamo

inventata, progettata e costruita: ne conosciamo ogni

minimo dettaglio. Presso le ofﬁcine autorizzate Fiat

può trovare tecnici addestrati direttamente da noi, in

grado di offrire la qualità e la professionalità necessarie

per tutti gli interventi di assistenza.

Le ofﬁcine Fiat sono sempre facilmente raggiungibili

per la manutenzione periodica, i controlli stagionali e

per fornirle i consigli pratici dei nostri esperti.

Con i ricambi originali la sua nuova vettura

conserva nel tempo l’afﬁdabilità, il comfort e le

prestazioni: è per questo che l’ha acquistata.

Le consigliamo di chiedere sempre ricambi originali

per i componenti utilizzati sulle nostre vetture, perché

nascono dal nostro impegno costante nella ricerca e

nello sviluppo di tecnologie altamente innovative.

Per tutte queste ragioni: è opportuno afﬁdarsi

ai ricambi originali, perché sono gli unici

appositamente progettati per la sua vettura.

PERCHÉ SCEGLIERE

RICAMBI ORIGINALI

1742588-530.02.335-IT_FIAT_Freemont_OM-cover.indd 2 9/12/14 9:34 AM

OWNER HANDBOOK

FIATFREEMONT

ENGLISH

The data contained in this publication is intended merely as a guide. FIAT reserves the right to modify the models and

versions described in this booklet at any time for technical and commercial reasons.

If you have any further questions please consult your FIAT dealer.

Printed in recycled paper without chlorine.

1742586_EE_FIAT_Freemont_OM_cover.indd 1 8/27/14 3:52 PM

uw mistlichten laten branden. hoe steek je uw mistlichten aan, Gesteld op 7-10-2021 om 11:32
Reageer op deze vraag Misbruik melden

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

lees eerst de handleiding door;
controleer of uw vraag al eerder door iemand anders is gesteld;
probeer uw vraag zo duidelijk mogelijk te stellen;
heeft u een probleem en al geprobeerd om dit op te lossen, vermeld dit erbij aub;
heeft u een oplossing gekregen van een bezoeker dan horen wij dat graag in dit forum;
wilt u een reactie geven op een vraag of antwoord, gebruik dan niet dit formulier maar klik op de knop 'reageer op deze vraag';
uw vraag wordt direct op de website gezet; vermijd daarom persoonlijke gegevens in te vullen;

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Fiat Freemont - 2014 bij:

nieuwe vragen en antwoorden
nieuwe handleidingen

U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.

Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Fiat Freemont - 2014 in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 3,52 mb groot.

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Andere handleiding(en) van Fiat Freemont - 2014

Fiat Freemont - 2014 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Nederlands - 432 pagina's

Fiat Freemont - 2014 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Deutsch - 460 pagina's

Fiat Freemont - 2014 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Français - 444 pagina's

Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.

Fiat Freemont - 2014 Handleiding

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Misbruik melden

Product:

Spelregels forum

Abonneren

Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Andere handleiding(en) van Fiat Freemont - 2014

Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Info

Fiat Freemont - 2014 Handleiding

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Forum

Misbruik melden

Product:

Spelregels forum

Abonneren

Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Andere handleiding(en) van Fiat Freemont - 2014

Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Info